DsPIC Programmers Reference 70157C

dsPIC30F/33F Programmers Reference Manual
High-performance Digital Signal Controllers
2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
DS70157C
Note the following details of the code protection feature on Microchip devices: Microchip products meet the specification contained in their particular Microchip Data Sheet. Microchip believes that its family of products is one of the most secure families of its kind on the market today, when used in the intended manner and under normal conditions. There are dishonest and possibly illegal methods used to breach the code protection feature. All of these methods, to our knowledge, require using the Microchip products in a manner outside the operating specifications contained in Microchips Data Sheets. Most likely, the person doing so is engaged in theft of intellectual property. Microchip is willing to work with the customer who is concerned about the integrity of their code. Neither Microchip nor any other semiconductor manufacturer can guarantee the security of their code. Code protection does not mean that we are guaranteeing the product as unbreakable.
Code protection is constantly evolving. We at Microchip are committed to continuously improving the code protection features of our products. Attempts to break Microchips code protection feature may be a violation of the Digital Millennium Copyright Act. If such acts allow unauthorized access to your software or other copyrighted work, you may have a right to sue for relief under that Act.
Information contained in this publication regarding device applications and the like is provided only for your convenience and may be superseded by updates. It is your responsibility to ensure that your application meets with your specifications. MICROCHIP MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WRITTEN OR ORAL, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, RELATED TO THE INFORMATION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ITS CONDITION, QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PURPOSE. Microchip disclaims all liability arising from this information and its use. Use of Microchip devices in life support and/or safety applications is entirely at the buyers risk, and the buyer agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Microchip from any and all damages, claims, suits, or expenses resulting from such use. No licenses are conveyed, implicitly or otherwise, under any Microchip intellectual property rights.
Trademarks The Microchip name and logo, the Microchip logo, Accuron, dsPIC, KEELOQ, KEELOQ logo, MPLAB, PIC, PICmicro, PICSTART, PRO MATE, rfPIC and SmartShunt are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. FilterLab, Linear Active Thermistor, MXDEV, MXLAB, SEEVAL, SmartSensor and The Embedded Control Solutions Company are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. Analog-for-the-Digital Age, Application Maestro, CodeGuard, dsPICDEM, dsPICDEM.net, dsPICworks, dsSPEAK, ECAN, ECONOMONITOR, FanSense, In-Circuit Serial Programming, ICSP, ICEPIC, Mindi, MiWi, MPASM, MPLAB Certified logo, MPLIB, MPLINK, mTouch, PICkit, PICDEM, PICDEM.net, PICtail, PIC32 logo, PowerCal, PowerInfo, PowerMate, PowerTool, REAL ICE, rfLAB, Select Mode, Total Endurance, UNI/O, WiperLock and ZENA are trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. SQTP is a service mark of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. All other trademarks mentioned herein are property of their respective companies. 2008, Microchip Technology Incorporated, Printed in the U.S.A., All Rights Reserved. Printed on recycled paper.
Microchip received ISO/TS-16949:2002 certification for its worldwide headquarters, design and wafer fabrication facilities in Chandler and Tempe, Arizona; Gresham, Oregon and design centers in California and India. The Companys quality system processes and procedures are for its PIC MCUs and dsPIC DSCs, KEELOQ code hopping devices, Serial EEPROMs, microperipherals, nonvolatile memory and analog products. In addition, Microchips quality system for the design and manufacture of development systems is ISO 9001:2000 certified.
DS70157C-page ii
Table of Contents
PAGE
SECTION 1. INTRODUCTION
1-1
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 1-2 Manual Objective ............................................................................................................................................. 1-2 Development Support ...................................................................................................................................... 1-2 Style and Symbol Conventions ........................................................................................................................ 1-3 Instruction Set Symbols ................................................................................................................................... 1-4 Related Documents .......................................................................................................................................... 1-5
SECTION 2. PROGRAMMERS MODEL
2-1
dsPIC30F/33F Overview .................................................................................................................................. 2-2 Programmers Model ........................................................................................................................................ 2-3
SECTION 3. INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW
3-1
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-2 Instruction Set Overview .................................................................................................................................. 3-2 Instruction Set Summary Tables ...................................................................................................................... 3-3
SECTION 4. INSTRUCTION SET DETAILS
4-1
Data Addressing Modes ................................................................................................................................... 4-2 Program Addressing Modes ........................................................................................................................... 4-11 Instruction Stalls ............................................................................................................................................. 4-12 Byte Operations ............................................................................................................................................. 4-13 Word Move Operations .................................................................................................................................. 4-16 Using 10-bit Literal Operands ........................................................................................................................ 4-19 Software Stack Pointer and Frame Pointer .................................................................................................... 4-20 Conditional Branch Instructions ..................................................................................................................... 4-25 Z Status Bit ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-26 Assigned Working Register Usage ................................................................................................................. 4-27 DSP Data Formats ......................................................................................................................................... 4-30 Accumulator Usage ........................................................................................................................................ 4-32 Accumulator Access ....................................................................................................................................... 4-33 DSP MAC Instructions ................................................................................................................................... 4-33 DSP Accumulator Instructions ....................................................................................................................... 4-37 Scaling Data with the FBCL Instruction .......................................................................................................... 4-37 Normalizing the Accumulator with the FBCL Instruction ................................................................................ 4-39
SECTION 5. INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTIONS
5-1
Instruction Symbols .......................................................................................................................................... 5-2 Instruction Encoding Field Descriptors Introduction ......................................................................................... 5-2 Instruction Description Example ....................................................................................................................... 5-6 Instruction Descriptions .................................................................................................................................... 5-7
SECTION 6. REFERENCE
6-1
Data Memory Map ............................................................................................................................................ 6-2 Core Special Function Register Map ................................................................................................................ 6-4 Program Memory Map ..................................................................................................................................... 6-7 Instruction Bit Map ........................................................................................................................................... 6-9 Instruction Set Summary Table ...................................................................................................................... 6-11 Revision History ............................................................................................................................................. 6-19
DS70157C-page iii

NOTES:
DS70157C - page iv
1
Introduction
Section 1. Introduction
HIGHLIGHTS
This section of the manual contains the following topics: 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1-2 Manual Objective ........................................................................................................... 1-2 Development Support .................................................................................................... 1-2 Style and Symbol Conventions ...................................................................................... 1-3 Instruction Set Symbols ................................................................................................. 1-4 Related Documents ....................................................................................................... 1-5
DS70157C-page 1-1

1.1 Introduction
Microchip Technologys focus is on products that meet the needs of the embedded control market. We are a leading supplier of: 8-bit general purpose microcontrollers (PIC MCUs) dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F 16-bit Digital Signal Controllers (dsPIC DSCs) Speciality and standard nonvolatile memory devices Security devices (KEELOQ Security ICs) Application-specific standard products
Please request a Microchip Product Selector Guide for a listing of all the interesting products that we have to offer. This literature can be obtained from your local sales office or downloaded from the Microchip web site (www.microchip.com).
1.2
Manual Objective
PICmicro MCU, dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices are grouped by the size of their Instruction Word and Data Path. The current device families are: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Base-Line: Mid-Range: High-End: Enhanced: dsPIC30F/33F: 12-bit Instruction Word length, 8-bit Data Path 14-bit Instruction Word length, 8-bit Data Path 16-bit Instruction Word length, 8-bit Data Path 16-bit Instruction Word length, 8-bit Data Path 24-bit Instruction Word length, 16-bit Data Path
This manual is a software developers reference for the dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F DSC device families. This manual describes the Instruction Set in detail and also provides general information to assist the user in developing software for the dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F families. This manual does not include detailed information about the core, peripherals, system integration or device-specific information. The user should refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for information about the core, peripherals and system integration. For device-specific information, the user should refer to the individual data sheets. The information that can be found in the data sheets includes: Device memory map Device pinout and packaging details Device electrical specifications List of peripherals included on the device
Code examples are given throughout this manual. These examples are valid for any device in the dsPIC30F or dsPIC33F family.
1.3
Development Support
Microchip offers a wide range of development tools that allow users to efficiently develop and debug application code. Microchips development tools can be broken down into four categories: Code generation Hardware/Software debug Device programmer Product evaluation boards
Information about the latest tools, product briefs and user guides can be obtained from the Microchip web site (www.microchip.com) or from your local Microchip Sales Office. Microchip offers other reference tools to speed the development cycle. These include: Application Notes Reference Designs Microchip web site Local Sales Offices with Field Application Support Corporate Support Line
The Microchip web site also lists the other sites that may be useful references.
DS70157C-page 1-2
1.4 Style and Symbol Conventions
1
Introduction
Throughout this document, certain style and font format conventions are used. Most format conventions imply a distinction should be made for the emphasized text. The MCU industry has many symbols and non-conventional word definitions/abbreviations. Table 1-1 provides a description of the conventions used in this document. Table 1-1: set clear Reset Document Conventions Description
Symbol or Term
To force a bit/register to a value of logic 1. To force a bit/register to a value of logic 0. 1) To force a register/bit to its default state. 2) A condition in which the device places itself after a device Reset occurs. Some bits will be forced to 0 (such as interrupt enable bits), while others will be forced to 1 (such as the I/O data direction bits). 0xnnnn Designates the number nnnn in the hexadecimal number system. These conventions are used in the code examples. For example, 0x013F or 0xA800. : (colon) Used to specify a range or the concatenation of registers/bits/pins. One example is ACCAU:ACCAH:ACCAL, which is the concatenation of three registers to form the 40-bit Accumulator. Concatenation order (left-right) usually specifies a positional relationship (MSb to LSb, higher to lower). <> Specifies bit(s) locations in a particular register. One example is SR<IPL2:IPL0> (or IPL<2:0>), which specifies the register and associated bits or bit positions. LSb, MSb Indicates the Least Significant or Most Significant bit in a field. LSB, MSB, lsw, Indicates the Least/Most Significant Byte or least/most significant word in msw a field of bits. Courier Font Used for code examples, binary numbers and for Instruction Mnemonics in the text. Times Font Used for equations and variables. Times, Bold Font, Used in explanatory text for items called out from a Italics graphic/equation/example. Note: A Note presents information that we wish to re-emphasize, either to help you avoid a common pitfall, or make you aware of operating differences between some device family members. In most instances, a Note is used in a shaded box (as illustrated below), however, when referenced to a table, a Note will stand-alone and immediately follow the associated table (as illustrated below Table 1-2). Note: This is a Note in a shaded note box.
DS70157C-page 1-3

1.5 Instruction Set Symbols
The Summary Tables in Section 3.2 and Section 6.5, and the instruction descriptions in Section 5.4 utilize the symbols shown in Table 1-2. Table 1-2: Symbol Symbols Used in Instruction Summary Tables and Descriptions Description Optional field or operation The location addressed by text The contents of text The literal defined by text a must be in the set of [b, c, d] Register bit field Optional label name Accumulator A or Accumulator B Accumulator Write Back 4-bit wide bit position (0:7 in Byte mode, 0:15 in Word mode) Absolute address, label or expression (resolved by the linker) File register address 1-bit literal (0:1) 4-bit literal (0:15) 5-bit literal (0:31) 8-bit literal (0:255) 10-bit literal (0:255 in Byte mode, 0:1023 in Word mode) 14-bit literal (0:16383) 16-bit literal (0:65535) 23-bit literal (0:8388607) Signed 4-bit literal (-8:7) Signed 6-bit literal (-32:31) (range is limited to -16:16) Signed 10-bit literal (-512:511) Signed 16-bit literal (-32768:32767) Top-of-Stack Base working register Destination working register (direct and indirect addressing) Working register divide pair (dividend, divisor) Working register multiplier pair (same source register) Working register multiplier pair (different source registers) Both source and destination working register (direct addressing) Destination working register (direct addressing) Source working register (direct addressing) Default working register (assigned to W0) Source working register (direct and indirect addressing) Source Addressing mode and working register for X data bus prefetch Destination working register for X data bus prefetch Source Addressing mode and working register for Y data bus prefetch Destination working register for Y data bus prefetch The range of each symbol is instruction dependent. Refer to Section 5. Instruction Descriptions for the specific instruction range.
{}
[text] (text) #text a [b, c, d] <n:m> {label:} Acc AWB bit4 Expr f lit1 lit4 lit5 lit8 lit10 lit14 lit16 lit23 Slit4 Slit6 Slit10 Slit16 TOS Wb Wd Wm, Wn Wm * Wm Wm * Wn Wn Wnd Wns WREG Ws Wx Wxd Wy Wyd Note:
DS70157C-page 1-4
1.6 Related Documents
1
Introduction
Microchip, as well as other sources, offer additional documentation which can aid in your development with dsPIC30F/dsPIC33F DSCs. These lists contain the most common documentation, but other documents may also be available. Please check the Microchip web site (www.microchip.com) for the latest published technical documentation.
1.6.1
Microchip Documentation
The following dsPIC30F/dsPIC33F documentation is available from Microchip at the time of this writing. Many of these documents provide application-specific information that gives actual examples of using, programming and designing with dsPIC30F/dsPIC33F DSCs. 1. dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) The dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual provides information about the dsPIC30F architecture, peripherals and system integration features. The details of device operation are provided in this document, along with numerous code examples. The information contained in this manual complements the information in the dsPIC33F Data Sheet. dsPIC30F Family Overview (DS70043) and dsPIC33F Product Overview (DS70155) These documents provide a summary of the available family variants, including device pinouts, memory sizes and available peripherals. dsPIC30F Data Sheet (DS70083) and dsPIC33F Data Sheet (DS70165) The data sheets contain device-specific information, such as pinout and packaging details, electrical specifications and memory maps. Please check the Microchip web site (www.microchip.com) for a list of available device data sheets.
2.
3.
1.6.2
Third Party Documentation

There are several documents available from third party sources around the world. Microchip does not review these documents for technical accuracy. However, they may be a helpful source for understanding the operation of Microchip dsPIC30F or dsPIC33F devices. Please refer to the Microchip web site (www.microchip.com) for third party documentation related to the dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F families.
DS70157C-page 1-5

NOTES:
DS70157C-page 1-6
Section 2. Programmers Model

HIGHLIGHTS
This section of the manual contains overview information about the dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices. It contains the following major topics: 2.1 2.2 dsPIC30F/33F Overview................................................................................................ 2-2 Programmers Model...................................................................................................... 2-3
2
Programmers Model
DS70157C-page 2-1

2.1 dsPIC30F/33F Overview
The core of dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices is a 16-bit (data) modified Harvard architecture with an enhanced instruction set, including support for DSP. The core has a 24-bit instruction word, with a variable length opcode field. The Program Counter (PC) is 23 bits wide and addresses up to 4M x 24 bits of user program memory space. A single-cycle instruction prefetch mechanism is used to help maintain throughput and provides predictable execution. The majority of instructions execute in a single cycle, and overhead free program loop constructs are supported using the DO and REPEAT instructions, both of which are interruptible. The dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F have sixteen, 16-bit working registers. Each of the working registers can act as a data, address or offset register. The 16th working register (W15) operates as a software Stack Pointer for interrupts and calls. The instruction set is identical for the dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F architectures. There are two classes of instructions: the MCU class of instructions and the DSP class of instructions. These two instruction classes are seamlessly integrated into the architecture and execute from a single execution unit. The instruction set includes many Addressing modes and was designed for optimum C compiler efficiency. The data space can be addressed as 32K words or 64 Kbytes and is split into two blocks, referred to as X and Y data memory. Each memory block has its own independent Address Generation Unit (AGU). The MCU class of instructions operate solely through the X memory AGU, which accesses the entire memory map as one linear data space. The DSP dual source class of instructions operates through the X and Y AGUs, which splits the data address space into two parts. The X and Y data space boundary is arbitrary and device-specific. The upper 32 Kbytes of the data space memory map can optionally be mapped into program space at any 16K program word boundary, defined by the 8-bit Program Space Visibility Page (PSVPAG) register. The program to data space mapping feature lets any instruction access program space as if it were the data space, which is useful for storing data coefficients. Overhead free circular buffers (modulo addressing) are supported in both X and Y address spaces. The modulo addressing removes the software boundary checking overhead for DSP algorithms. Furthermore, the X AGU circular addressing can be used with any of the MCU class of instructions. The X AGU also supports bit-reverse addressing, to greatly simplify input or output data reordering for radix-2 FFT algorithms. The core supports Inherent (no operand), Relative, Literal, Memory Direct, Register Direct, Register Indirect and Register Offset Addressing modes. Each instruction is associated with a predefined Addressing mode group, depending upon its functional requirements. As many as 7 Addressing modes are supported for each instruction. For most instructions, the dsPIC30F/33F is capable of executing a data (or program data) memory read, a working register (data) read, a data memory write and a program (instruction) memory read per instruction cycle. As a result, 3-operand instructions can be supported, allowing A + B = C operations to be executed in a single cycle. The DSP engine features a high-speed, 17-bit by 17-bit multiplier, a 40-bit ALU, two 40-bit saturating accumulators and a 40-bit bidirectional barrel shifter. The barrel shifter is capable of shifting a 40-bit value, up to 16 bits right, or up to 16 bits left, in a single cycle. The DSP instructions operate seamlessly with all other instructions and have been designed for optimal real-time performance. The MAC instruction and other associated instructions can concurrently fetch two data operands from memory while multiplying two working registers. This requires that the data space be split for these instructions and linear for all others. This is achieved in a transparent and flexible manner through dedicating certain working registers to each address space. The dsPIC30F has a vectored exception scheme with support for up to 8 sources of non-maskable traps and up to 54 interrupt sources. The dsPIC33F has a similar exception scheme, but supports up to 118 interrupt sources. In both families, each interrupt source can be assigned to one of seven priority levels.
DS70157C-page 2-2
2.2 Programmers Model
Figure 2-1 shows the programmers model diagram for dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F. All registers in the programmers model are memory mapped and can be manipulated directly by the instruction set. A description of each register is provided in Table 2-1. Table 2-1: Programmers Model Register Descriptions Description 40-bit DSP Accumulators CPU Core Configuration register DO Loop Count register DO Loop End Address register DO Loop Start Address register 23-bit Program Counter Program Space Visibility Page Address register Repeat Loop Count register Stack Pointer Limit Value register ALU and DSP Engine STATUS register Table Memory Page Address register Working register array
Register ACCA, ACCB CORCON DCOUNT DOEND DOSTART PC PSVPAG RCOUNT SPLIM SR TBLPAG W0-W15
2
Programmers Model
2.2.1
Working Register Array

The 16 working (W) registers can function as data, address or offset registers. The function of a W register is determined by the instruction that accesses it. Byte instructions, which target the working register array, only affect the Least Significant Byte (LSB) of the target register. Since the working registers are memory mapped, the Least and Most Significant Bytes can be manipulated through byte-wide data memory space accesses.
2.2.2
Default Working Register (WREG)

The instruction set can be divided into two instruction types: working register instructions and file register instructions. The working register instructions use the working register array as data values, or as addresses that point to a memory location. In contrast, file register instructions operate on a specific memory address contained in the instruction opcode. File register instructions that also utilize a working register do not specify the working register that is to be used for the instruction. Instead, a default working register (WREG) is used for these file register instructions. Working register, W0, is assigned to be the WREG. The WREG assignment is not programmable.
2.2.3
Software Stack Frame Pointer

A frame is a user-defined section of memory in the stack, used by a function to allocate memory for local variables. W14 has been assigned for use as a Stack Frame Pointer with the link (LNK) and unlink (ULNK) instructions. However, if a Stack Frame Pointer and the LNK and ULNK instructions are not used, W14 can be used by any instruction in the same manner as all other W registers. See 4.7.3 Software Stack Frame Pointer for detailed information about the Frame Pointer.
DS70157C-page 2-3

Figure 2-1: Programmers Model Diagram
15 W0/WREG DIV and MUL Result Registers W1 W2 W3 W4 MAC Operand Registers W5 W6 W7 W8 MAC Address Registers W9 W10 W11 W12/MAC Offset W13/MAC Write Back W14/Frame Pointer W15*/Stack Pointer SPLIM* 39 DSP Accumulators 22 7 TABPAG TBLPAG 7 PSVPAG 0 Program Space Visibility Page Address 15 RCOUNT 15 DCOUNT 22 DOSTART 22 DOEND 15 CORCON OA OB SA SB OAB SAB DA SRH DC IPL2 IPL1 IPL0 RA SRL N OV Z 0 CPU Core Control Register C 0 DO Loop End Address 0 DO Loop Start Address 0 DO Loop Counter 0 REPEAT Loop Counter 0 Data Table Page Address ACCA ACCB 0 Program Counter 31 15 * W15 & SPLIM not shadowed Stack Pointer Limit Register 0 Working Registers
DO Shadow
0
PUSH.S Shadow
Legend
Status Register
DS70157C-page 2-4
2.2.4 Software Stack Pointer
W15 serves as a dedicated Software Stack Pointer, and will be automatically modified by function calls, exception processing and returns. However, W15 can be referenced by any instruction in the same manner as all other W registers. This simplifies reading, writing and manipulating the Stack Pointer. Refer to 4.7.1 Software Stack Pointer for detailed information about the Stack Pointer.
2.2.5
Stack Pointer Limit Register (SPLIM)

The SPLIM is a 16-bit register associated with the Stack Pointer. It is used to prevent the Stack Pointer from overflowing and accessing memory beyond the user allocated region of stack memory. Refer to 4.7.5 Stack Pointer Overflow for detailed information about the SPLIM.
2
Programmers Model
2.2.6
Accumulator A, Accumulator B
Accumulator A (ACCA) and Accumulator B (ACCB) are 40-bit wide registers, utilized by DSP instructions to perform mathematical and shifting operations. Each accumulator is composed of 3 memory mapped registers: AccxU (bits 39-32) AccxH (bits 31-16) AccxL (bits 15-0) Refer to 4.12 Accumulator Usage for details on using ACCA and ACCB.
2.2.7
Program Counter
The Program Counter (PC) is 23 bits wide. Instructions are addressed in the 4M x 24-bit user program memory space by PC<22:1>, where PC<0> is always set to 0 to maintain instruction word alignment and provide compatibility with data space addressing. This means that during normal instruction execution, the PC increments by 2. Program memory located at 0x80000000 and above is utilized for device configuration data, Unit ID and Device ID. This region is not available for user code execution and the PC can not access this area. However, one may access this region of memory using table instructions. Refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for details on accessing the configuration data, Unit ID and Device ID.
2.2.8
TBLPAG Register
The TBLPAG register is used to hold the upper 8 bits of a program memory address during table read and write operations. Table instructions are used to transfer data between program memory space and data memory space. Refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for details on accessing program memory with the table instructions.
2.2.9
PSVPAG Register
Program space visibility allows the user to map a 32-Kbyte section of the program memory space into the upper 32 Kbytes of data address space. This feature allows transparent access of constant data through instructions that operate on data memory. The PSVPAG register selects the 32-Kbyte region of program memory space that is mapped to the data address space. Refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for details on program space visibility.
DS70157C-page 2-5

2.2.10 RCOUNT Register
The 14-bit RCOUNT register contains the loop counter for the REPEAT instruction. When a REPEAT instruction is executed, RCOUNT is loaded with the repeat count of the instruction, either lit14 for the REPEAT #lit14 instruction, or the contents of Wn for the REPEAT Wn instruction. The REPEAT loop will be executed RCOUNT + 1 time. Note 1: If a REPEAT loop is executing and gets interrupted, RCOUNT may be cleared by the Interrupt Service Routine to break out of the REPEAT loop when the foreground code is re-entered. 2: Refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for complete details about REPEAT loops.
2.2.11
DCOUNT Register
The 14-bit DCOUNT register contains the loop counter for hardware DO loops. When a DO instruction is executed, DCOUNT is loaded with the loop count of the instruction, either lit14 for the DO #lit14,Expr instruction, or the 14 Least Significant bits of Ws for the DO Ws,Expr instruction. The DO loop will be executed DCOUNT + 1 time. Note 1: DCOUNT contains a shadow register. See 2.2.16 Shadow Registers for information on shadowing. 2: Refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for complete details about DO loops.
2.2.12
DOSTART Register
The DOSTART register contains the starting address for a hardware DO loop. When a DO instruction is executed, DOSTART is loaded with the address of the instruction following the DO instruction. This location in memory is the start of the DO loop. When looping is activated, program execution continues with the instruction stored at the DOSTART address after the last instruction in the DO loop is executed. This mechanism allows for zero overhead looping. Note 1: DOSTART has a shadow register. See 2.2.16 Shadow Registers for information on shadowing. 2: Refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for complete details about DO loops.
2.2.13
DOEND Register
The DOEND register contains the ending address for a hardware DO loop. When a DO instruction is executed, DOEND is loaded with the address specified by the expression in the DO instruction. This location in memory specifies the last instruction in the DO loop. When looping is activated and the instruction stored at the DOEND address is executed, program execution will continue from the DO loop start address (stored in the DOSTART register). Note 1: DOEND has a shadow register. See 2.2.16 Shadow Registers for information on shadowing. 2: Refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for complete details about DO loops.
DS70157C-page 2-6
2.2.14 STATUS Register
The 16-bit STATUS register, shown in Register 2-1, maintains status information for instructions which have most recently been executed. Operation Status bits exist for MCU operations, loop operations and DSP operations. Additionally, the STATUS register contains the CPU Interrupt Priority Level bits, IPL<2:0>, which are used for interrupt processing. 2.2.14.1 MCU ALU Status Bits The MCU operation Status bits are either affected or used by the majority of instructions in the instruction set. Most of the logic, math, rotate/shift and bit instructions modify the MCU Status bits after execution, and the conditional Branch instructions use the state of individual Status bits to determine the flow of program execution. All conditional branch instructions are listed in 4.8 Conditional Branch Instructions. The Carry, Zero, Overflow, Negative and Digit Carry (C, Z, OV, N and DC) bits are used to show the immediate status of the MCU ALU. They indicate when an operation has resulted in a Carry, Zero, Overflow, Negative result and Digit Carry, respectively. When a subtract operation is performed, the C flag is used as a Borrow flag. The Z status bit is a special zero status bit that is useful for extended precision arithmetic. The Z bit functions like a normal Z flag for all instructions except those that use a carry or borrow input (ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR). See 4.9 Z Status Bit for usage of the Z status bit. Note 1: All MCU bits are shadowed during execution of the PUSH.S instruction and they are restored on execution of the POP.S instruction. 2: All MCU bits, except the DC flag (which is not in the SRL), are stacked during exception processing (see 4.7.1 Software Stack Pointer). 2.2.14.2 Loop Status Bits The DO Active and REPEAT Active (DA, RA) bits are used to indicate when looping is active. The DO instructions affect the DA flag, which indicates that a DO loop is active. The DA flag is set to 1 when the first instruction of the DO loop is executed, and it is cleared when the last instruction of the loop completes final execution. Likewise, the RA flag indicates that a REPEAT instruction is being executed, and it is only affected by the REPEAT instructions. The RA flag is set to 1 when the instruction being repeated begins execution, and it is cleared when the instruction being repeated completes execution for the last time. The DA flag is read-only. This means that looping may not be initiated by writing a 1 to DA, nor looping may be terminated by writing a 0 to DA. If a DO loop must be terminated prematurely, the EDT bit, CORCON<11>, should be used. Since the RA flag is also read-only, it may not be directly cleared. However, if a REPEAT or its target instruction is interrupted, the Interrupt Service Routine may clear the RA flag of the SRL, which resides on the stack. This action will disable looping once program execution returns from the Interrupt Service Routine, because the restored RA will be 0.
2
Programmers Model
DS70157C-page 2-7

2.2.14.3 DSP ALU Status Bits The high byte of the STATUS Register (SRH) is used by the DSP class of instructions, and it is modified when data passes through one of the adders. The SRH provides status information about overflow and saturation for both accumulators. The Saturate A, Saturate B, Overflow A and Overflow B (SA, SB, OA, OB) bits provide individual accumulator status, while the Saturate AB and Overflow AB (SAB, OAB) bits provide combined accumulator status. The SAB and OAB bits provide the software developer efficiency in checking the register for saturation or overflow. The OA and OB bits are used to indicate when an operation has generated an overflow into the guard bits (bits 32 through 39) of the respective accumulator. This condition can only occur when the processor is in Super Saturation mode, or if saturation is disabled. It indicates that the operation has generated a number which cannot be represented with the lower 31 bits of the accumulator. The SA and SB bits are used to indicate when an operation has generated an overflow out of the Most Significant bit of the respective accumulator. The SA and SB bits are active, regardless of the Saturation mode (Disabled, Normal or Super) and may be considered sticky. Namely, once the SA or SB is set to 1, it can only be cleared manually by software, regardless of subsequent DSP operations. When required, it is recommended that the bits be cleared with the BCLR instruction. For convenience, the OA and OB bits are logically ORed together to form the OAB flag, and the SA and SB bits are logically ORed to form the SAB flag. These cumulative status bits provide efficient overflow and saturation checking when an algorithm is implemented, which utilizes both accumulators. Instead of interrogating the OA and the OB bits independently for arithmetic overflows, a single check of OAB may be performed. Likewise, when checking for saturation, SAB may be examined instead of checking both the SA and SB bits. Note that clearing the SAB flag will clear both the SA and SB bits. 2.2.14.4 Interrupt Priority Level Status Bits The three Interrupt Priority Level (IPL) bits of the SRL, SR<7:5>, and the IPL3 bit, CORCON<3>, set the CPUs IPL which is used for exception processing. Exceptions consist of interrupts and hardware traps. Interrupts have a user-defined priority level between 0 and 7, while traps have a fixed priority level between 8 and 15. The fourth Interrupt Priority Level bit, IPL3, is a special IPL bit that may only be read or cleared by the user. This bit is only set when a hardware trap is activated and it is cleared after the trap is serviced. The CPUs IPL identifies the lowest level exception which may interrupt the processor. The interrupt level of a pending exception must always be greater than the CPUs IPL for the CPU to process the exception. This means that if the IPL is 0, all exceptions at priority Level 1 and above may interrupt the processor. If the IPL is 7, only hardware traps may interrupt the processor. When an exception is serviced, the IPL is automatically set to the priority level of the exception being serviced, which will disable all exceptions of equal and lower priority. However, since the IPL field is read/write, one may modify the lower three bits of the IPL in an Interrupt Service Routine to control which exceptions may preempt the exception processing. Since the SRL is stacked during exception processing, the original IPL is always restored after the exception is serviced. If required, one may also prevent exceptions from nesting by setting the NSTDIS bit, INTCON1<15>. Note: Refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for complete details on exception processing.
DS70157C-page 2-8
2.2.15 Core Control Register
The 16-bit CPU Core Control Register (CORCON), shown in Register 2-2, is used to set the configuration of the CPU. This register provides the ability to: map program space into data space set the ACCA and ACCB saturation enable set the Data Space Write Saturation mode set the Accumulator Saturation and Rounding modes set the Multiplier mode for DSP operations terminate DO loops prematurely
On device Reset, the CORCON is set to 0x0020, which sets the following mode: Program Space not Mapped to Data Space (PSV = 0) ACCA and ACCB Saturation Disabled (SATA = 0, SATB = 0) Data Space Write Saturation Enabled (SATDW = 1) Accumulator Saturation mode set to normal (ACCSAT = 0) Accumulator Rounding mode set to unbiased (RND = 0) DSP Multiplier mode set to signed fractional (US = 0, IF = 0)
2
Programmers Model
In addition to setting CPU modes, the CORCON contains status information about the DO loop nesting level (DL<2:0>) and the IPL<3> status bit, which indicates if a trap exception is being processed.
2.2.16
Shadow Registers
A shadow register is used as a temporary holding register and can transfer its contents to or from the associated host register upon some event. Some of the registers in the programmers model have a shadow register, which is utilized during the execution of a DO, POP.S or PUSH.S instruction. Shadow register usage is shown in Table 2-2. Table 2-2: Automatic Shadow Register Usage Location DCOUNT DOSTART DOEND STATUS Register DC, N, OV, Z and C bits W0-W3 DO Yes Yes Yes POP.S/PUSH.S Yes Yes
Since the DCOUNT, DOSTART and DOEND registers are shadowed, the ability to nest DO loops without additional overhead is provided. Since all shadow registers are one register deep, up to one level of DO loop nesting is possible. Further nesting of DO loops is possible in software, with support provided by the DO Loop Nesting Level Status bits in the CORCON, CORCON<10:8>. Note: All shadow registers are one register deep and are not directly accessible. Additional shadowing may be performed in software using the software stack.
DS70157C-page 2-9

Register 2-1: SR, STATUS Register R/C-0 SA R/C-0 SB R-0 OAB R/C-0 SAB R-0 DA R/W-0 DC bit 8
High Byte (SRH): R-0 R-0 OA OB bit 15
Low Byte (SRL): R/W-0 R/W-0 IPL<2:0> bit 7 bit 15
R/W-0
R-0 RA
R/W-0 N
R/W-0 OV
R/W-0 Z
R/W-0 C bit 0
OA: Accumulator A Overflow bit 1 = Accumulator A overflowed 0 = Accumulator A has not overflowed OB: Accumulator B Overflow bit 1 = Accumulator B overflowed 0 = Accumulator B has not overflowed SA: Accumulator A Saturation bit(1, 2) 1 = Accumulator A is saturated or has been saturated at some time 0 = Accumulator A is not saturated SB: Accumulator B Saturation bit(1, 2) 1 = Accumulator B is saturated or has been saturated at some time 0 = Accumulator B is not saturated OAB: OA || OB Combined Accumulator Overflow bit 1 = Accumulators A or B have overflowed 0 = Neither Accumulators A or B have overflowed SAB: SA || SB Combined Accumulator bit(1, 2, 3) 1 = Accumulators A or B are saturated or have been saturated at some time in the past 0 = Neither Accumulators A or B are saturated DA: DO Loop Active bit(4) 1 = DO loop in progress 0 = DO loop not in progress DC: MCU ALU Half Carry bit 1 = A carry-out from the Most Significant bit of the lower nibble occurred 0 = No carry-out from the Most Significant bit of the lower nibble occurred IPL<2:0>: Interrupt Priority Level bits(5) 111 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 7 (15). User interrupts disabled 110 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 6 (14) 101 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 5 (13) 100 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 4 (12) 011 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 3 (11) 010 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 2 (10) 001 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 1 (9) 000 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 0 (8) RA: REPEAT Loop Active bit 1 = REPEAT loop in progress 0 = REPEAT loop not in progress N: MCU ALU Negative bit 1 = The result of the operation was negative 0 = The result of the operation was not negative OV: MCU ALU Overflow bit 1 = Overflow occurred 0 = No overflow occurred
bit 14
bit 13
bit 12
bit 11
bit 10
bit 9
bit 8
bit 7-5
bit 4
bit 3
bit 2
DS70157C-page 2-10
Register 2-1: bit 1 SR, STATUS Register (Continued)
Z: MCU ALU Zero bit(6) 1 = The result of the operation was zero 0 = The result of the operation was not zero C: MCU ALU Carry/Borrow bit 1 = A carry-out from the Most Significant bit occurred 0 = No carry-out from the Most Significant bit occurred Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: This bit may be read or cleared, but not set. Once this bit is set, it must be cleared manually by software. Clearing this bit will clear SA and SB. This bit is read only. The IPL<2:0> bits are concatenated with the IPL<3> bit (CORCON<3>) to form the CPU Interrupt Priority Level. The value in parentheses indicates the IPL, if IPL<3> = 1. 6: Refer to 4.9 Z Status Bit for operation with ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR instructions.
bit 0
2
Programmers Model
Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR W = Writable bit 1 = bit is set C = Clearable bit 0 = bit is cleared
DS70157C-page 2-11

Register 2-2: High Byte: U bit 15 CORCON, Core Control Register U U R/W-0 US R(0)/W-0 EDT R-0 R-0 DL<2:0> R/W-0 bit 8 Low Byte: R/W-0 SATA bit 7 bit 15-13 Unused bit 12 US: Unsigned or Signed Multiplier Mode Select bit 1 = Unsigned mode enabled for DSP multiply operations 0 = Signed mode enabled for DSP multiply operations EDT: Early DO Loop Termination Control bit(1) 1 = Terminate executing DO loop at end of current iteration 0 = No effect DL<2:0>: DO Loop Nesting Level Status bits(2, 3) 111 = DO looping is nested at 7 levels 110 = DO looping is nested at 6 levels 110 = DO looping is nested at 5 levels 110 = DO looping is nested at 4 levels 011 = DO looping is nested at 3 levels 010 = DO looping is nested at 2 levels 001 = DO looping is active, but not nested (just 1 level) 000 = DO looping is not active SATA: ACCA Saturation Enable bit 1 = Accumulator A saturation enabled 0 = Accumulator A saturation disabled SATB: ACCB Saturation Enable bit 1 = Accumulator B saturation enabled 0 = Accumulator B saturation disabled SATDW: Data Space Write from DSP Engine Saturation Enable bit 1 = Data space write saturation enabled 0 = Data space write saturation disabled ACCSAT: Accumulator Saturation Mode Select bit 1 = 9.31 saturation (Super Saturation) 0 = 1.31 saturation (Normal Saturation) IPL3: Interrupt Priority Level 3 Status bit(4, 5) 1 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 8 or greater (trap exception activated) 0 = CPU Interrupt Priority Level is 7 or less (no trap exception activated) PSV: Program Space Visibility in Data Space Enable bit 1 = Program space visible in data space 0 = Program space not visible in data space
R/W-0 SATB
R/W-1 SATDW
R/W-0 ACCSAT
R/C-0 IPL3
R/W-0 PSV
R/W-0 RND
R/W-0 IF bit 0
bit 11
bit 10-8
bit 7
bit 6
bit 5
bit 4
bit 3
bit 2
DS70157C-page 2-12
Register 2-2: bit 1 CORCON, Core Control Register (Continued)
RND: Rounding Mode Select bit 1 = Biased (conventional) rounding enabled 0 = Unbiased (convergent) rounding enabled IF: Integer or Fractional Multiplier Mode Select bit 1 = Integer mode enabled for DSP multiply operations 0 = Fractional mode enabled for DSP multiply operations Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR W = Writable bit 1 = bit is set C = Clearable bit 0 = bit is cleared x = bit is unknown U = Unimplemented bit, read as 0 This bit will always read 0. DL<2:1> are read only. The first two levels of DO loop nesting are handled by hardware. This bit may be read or cleared, but not set. This bit is concatenated with the IPL<2:0> bits (SR<7:5>) to form the CPU Interrupt Priority Level.
bit 0
2
Programmers Model
DS70157C-page 2-13

NOTES:
DS70157C-page 2-14
Section 3. Instruction Set Overview

HIGHLIGHTS
This section of the manual contains the following major topics: 3.1 3.2 3.3 Introduction .................................................................................................................... 3-2 Instruction Set Overview ................................................................................................ 3-2 Instruction Set Summary Tables .................................................................................... 3-3
3
Instruction Set Overview
DS70157C-page 3-1

3.1 Introduction
The dsPIC30F/33F instruction set provides a broad suite of instructions, which supports traditional microcontroller applications and a class of instructions, which supports math intensive applications. Since almost all of the functionality of the PIC MCU instruction set has been maintained, this hybrid instruction set allows a friendly DSP migration path for users already familiar with the PIC microcontroller.
3.2

The dsPIC30F/33F instruction set contains 84 instructions, which can be grouped into the ten functional categories shown in Table 3-1. Table 1-2 defines the symbols used in the instruction summary tables, Table 3-2 through Table 3-11. These tables define the syntax, description, storage and execution requirements for each instruction. Storage requirements are represented in 24-bit instruction words and execution requirements are represented in instruction cycles. Table 3-1: dsPIC30F/33F Instruction Groups Functional Group Move Instructions Math Instructions Logic Instructions Rotate/Shift Instructions Bit Instructions Compare/Skip Instructions Program Flow Instructions Shadow/Stack Instructions Control Instructions DSP Instructions Summary Table Table 3-2 Table 3-3 Table 3-4 Table 3-5 Table 3-6 Table 3-7 Table 3-8 Table 3-9 Table 3-10 Table 3-11 Page # 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-10 3-10
Most instructions have several different Addressing modes and execution flows, which require different instruction variants. For instance, there are six unique ADD instructions and each instruction variant has its own instruction encoding. Instruction format descriptions and specific instruction operation are provided in Section 3. Instruction Set Overview. Additionally, a composite alphabetized instruction set table is provided in Section 6. Reference.
3.2.1
Multi-Cycle Instructions
As the instruction summary tables show, most instructions execute in a single cycle, with the following exceptions: Instructions DO, MOV.D, POP.D, PUSH.D, TBLRDH, TBLRDL, TBLWTH and TBLWTL require 2 cycles to execute. Instructions DIV.S, DIV.U and DIVF are single-cycle instructions, which should be executed 18 consecutive times as the target of a REPEAT instruction. Instructions that change the program counter also require 2 cycles to execute, with the extra cycle executed as a NOP. SKIP instruction, which skips over a 2-word instruction, requires 3 instruction cycles to execute, with 2 cycles executed as a NOP. The RETFIE, RETLW and RETURN are a special case of an instruction that changes the program counter. These execute in 3 cycles, unless an exception is pending and then they execute in 2 cycles. Note: Instructions which access program memory as data, using Program Space Visibility, will incur a one or two cycle delay. However, when the target instruction of a REPEAT loop accesses program memory as data, only the first execution of the target instruction is subject to the delay. See the dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for details.
DS70157C-page 3-2

3.2.2 Multi-Word Instructions
As defined by Table 3-2: Move Instructions, almost all instructions consume one instruction word (24 bits), with the exception of the CALL, DO and GOTO instructions, which are Program Flow Instructions, listed in Table 3-8. These instructions require two words of memory because their opcodes embed large literal operands.
3.3
Instruction Set Summary Tables

Table 3-2:
EXCH MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV.B MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV.D MOV.D SWAP TBLRDH TBLRDL TBLWTH TBLWTL Note:
Move Instructions
Description Swap Wns and Wnd
(see Note)
Assembly Syntax Wns,Wnd f {,WREG} WREG,f f,Wnd Wns,f #lit8,Wnd #lit16,Wnd [Ws+Slit10],Wnd Wns,[Wd+Slit10] Ws,Wd Ws,Wnd Wns,Wd Wn Ws,Wd Ws,Wd Ws,Wd Ws,Wd
Words Cycles Page # 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 5-115 5-145 5-146 5-147 5-148 5-149 5-150 5-151 5-152 5-153 5-155 5-157 5-249 5-250 5-252 5-254 5-256
Move f to destination Move WREG to f Move f to Wnd Move Wns to f Move 8-bit literal to Wnd Move 16-bit literal to Wnd Move [Ws + signed 10-bit offset] to Wnd Move Wns to [Wd + signed 10-bit offset] Move Ws to Wd Move double Ws to Wnd:Wnd + 1 Move double Wns:Wns + 1 to Wd Wn = byte or nibble swap Wn Read high program word to Wd Read low program word to Wd Write Ws to high program word Write Ws to low program word
3
When the optional {,WREG} operand is specified, the destination of the instruction is WREG. When {,WREG} is not specified, the destination of the instruction is the file register f.
DS70157C-page 3-3

Table 3-3: Math Instructions
Description Words Cycles Page #
(1)
Assembly Syntax
Destination = f + WREG 1 1 5-7 ADD f {,WREG} ADD #lit10,Wn Wn = lit10 + Wn 1 1 5-8 ADD Wb,#lit5,Wd Wd = Wb + lit5 1 1 5-9 ADD Wb,Ws,Wd Wd = Wb + Ws 1 1 5-10 Destination = f + WREG + (C) 1 1 5-14 ADDC f {,WREG}(1) ADDC #lit10,Wn Wn = lit10 + Wn + (C) 1 1 5-15 ADDC Wb,#lit5,Wd Wd = Wb + lit5 + (C) 1 1 5-16 ADDC Wb,Ws,Wd Wd = Wb + Ws + (C) 1 1 5-17 DAW.B Wn Wn = decimal adjust Wn 1 1 5-95 Destination = f 1 1 1 5-96 DEC f {,WREG}(1) DEC Ws,Wd Wd = Ws 1 1 1 5-97 Destination = f 2 1 1 5-98 DEC2 f {,WREG}(1) DEC2 Ws,Wd Wd = Ws 2 1 1 5-99 5-101 DIV.S Wm, Wn Signed 16/16-bit integer divide 1 18(2) 5-101 DIV.SD Wm, Wn Signed 32/16-bit integer divide 1 18(2) 5-103 DIV.U Wm, Wn Unsigned 16/16-bit integer divide 1 18(2) 5-103 DIV.UD Wm, Wn Unsigned 32/16-bit integer divide 1 18(2) 5-105 DIVF Wm, Wn Signed 16/16-bit fractional divide 1 18(2) (1) Destination = f + 1 1 1 5-124 INC f {,WREG} INC Ws,Wd Wd = Ws + 1 1 1 5-125 Destination = f + 2 1 1 5-126 INC2 f {,WREG}(1) INC2 Ws,Wd Wd = Ws + 2 1 1 5-127 MUL f W3:W2 = f * WREG 1 1 5-169 MUL.SS Wb,Ws,Wnd {Wnd + 1,Wnd} = sign(Wb) * sign(Ws) 1 1 5-170 MUL.SU Wb,#lit5,Wnd {Wnd + 1,Wnd} = sign(Wb) * unsign(lit5) 1 1 5-172 MUL.SU Wb,Ws,Wnd {Wnd + 1,Wnd} = sign(Wb) * unsign(Ws) 1 1 5-174 MUL.US Wb,Ws,Wnd {Wnd + 1,Wnd} = unsign(Wb) * sign(Ws) 1 1 5-176 MUL.UU Wb,#lit5,Wnd {Wnd + 1,Wnd} = unsign(Wb) * unsign(lit5) 1 1 5-178 MUL.UU Wb,Ws,Wnd {Wnd + 1,Wnd} = unsign(Wb) * unsign(Ws) 1 1 5-179 SE Ws,Wnd Wnd = sign-extended Ws 1 1 5-220 Destination = f WREG 1 1 5-230 SUB f {,WREG}(1) SUB #lit10,Wn Wn = Wn lit10 1 1 5-231 SUB Wb,#lit5,Wd Wd = Wb lit5 1 1 5-232 SUB Wb,Ws,Wd Wd = Wb Ws 1 1 5-233 (1) Destination = f WREG (C) 1 1 5-236 SUBB f {,WREG} 1 1 5-237 SUBB #lit10,Wn Wn = Wn lit10 (C) 1 1 5-238 SUBB Wb,#lit5,Wd Wd = Wb lit5 (C) 1 1 5-239 SUBB Wb,Ws,Wd Wd = Wb Ws (C) Destination = WREG f (C) 1 1 5-241 SUBBR f {,WREG}(1) 1 1 5-242 SUBBR Wb,#lit5,Wd Wd = lit5 Wb (C) 1 1 5-243 SUBBR Wb,Ws,Wd Wd = Ws Wb (C) Destination = WREG f 1 1 5-245 SUBR f {,WREG}(1) SUBR Wb,#lit5,Wd Wd = lit5 Wb 1 1 5-246 SUBR Wb,Ws,Wd Wd = Ws Wb 1 1 5-247 ZE Ws,Wnd Wnd = zero-extended Ws 1 1 5-264 Note 1: When the optional {,WREG} operand is specified, the destination of the instruction is WREG. When {,WREG} is not specified, the destination of the instruction is the file register f. 2: The divide instructions must be preceded with a REPEAT #17 instruction, such that they are executed 18 consecutive times.
DS70157C-page 3-4

Table 3-4:
AND AND AND AND CLR CLR CLR COM COM IOR IOR IOR IOR NEG NEG SETM SETM SETM XOR XOR XOR XOR Note:
Logic Instructions
Description Destination = f .AND. WREG Wn = lit10 .AND. Wn Wd = Wb .AND. lit5 Wd = Wb .AND. Ws f = 0x0000 WREG = 0x0000 Wd = 0x0000 Destination = f Wd = Ws
(see Note)
Assembly Syntax f {,WREG} #lit10,Wn Wb,#lit5,Wd Wb,Ws,Wd f WREG Wd f {,WREG}(see Note) Ws,Wd f {,WREG} #lit10,Wn Wb,#lit5,Wd Wb,Ws,Wd f {,WREG}(see Note) Ws,Wd f WREG Wd f {,WREG}(see Note) #lit10,Wn Wb,#lit5,Wd Wb,Ws,Wd
(see Note)
Words Cycles Page # 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5-19 5-20 5-21 5-22 5-75 5-75 5-76 5-80 5-81 5-128 5-129 5-130 5-131 5-181 5-182 5-221 5-221 5-222 5-259 5-260 5-261 5-262
Destination = f .IOR. WREG Wn = lit10 .IOR. Wn Wd = Wb .IOR. lit5 Wd = Wb .IOR. Ws Destination = f + 1 Wd = Ws + 1 f = 0xFFFF WREG = 0xFFFF Wd = 0xFFFF Destination = f .XOR. WREG Wn = lit10 .XOR. Wn Wd = Wb .XOR. lit5 Wd = Wb .XOR. Ws
3
DS70157C-page 3-5

Table 3-5:
ASR ASR ASR ASR LSR LSR LSR LSR RLC RLC RLNC RLNC RRC RRC RRNC RRNC SL SL SL SL Note:
Rotate/Shift Instructions
Description Destination = arithmetic right shift f Wd = arithmetic right shift Ws Wnd = arithmetic right shift Wb by lit4 Wnd = arithmetic right shift Wb by Wns Destination = logical right shift f Wd = logical right shift Ws Wnd = logical right shift Wb by lit4 Wnd = logical right shift Wb by Wns Destination = rotate left through Carry f Wd = rotate left through Carry Ws Destination = rotate left (no Carry) f Wd = rotate left (no Carry) Ws
(see Note)
Assembly Syntax f {,WREG} Ws,Wd Wb,#lit4,Wnd Wb,Wns,Wnd f {,WREG} Ws,Wd Wb,#lit4,Wnd Wb,Wns,Wnd f {,WREG}(see Note) Ws,Wd f {,WREG}(see Note) Ws,Wd f {,WREG} Ws,Wd f {,WREG} Ws,Wd f {,WREG}(see Note) Ws,Wd Wb,#lit4,Wnd Wb,Wns,Wnd
(see Note) (see Note) (see Note)
Words Cycles Page # 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5-24 5-25 5-27 5-28 5-136 5-137 5-139 5-140 5-204 5-205 5-207 5-208 5-210 5-211 5-213 5-214 5-225 5-226 5-228 5-229
Destination = rotate right through Carry f Wd = rotate right through Carry Ws Destination = rotate right (no Carry) f Wd = rotate right (no Carry) Ws Destination = left shift f Wd = left shift Ws Wnd = left shift Wb by lit4 Wnd = left shift Wb by Wns
DS70157C-page 3-6

Table 3-6:
BCLR BCLR BSET BSET BSW.C BSW.Z BTG BTG BTST BTST.C BTST.Z BTST.C BTST.Z BTSTS BTSTS.C BTSTS.Z FBCL FF1L FF1R
Bit Instructions
Description Bit clear f Bit clear Ws Bit set f Bit set Ws Write C bit to Ws<Wb> Write Z bit to Ws<Wb> Bit toggle f Bit toggle Ws Bit test f Bit test Ws to C Bit test Ws to Z Bit test Ws<Wb> to C Bit test Ws<Wb> to Z Bit test f then set f Bit test Ws to C then set Ws Bit test Ws to Z then set Ws Find bit change from left (MSb) side Find first one from left (MSb) side Find first one from right (LSb) side Words Cycles Page # 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5-29 5-30 5-54 5-55 5-56 5-56 5-58 5-59 5-67 5-68 5-68 5-69 5-69 5-71 5-72 5-72 5-116 5-118 5-120 f,#bit4 Ws,#bit4 f,#bit4 Ws,#bit4 Ws,Wb Ws,Wb f,#bit4 Ws,#bit4 f,#bit4 Ws,#bit4 Ws,#bit4 Ws,Wb Ws,Wb f,#bit4 Ws,#bit4 Ws,#bit4 Ws,Wnd Ws,Wnd Ws,Wnd
Assembly Syntax
3
DS70157C-page 3-7

Table 3-7:
BTSC BTSC BTSS BTSS CP CP CP CP0 CP0 CPB CPB CPB CPSEQ CPSGT CPSLT CPSNE Note:
Compare/Skip Instructions
Description Bit test f, skip if clear Bit test Ws, skip if clear Bit test f, skip if set Bit test Ws, skip if set Compare (f WREG) Compare (Wb lit5) Compare (Wb Ws) Compare (f 0x0000) Compare (Ws 0x0000) Compare with Borrow (f WREG C) Compare with Borrow (Wb lit5 C) Compare with Borrow (Wb Ws C) Compare (Wb Wn), skip if = Compare (Wb Wn), skip if > Compare (Wb Wn), skip if < Compare (Wb Wn), skip if Words 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cycles(see Note) 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) Page # 5-60 5-62 5-64 5-65 5-82 5-83 5-84 5-85 5-86 5-87 5-88 5-89 5-91 5-92 5-93 5-94 f,#bit4 Ws,#bit4 f,#bit4 Ws,#bit4 f Wb,#lit5 Wb,Ws f Ws f Wb,#lit5 Wb,Ws Wb, Wn Wb, Wn Wb, Wn Wb, Wn
Assembly Syntax
Conditional skip instructions execute in 1 cycle if the skip is not taken, 2 cycles if the skip is taken over a one-word instruction and 3 cycles if the skip is taken over a two-word instruction.
DS70157C-page 3-8

Table 3-8:
BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA CALL CALL DO DO GOTO GOTO RCALL RCALL REPEAT REPEAT RETFIE RETLW RETURN #lit10,Wn
Program Flow Instructions

Description Branch unconditionally Computed branch Branch if Carry (no Borrow) Branch if greater than or equal Branch if unsigned greater than or equal Branch if greater than Branch if unsigned greater than Branch if less than or equal Branch if unsigned less than or equal Branch if less than Branch if unsigned less than Branch if Negative Branch if not Carry (Borrow) Branch if not Negative Branch if not Overflow Branch if not Zero Branch if Accumulator A Overflow Branch if Accumulator B Overflow Branch if Overflow Branch if Accumulator A Saturate Branch if Accumulator B Saturate Branch if Zero Call subroutine Call indirect subroutine Do code through PC + Expr, (lit14 + 1) times Do code through PC+Expr, (Wn + 1) times Go to address Go to address indirectly Relative call Computed call Repeat next instruction (lit14 + 1) times Repeat next instruction (Wn + 1) times Return from interrupt enable Return with lit10 in Wn Return from subroutine Words Cycles Page # 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 (2)(1) 1 (2)(1) 1 (2)(1) 1 (2)(1) 1 (2)(1) 1 (2)(1) 1 1 (2)(1) (2)(1) 1 (2)(1) 1 (2)(1) 1 (2)(1) 1 (2)(1) 1 (2)(1) 1 (2)(1) 1 1 (2)(1) (2)(1) 1 (2)(1) 1 (2)(1) 1 (2)(1) 1 (2)(1) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 3 (2)(2) 3 (2)
(2)
Assembly Syntax Expr Wn C,Expr GE,Expr GEU,Expr GT,Expr GTU,Expr LE,Expr LEU,Expr LT,Expr LTU,Expr N,Expr NC,Expr NN,Expr NOV,Expr NZ,Expr OA,Expr OB,Expr OV,Expr SA,Expr SB,Expr Z,Expr Expr Wn #lit14,Expr Wn,Expr Expr Wn Expr Wn #lit14 Wn
5-31 5-32 5-33 5-35 5-36 5-37 5-38 5-39 5-40 5-41 5-42 5-43 5-44 5-45 5-46 5-47 5-48 5-49 5-50 5-51 5-52 5-53 5-73 5-74 5-107 5-109 5-122 5-123 5-195 5-196 5-197 5-198 5-201 5-202 5-203
3
3 (2)(2)
Note 1: Conditional branch instructions execute in 1 cycle if the branch is not taken, or 2 cycles if the branch is taken. 2: RETURN instructions execute in 3 cycles, but if an exception is pending, they execute in 2 cycles.
DS70157C-page 3-9

Table 3-9:
LNK POP POP POP.D POP.S PUSH PUSH PUSH.D PUSH.S ULNK f Ws Wns
Shadow/Stack Instructions
Description Link Frame Pointer POP TOS to f POP TOS to Wd Double POP from TOS to Wnd:Wnd + 1 POP shadow registers PUSH f to TOS PUSH Ws to TOS PUSH double Wns:Wns + 1 to TOS PUSH shadow registers Unlink Frame Pointer Words Cycles Page # 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 5-135 5-186 5-187 5-188 5-189 5-190 5-191 5-192 5-193 5-258 #lit14 f Wd Wnd
Assembly Syntax
Table 3-10:
CLRWDT DISI NOP NOPR PWRSAV Reset #lit1
Control Instructions
Description Clear Watchdog Timer #lit14 Disable interrupts for (lit14 + 1) instruction cycles No operation No operation Enter Power-saving mode lit1 Software device Reset Words Cycles Page # 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5-79 5-100 5-184 5-185 5-194 5-200
Assembly Syntax
Table 3-11:
ADD ADD CLR ED EDAC LAC MAC MAC MPY MPY MPY.N MSC NEG SAC SAC.R SFTAC SFTAC SUB Acc
DSP Instructions
Assembly Syntax Description Add accumulators 16-bit signed add to Acc Clear Acc Euclidean distance (no accumulate) Euclidean distance Load Acc Multiply and accumulate Words Cycles Page # 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5-11 5-12 5-77 5-111 5-113 5-133 5-141 5-143 5-159 5-161 5-163 5-165 5-167 5-183 5-216 5-218 5-223 5-224 5-235
Ws,#Slit4,Acc Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd,AWB Wm*Wm,Acc,Wx,Wy,Wxd Wm*Wm,Acc,Wx,Wy,Wxd Ws,#Slit4,Acc Wm*Wn,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy, Wyd,AWB
Wm*Wm,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd Square and accumulate Move Wx to Wxd and Wy to Wyd Wm*Wn,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd Multiply Wn by Wm to Acc Wm*Wm,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd Square to Acc Wm*Wn,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd -(Multiply Wn by Wm) to Acc Wm*Wn,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy, Wyd,AWB Acc Acc,#Slit4,Wd Acc,#Slit4,Wd Acc,#Slit6 Acc,Wn Acc Multiply and subtract from Acc Negate Acc Store Acc Store rounded Acc Arithmetic shift Acc by Slit6 Arithmetic shift Acc by (Wn) Subtract accumulators
MOVSAC Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd,AWB
DS70157C-page 3-10
Section 4. Instruction Set Details

HIGHLIGHTS
This section of the manual contains the following major topics: 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12 4.13 4.14 4.15 4.16 4.17 Data Addressing Modes................................................................................................. 4-2 Program Addressing Modes ........................................................................................ 4-11 Instruction Stalls........................................................................................................... 4-12 Byte Operations ........................................................................................................... 4-13 Word Move Operations ................................................................................................ 4-16 Using 10-bit Literal Operands ...................................................................................... 4-19 Software Stack Pointer and Frame Pointer .................................................................. 4-20 Conditional Branch Instructions ................................................................................... 4-25 Z Status Bit................................................................................................................... 4-26 Assigned Working Register Usage .............................................................................. 4-27 DSP Data Formats ....................................................................................................... 4-30 Accumulator Usage...................................................................................................... 4-32 Accumulator Access .................................................................................................... 4-33 DSP MAC Instructions ................................................................................................. 4-33 DSP Accumulator Instructions ..................................................................................... 4-37 Scaling Data with the FBCL Instruction ....................................................................... 4-37 Normalizing the Accumulator with the FBCL Instruction.............................................. 4-39
4
Instruction Set Details
DS70157C-page 4-1

4.1 Data Addressing Modes
The dsPIC30F/33F supports three native Addressing modes for accessing data memory, along with several forms of immediate addressing. Data accesses may be performed using file register, register direct or register indirect addressing, and immediate addressing allows a fixed value to be used by the instruction. File register addressing provides the ability to operate on data stored in the lower 8K of data memory (Near RAM), and also move data between the working registers and the entire 64K data space. Register direct addressing is used to access the 16 memory mapped working registers, W0:W15. Register indirect addressing is used to efficiently operate on data stored in the entire 64K data space, using the contents of the working registers as an effective address. Immediate addressing does not access data memory, but provides the ability to use a constant value as an instruction operand. The address range of each mode is summarized in Table 4-1. Table 4-1: dsPIC30F/33F Addressing Modes Address Range 0x0000-0x1FFF (see Note) 0x0000-0x001F (working register array W0:W15) 0x0000-0xFFFF N/A (constant value) The address range for the File Register MOV is 0x0000-0xFFFE.
Addressing Mode File Register Register Direct Register Indirect Immediate Note:
4.1.1
File Register Addressing

File register addressing is used by instructions which use a predetermined data address as an operand for the instruction. The majority of instructions that support file register addressing provide access to the lower 8 Kbytes of data memory, which is called the Near RAM. However, the MOV instruction provides access to all 64 Kbytes of memory using file register addressing. This allows the loading of the data from any location in data memory to any working register, and store the contents of any working register to any location in data memory. It should be noted that file register addressing supports both byte and word accesses of data memory, with the exception of the MOV instruction, which accesses all 64K of memory as words. Examples of file register addressing are shown in Example 4-1. Most instructions, which support file register addressing, perform an operation on the specified file register and the default working register WREG (see Section 2.2.2 Default Working Register (WREG)). If only one operand is supplied in the instruction, WREG is an implied operand and the operation results are stored back to the file register. In these cases, the instruction is effectively a read-modify-write instruction. However, when both the file register and WREG are specified in the instruction, the operation results are stored in WREG and the contents of the file register are unchanged. Sample instructions which show the interaction between the file register and WREG are shown in Example 4-2. Note: Instructions which support file register addressing use f as an operand in the instruction summary tables of Section 3. Instruction Set Overview.
DS70157C-page 4-2

Example 4-1:
DEC
File Register Addressing

0x1000 ; decrement data stored at 0x1000
Before Instruction:
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x5555
After Instruction:
Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x5554
MOV
0x27FE, W0
; move data stored at 0x27FE to W0
Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x5555 Data Memory 0x27FE = 0x1234
After Instruction:
W0 = 0x1234 Data Memory 0x27FE = 0x1234
Example 4-2:
AND
File Register Addressing and WREG

0x1000 ; AND 0x1000 with WREG, store to 0x1000
Before Instruction:
W0 (WREG) = 0x332C Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x5555
After Instruction:
AND
0x1000, WREG
; AND 0x1000 with WREG, store to WREG
Before Instruction:
After Instruction:
W0 (WREG) = 0x1104 Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x5555
4
DS70157C-page 4-3

4.1.2 Register Direct Addressing
Register direct addressing is used to access the contents of the 16 working registers (W0:W15). The Register Direct Addressing mode is fully orthogonal, which allows any working register to be specified for any instruction that uses register direct addressing, and it supports both byte and word accesses. Instructions which employ register direct addressing use the contents of the specified working register as data to execute the instruction, therefore this Addressing mode is useful only when data already resides in the working register core. Sample instructions which utilize register direct addressing are shown in Example 4-3. Another feature of register direct addressing is that it provides the ability for dynamic flow control. Since variants of the DO and REPEAT instruction support register direct addressing, flexible looping constructs may be generated using these instructions. Note: Instructions which must use register direct addressing, use the symbols Wb, Wn, Wns and Wnd in the summary tables of Section 3. Instruction Set Overview. Commonly, register direct addressing may also be used when register indirect addressing may be used. Instructions which use register indirect addressing, use the symbols Wd and Ws in the summary tables of Section 3. Instruction Set Overview. Register Direct Addressing
W2, W3 ; Exchange W2 and W3
Example 4-3:
EXCH
Before Instruction:
W2 = 0x3499 W3 = 0x003D
After Instruction:
W2 = 0x003D W3 = 0x3499
IOR
#0x44, W0
; Inclusive-OR 0x44 and W0
Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x9C2E
After Instruction:
W0 = 0x9C6E
SL
W6, W7, W8
; Shift left W6 by W7, and store to W8
Before Instruction:
W6 = 0x000C W7 = 0x0008 W8 = 0x1234
After Instruction:
W6 = 0x000C W7 = 0x0008 W8 = 0x0C00
DS70157C-page 4-4

4.1.3 Register Indirect Addressing
Register indirect addressing is used to access any location in data memory by treating the contents of a working register as an Effective Address (EA) to data memory. Essentially, the contents of the working register become a pointer to the location in data memory which is to be accessed by the instruction. This Addressing mode is powerful, because it also allows one to modify the contents of the working register, either before or after the data access is made, by incrementing or decrementing the EA. By modifying the EA in the same cycle that an operation is being performed, register indirect addressing allows for the efficient processing of data that is stored sequentially in memory. The modes of indirect addressing supported by the dsPIC30F/dsPIC33F are shown in Table 4-2. Table 4-2:
Indirect Mode No Modification Pre-Increment Pre-Decrement Post-Increment
Indirect Addressing Modes

Syntax [Wn] [++Wn] [--Wn] [Wn++] Function (Byte Instruction) EA = [Wn] EA = [Wn + = 1] EA = [Wn = 1] EA = [Wn]+= 1 Function (Word Instruction) EA = [Wn] Description
Post-Decrement
[Wn--]
EA = [Wn] = 1
Register Offset
[Wn+Wb]
EA = [Wn + Wb]
The contents of Wn forms the EA. EA = [Wn + = 2] Wn is pre-incremented to form the EA. EA = [Wn = 2] Wn is pre-decremented to form the EA. EA = [Wn]+= 2 The contents of Wn forms the EA, then Wn is post-incremented. EA = [Wn] = 2 The contents of Wn forms the EA, then Wn is post-decremented. EA = [Wn + Wb] The sum of Wn and Wb forms the EA. Wn and Wb are not modified.
Table 4-2 shows that four Addressing modes modify the EA used in the instruction, and this allows the following updates to be made to the working register: post-increment, post-decrement, pre-increment and pre-decrement. Since all EAs must be given as byte addresses, support is provided for Word mode instructions by scaling the EA update by 2. Namely, in Word mode, pre/post-decrements subtract 2 from the EA stored in the working register, and pre/post-increments add 2 to the EA. This feature ensures that after an EA modification is made, the EA will point to the next adjacent word in memory. Example 4-4 shows how indirect addressing may be used to update the EA. Table 4-2 also shows that the Register Offset mode addresses data which is offset from a base EA stored in a working register. This mode uses the contents of a second working register to form the EA by adding the two specified working registers. This mode does not scale for Word mode instructions, but offers the complete offset range of 64 Kbytes. Note that neither of the working registers used to form the EA are modified. Example 4-5 shows how register offset indirect addressing may be used to access data memory. Note: The MOV with offset instructions (5-151 and 5-152) provides a literal addressing offset ability to be used with indirect addressing. In these instructions, the EA is formed by adding the contents of a working register to a signed 10-bit literal. Example 4-6 shows how these instructions may be used to move data to and from the working register array.
4
DS70157C-page 4-5

Example 4-4:
MOV.B
Indirect Addressing with Effective Address Update

[W0++], [W13--] ; byte move [W0] to [W13] ; post-inc W0, post-dec W13
Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x2300 W13 = 0x2708 Data Memory 0x2300 = 0x7783 Data Memory 0x2708 = 0x904E
After Instruction:
W0 = 0x2301 W13 = 0x2707 Data Memory 0x2300 = 0x7783 Data Memory 0x2708 = 0x9083
ADD
W1, [--W5], [++W8]
; pre-dec W5, pre-inc W8 ; add W1 to [W5], store in [W8]
Before Instruction:
W1 = W5 = W8 = Data Data W1 = W5 = W8 = Data Data 0x0800 0x2200 0x2400 Memory 0x21FE = 0x7783 Memory 0x2402 = 0xAACC 0x0800 0x21FE 0x2402 Memory 0x21FE = 0x7783 Memory 0x2402 = 0x7F83
After Instruction:
DS70157C-page 4-6

Example 4-5:
MOV.B
Indirect Addressing with Register Offset

[W0+W1], [W7++] ; byte move [W0+W1] to W7, post-inc W7
Before Instruction:
W0 = W1 = W7 = Data Data W0 = W1 = W7 = Data Data 0x2300 0x01FE 0x1000 Memory 0x24FE = 0x7783 Memory 0x1000 = 0x11DC 0x2300 0x01FE 0x1001 Memory 0x24FE = 0x7783 Memory 0x1000 = 0x1183
After Instruction:
LAC
[W0+W8], A
; load ACCA with [W0+W8] ; (sign-extend and zero-backfill)
Before Instruction:
W0 = W8 = ACCA Data W0 = W8 = ACCA Data 0x2344 0x0008 = 0x00 7877 9321 Memory 0x234C = 0xE290 0x2344 0x0008 = 0xFF E290 0000 Memory 0x234C = 0xE290
After Instruction:
Example 4-6:
MOV
Move with Literal Offset Instructions

[W0+0x20], W1 ; move [W0+0x20] to W1
Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x1200 W1 = 0x01FE Data Memory 0x1220 = 0xFD27
After Instruction:
W0 = 0x1200 W1 = 0xFD27 Data Memory 0x1220 = 0xFD27
4
MOV
W4, [W8-0x300]
; move W4 to [W8-0x300]
Before Instruction:
W4 = 0x3411 W8 = 0x2944 Data Memory 0x2644 = 0xCB98
After Instruction:
W4 = 0x3411 W8 = 0x2944 Data Memory 0x2644 = 0x3411
DS70157C-page 4-7

4.1.3.1 Register Indirect Addressing and the Instruction Set The Addressing modes presented in Table 4-2 demonstrate the Indirect Addressing mode capability of the dsPIC30F/33F. Due to operation encoding and functional considerations, not every instruction which supports indirect addressing supports all modes shown in Table 4-2. The majority of instructions which use indirect addressing support the No Modify, Pre-Increment, Pre-Decrement, Post-Increment and Post-Decrement Addressing modes. The MOV instructions, and several accumulator-based DSP instructions, are also capable of using the Register Offset Addressing mode. Note: Instructions which use register indirect addressing use the operand symbols Wd and Ws in the summary tables of Section 3. Instruction Set Overview.
4.1.3.2
DSP MAC Indirect Addressing Modes A special class of Indirect Addressing modes is utilized by the DSP MAC instructions. As is described later in Section 4.14 DSP MAC Instructions, the DSP MAC class of instructions are capable of performing two fetches from memory using effective addressing. Since DSP algorithms frequently demand a broader range of address updates, the Addressing modes offered by the DSP MAC instructions provide greater range in the size of the effective address update which may be made. Table 4-3 shows that both X and Y prefetches support Post-Increment and Post-Decrement Addressing modes, with updates of 2, 4 and 6 bytes. Since DSP instructions only execute in Word mode, no provisions are made for odd sized EA updates. Table 4-3: DSP MAC Indirect Addressing Modes Addressing Mode Indirect with no modification Indirect with Post-Increment by 2 Indirect with Post-Increment by 4 Indirect with Post-Increment by 6 Indirect with Post-Decrement by 2 Indirect with Post-Decrement by 4 Indirect with Post-Decrement by 6 Indirect with Register Offset Note: X Memory EA = [Wx] EA = [Wx] + = 2 EA = [Wx] + = 4 EA = [Wx] + = 6 EA = [Wx] = 2 EA = [Wx] = 4 EA = [Wx] = 6 EA = [W9 + W12] Y Memory EA = [Wy] EA = [Wy] + = 2 EA = [Wy] + = 4 EA = [Wy] + = 6 EA = [Wy] = 2 EA = [Wy] = 4 EA = [Wy] = 6 EA = [W11 + W12]
As described in Section 4.14 DSP MAC Instructions, only W8 and W9 may be used to access X Memory, and only W10 and W11 may be used to access Y Memory.
4.1.3.3
Modulo and Bit-Reversed Addressing Modes The dsPIC30F/33F architecture provides support for two special Register Indirect Addressing modes, which are commonly used to implement DSP algorithms. Modulo (or circular) addressing provides an automated means to support circular data buffers in X and/or Y memory. Modulo buffers remove the need for software to perform address boundary checks, which can improve the performance of certain algorithms. Similarly, bit-reversed addressing allows one to access the elements of a buffer in a nonlinear fashion. This Addressing mode simplifies data re-ordering for radix-2 FFT algorithms and provides a significant reduction in FFT processing time. Both of these Addressing modes are powerful features of the dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F architectures, which can be exploited by any instruction that uses indirect addressing. Refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for details on using modulo and bit-reversed addressing.
DS70157C-page 4-8

4.1.4 Immediate Addressing
In immediate addressing, the instruction encoding contains a predefined constant operand, which is used by the instruction. This Addressing mode may be used independently, but it is more frequently combined with the File Register, Direct and Indirect Addressing modes. The size of the immediate operand which may be used varies with the instruction type. Constants of size 1-bit (#lit1), 4-bit (#bit4, #lit4 and #Slit4), 5-bit (#lit5), 6-bit (#Slit6), 8-bit (#lit8), 10-bit (#lit10 and #Slit10), 14-bit (#lit14) and 16-bit (#lit16) may be used. Constants may be signed or unsigned and the symbols #Slit4, #Slit6 and #Slit10 designate a signed constant. All other immediate constants are unsigned. Table 4-4 shows the usage of each immediate operand in the instruction set. Table 4-4: Operand #lit1 #bit4 #lit4 #Slit4 #lit5 #Slit6 #lit8 #lit10 #Slit10 #lit14 #lit16 PWRSAV BCLR, BSET, BTG, BTSC, BTSS, BTST, BTST.C, BTST.Z, BTSTS, BTSTS.C, BTSTS.Z ASR, LSR, SL ADD, LAC, SAC, SAC.R ADD, ADDC, AND, CP, CPB, IOR, MUL.SU, MUL.UU, SUB, SUBB, SUBBR, SUBR, XOR SFTAC MOV.B ADD, ADDC, AND, CP, CPB, IOR, RETLW, SUB, SUBB, XOR MOV DISI, DO, LNK, REPEAT MOV Immediate Operands in the Instruction Set Instruction Usage
4
DS70157C-page 4-9

The syntax for immediate addressing requires that the number sign (#) must immediately precede the constant operand value. The # symbol indicates to the assembler that the quantity is a constant. If an out-of-range constant is used with an instruction, the assembler will generate an error. Several examples of immediate addressing are shown in Example 4-7. Example 4-7:
PWRSAV #1
Immediate Addressing
; Enter IDLE mode
ADD.B
#0x10, W0
; Add 0x10 to W0 (byte mode)
Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x12A9
After Instruction:
W0 = 0x12B9
XOR
W0, #1, [W1++]
; Exclusive-OR W0 and 0x1 ; Store the result to [W1] ; Post-increment W1
Before Instruction:
W0 = 0xFFFF W1 = 0x0890 Data Memory 0x0890 = 0x0032
After Instruction:
W0 = 0xFFFF W1 = 0x0892 Data Memory 0x0890 = 0xFFFE
4.1.5
Data Addressing Mode Tree

The Data Addressing modes of the dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F are summarized in Figure 4-1. Figure 4-1: Data Addressing Mode Tree
Immediate File Register Basic Direct Indirect No Modification Pre-Increment Pre-Decrement Post-Increment Post-Decrement Data Addressing Modes Literal Offset Register Offset Direct
DSP MAC
No Modification Post-Increment (2, 4 and 6) Indirect Post-Decrement (2, 4 and 6) Register Offset
DS70157C-page 4-10

4.2 Program Addressing Modes
Both the dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F have a 23-bit Program Counter (PC). The PC addresses the 24-bit wide program memory to fetch instructions for execution, and it may be loaded in several ways. For byte compatibility with the table read and table write instructions, each instruction word consumes two locations in program memory. This means that during serial execution, the PC is loaded with PC + 2. Several methods may be used to modify the PC in a non-sequential manner, and both absolute and relative changes may be made to the PC. The change to the PC may be from an immediate value encoded in the instruction, or a dynamic value contained in a working register. When DO looping is active, the PC is loaded with the address stored in the DOSTART register, after the instruction at the DOEND address is executed. For exception handling, the PC is loaded with the address of the exception handler, which is stored in the interrupt vector table. When required, the software stack is used to return scope to the foreground process from where the change in program flow occurred. Table 4-5 summarizes the instructions which modify the PC. When performing function calls, it is recommended that RCALL be used instead of CALL, since RCALL only consumes 1 word of program memory. Table 4-5: Methods of Modifying Program Flow
PC Modification PC = PC + 2 PC = PC + 2*Slit16 PC = PC + 2 (condition false) PC = PC + 2 * Slit16 (condition true) PC = lit23 PC = Wn PC = lit23 PC = Wn PC = PC + 2 * Slit16 PC = PC + 2 * Wn Software Stack Usage None None None PC + 4 is PUSHed on the stack(2) PC + 2 is PUSHed on the stack(2) None None PC + 2 is PUSHed on the stack(2) PC + 2 is PUSHed on the stack(2) PC = address of the exception handler PC + 2 is PUSHed on (read from vector table) the stack(3) PC not modified (if REPEAT active) PC = DOSTART (if DO active) None None
Condition/Instruction Sequential Execution BRA Expr (Branch Unconditionally) BRA Condition, Expr(1) (Branch Conditionally) CALL Expr(1) (Call Subroutine) CALL Wn (Call Subroutine Indirect) GOTO Expr(1) (Unconditional Jump) GOTO Wn (Unconditional Indirect Jump) RCALL Expr(1) (Relative Call) RCALL Wn (Computed Relative Call) Exception Handling PC = Target REPEAT instruction (REPEAT Looping) PC = DOEND address (DO Looping)
(1)
4
Note 1: For BRA, CALL and GOTO, the Expr may be a label, absolute address, or expression, which is resolved by the linker to a 16-bit or 23-bit value (Slit16 or lit23). See Section 5. Instruction Descriptions for details. 2: After CALL or RCALL is executed, RETURN or RETLW will POP the Top-of-Stack (TOS) back into the PC. 3: After an exception is processed, RETFIE will POP the Top-of-Stack (TOS) back into the PC.
DS70157C-page 4-11

4.3 Instruction Stalls
In order to maximize the data space EA calculation and operand fetch time, the X data space read and write accesses are partially pipelined. A consequence of this pipelining is that address register data dependencies may arise between successive read and write operations using common registers. Read After Write (RAW) dependencies occur across instruction boundaries and are detected by the hardware. An example of a RAW dependency would be a write operation that modifies W5, followed by a read operation that uses W5 as an Address Pointer. The contents of W5 will not be valid for the read operation until the earlier write completes. This problem is resolved by stalling the instruction execution for one instruction cycle, which allows the write to complete before the next read is started.
4.3.1
RAW Dependency Detection

During the instruction pre-decode, the core determines if any address register dependency is imminent across an instruction boundary. The stall detection logic compares the W register (if any) used for the destination EA of the instruction currently being executed with the W register to be used by the source EA (if any) of the prefetched instruction. When a match between the destination and source registers is identified, a set of rules are applied to decide whether or not to stall the instruction by one cycle. Table 4-6 lists various RAW conditions which cause an instruction execution stall. Table 4-6: Raw Dependency Rules (Detection By Hardware)
Source Address Mode Using Wn Direct Direct Indirect Indirect with pre/post-modification Direct Indirect Indirect with pre/post-modification Indirect Indirect with pre/post-modification Indirect Indirect with pre/post-modification Stall Required? No Stall No Stall No Stall No Stall No Stall Stall(1) Stall(1) Stall(1) Stall(1) Stall(1) Stall(1) ADD.W MOV.W ADD.W MOV.W ADD.W MOV.W ADD.W MOV.W ADD.W MOV.W ADD.W MOV.W ADD.W MOV.W ADD.W MOV.W ADD.W MOV.W ADD.W MOV.W ADD.W MOV.W Examples (Wn = W2) W0, W1, W2 W2, W3 W0, W1, [W2] W2, W3 W0, W1, [W2] [W2], W3 W0, W1, [W2] [W2++], W3 W0, W1, [W2++] W2, W3 W0, W1, W2 [W2], W3 W0, W1, W2 [W2++], W3 W0, W1, [W2](2) [W2], W3(2) W0, W1, [W2](2) [W2++], W3(2) W0, W1, [W2++] [W2], W3 W0, W1, [W2++] [W2++], W3
Destination Address Mode Using Wn Direct Indirect Indirect Indirect Indirect with pre/post-modification Direct Direct Indirect Indirect Indirect with pre/post-modification Indirect with pre/post-modification
Note 1: When stalls are detected, one cycle is added to the instruction execution time. 2: For these examples, the contents of W2 = the mapped address of W2 (0x0004).
DS70157C-page 4-12

4.3.2 Instruction Stalls and Exceptions
In order to maintain deterministic operation, instruction stalls are allowed to happen, even if they occur immediately prior to exception processing.
4.3.3
Instruction Stalls and Instructions that Change Program Flow

CALL and RCALL write to the stack using W15 and may, therefore, be subject to an instruction stall if the source read of the subsequent instruction uses W15. GOTO, RETFIE and RETURN instructions are never subject to an instruction stall because they do not perform write operations to the working registers.
4.3.4
Instruction Stalls and DO/REPEAT Loops

Instructions operating in a DO or REPEAT loop are subject to instruction stalls, just like any other instruction. Stalls may occur on loop entry, loop exit and also during loop processing.
4.3.5
Instruction Stalls and PSV

Instructions operating in PSV address space are subject to instruction stalls, just like any other instruction. Should a data dependency be detected in the instruction immediately following the PSV data access, the second cycle of the instruction will initiate a stall. Should a data dependency be detected in the instruction immediately before the PSV data access, the last cycle of the previous instruction will initiate a stall. Note: Refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for more detailed information about RAW instruction stalls.
4.4
Byte Operations
Since the data memory is byte addressable, most of the base instructions may operate in either Byte mode or Word mode. When these instructions operate in Byte mode, the following rules apply: all direct working register references use the Least Significant Byte of the 16-bit working register and leave the Most Significant Byte (MSB) unchanged all indirect working register references use the data byte specified by the 16-bit address stored in the working register all file register references use the data byte specified by the byte address the STATUS Register is updated to reflect the result of the byte operation It should be noted that data addresses are always represented as byte addresses. Additionally, the native data format is little-endian, which means that words are stored with the Least Significant Byte at the lower address, and the Most Significant Byte at the adjacent, higher address (as shown in Figure 4-2). Example 4-8 shows sample byte move operations and Example 4-9 shows sample byte math operations. Note: Instructions which operate in Byte mode must use the .b or .B instruction extension to specify a byte instruction. For example, the following two instructions are valid forms of a byte clear operation:
CLR.b CLR.B W0 W0
4
DS70157C-page 4-13

Example 4-8:
MOV.B
Sample Byte Move Operations

#0x30, W0 ; move the literal byte 0x30 to W0
Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x5555
After Instruction:
W0 = 0x5530
MOV.B
0x1000, W0
; move the byte at 0x1000 to W0
Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x5555 Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x1234
After Instruction:
W0 = 0x5534 Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x1234
MOV.B
W0, 0x1001
; byte move W0 to address 0x1001
Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x1234 Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x5555
After Instruction:
W0 = 0x1234 Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x3455
MOV.B
W0, [W1++]
; byte move W0 to [W1], then post-inc W1
Before Instruction:
After Instruction:
DS70157C-page 4-14

Example 4-9:
CLR.B
Sample Byte Math Operations

[W6--] ; byte clear [W6], then post-dec W6
Before Instruction:
W6 = 0x1001 Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x5555
After Instruction:
W6 = 0x1000 Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x0055
SUB.B
W0, #0x10, W1
; byte subtract literal 0x10 from W0 ; and store to W1
Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x1234 W1 = 0xFFFF
After Instruction:
W0 = 0x1234 W1 = 0xFF24
ADD.B
W0, W1, [W2++]
; byte add W0 and W1, store to [W2] ; and post-inc W2
Before Instruction:
W0 = W1 = W2 = Data W0 = W1 = W2 = Data 0x1234 0x5678 0x1000 Memory 0x1000 = 0x5555 0x1234 0x5678 0x1001 Memory 0x1000 = 0x55AC
After Instruction:
4
DS70157C-page 4-15

4.5 Word Move Operations
Even though the data space is byte addressable, all move operations made in Word mode must be word-aligned. This means that for all source and destination operands, the Least Significant address bit must be 0. If a word move is made to or from an odd address, an address error exception is generated. Likewise, all double words must be word-aligned. Figure 4-2 shows how bytes and words may be aligned in data memory. Example 4-10 contains several legal word move operations. When an exception is generated due to a misaligned access, the exception is taken after the instruction executes. If the illegal access occurs from a data read, the operation will be allowed to complete, but the Least Significant bit of the source address will be cleared to force word alignment. If the illegal access occurs during a data write, the write will be inhibited. Example 4-11 contains several illegal word move operations. Figure 4-2: 0x1001 0x1003 0x1005 0x1007 0x1009 0x100B b1 b3 b5 b7 b2 b4 b6 b8 Legend: b0 byte stored at 0x1000 b1 byte stored at 0x1003 b3:b2 word stored at 0x1005:1004 (b2 is LSB) b7:b4 double word stored at 0x1009:0x1006 (b4 is LSB) b8 byte stored at 0x100A Data Alignment in Memory b0 0x1000 0x1002 0x1004 0x1006 0x1008 0x100A
Note:
Instructions which operate in Word mode are not required to use an instruction extension. However, they may be specified with an optional .w or .W extension, if desired. For example, the following instructions are valid forms of a word clear operation:
CLR CLR.w CLR.W W0 W0 W0
DS70157C-page 4-16

Example 4-10:
MOV
Legal Word Move Operations

; move the literal word 0x30 to W0
#0x30, W0 W0 = 0x5555
Before Instruction: After Instruction:

W0 = 0x0030
MOV
0x1000, W0
; move the word at 0x1000 to W0
Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x5555 Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x1234
After Instruction:
W0 = 0x1234 Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x1234
MOV
[W0], [W1++]
; word move [W0] to [W1], ; then post-inc W1
Before Instruction:
W0 = W1 = Data Data W0 = W1 = Data Data 0x1234 0x1000 Memory 0x1000 = 0x5555 Memory 0x1234 = 0xAAAA 0x1234 0x1002 Memory 0x1000 = 0xAAAA Memory 0x1234 = 0xAAAA
After Instruction:
4
DS70157C-page 4-17

Example 4-11:
MOV
Illegal Word Move Operations

; move the word at 0x1001 to W0
0x1001, W0
Before Instruction:
W0 = 0x5555 Data Memory 0x1000 = 0x1234 Data Memory 0x1002 = 0x5678
After Instruction:
ADDRESS ERROR TRAP GENERATED (source address is misaligned, so MOV is performed)

MOV W0, 0x1001 ; move W0 to the word at 0x1001
Before Instruction:
After Instruction:
ADDRESS ERROR TRAP GENERATED (destination address is misaligned, so MOV is not performed)
MOV
[W0], [W1++]
; word move [W0] to [W1], ; then post-inc W1
Before Instruction:
W0 = W1 = Data Data Data W0 = W1 = Data Data Data 0x1235 0x1000 Memory 0x1000 = 0x1234 Memory 0x1234 = 0xAAAA Memory 0x1236 = 0xBBBB 0x1235 0x1002 Memory 0x1000 = 0xAAAA Memory 0x1234 = 0xAAAA Memory 0x1236 = 0xBBBB
After Instruction:
ADDRESS ERROR TRAP GENERATED (source address is misaligned, so MOV is performed)
DS70157C-page 4-18

4.6 Using 10-bit Literal Operands
Several instructions that support Byte and Word mode have 10-bit operands. For byte instructions, a 10-bit literal is too large to use. So when 10-bit literals are used in Byte mode, the range of the operand must be reduced to 8 bits or the assembler will generate an error. Table 4-7 shows that the range of a 10-bit literal is 0:1023 in Word mode and 0:255 in Byte mode. Instructions which employ 10-bit literals in Byte and Word mode are: ADD, ADDC, AND, IOR, RETLW, SUB, SUBB and XOR. Example 4-12 shows how positive and negative literals are used in Byte mode for the ADD instruction. Table 4-7: Literal Value 0 1 2 127 128 255 256 512 1023 Example 4-12:
ADD.B ADD.B ADD.B ADD.B ADD.B ADD.B ADD.B
10-bit Literal Coding Word Mode kk kkkk kkkk 00 0000 0000 00 0000 0001 00 0000 0010 00 0111 1111 00 1000 0000 00 1111 1111 01 0000 0000 10 0000 0000 11 1111 1111 Using 10-bit Literals For Byte Operands
#0x80, W0 #0x380, W0 #0xFF, W0 #0x3FF, W0 #0xF, W0 #0x7F, W0 #0x100, W0 ; ; ; ; ; ; ; add 128 (or -128) to W0 ERROR... Illegal syntax for byte mode add 255 (or -1) to W0 ERROR... Illegal syntax for byte mode add 15 to W0 add 127 to W0 ERROR... Illegal syntax for byte mode
Byte Mode kkkk kkkk 0000 0000 0000 0001 0000 0010 0111 1111 1000 0000 1111 1111 N/A N/A N/A
Note:
Using a literal value greater than 127 in Byte mode is functionally identical to using the equivalent negative twos complement value, since the Most Significant bit of the byte is set. When operating in Byte mode, the Assembler will accept either a positive or negative literal value (i.e., #-10).
4
DS70157C-page 4-19

4.7 4.7.1 Software Stack Pointer and Frame Pointer Software Stack Pointer
Both the dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F feature a software stack which facilitates function calls and exception handling. W15 is the default Stack Pointer (SP) and after any Reset, it is initialized to 0x0800. This ensures that the SP will point to valid RAM in all dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices and permits stack availability for exceptions, which may occur before the SP is set by the user software. The user may reprogram the SP during initialization to any location within data space. The SP always points to the first available free word (Top-of-Stack) and fills the software stack, working from lower addresses towards higher addresses. It pre-decrements for a stack POP (read) and post-increments for a stack PUSH (write). The software stack is manipulated using the PUSH and POP instructions. The PUSH and POP instructions are the equivalent of a MOV instruction, with W15 used as the destination pointer. For example, the contents of W0 can be PUSHed onto the Top-of-Stack (TOS) by:
PUSH W0
This syntax is equivalent to

MOV W0,[W15++]
The contents of the TOS can be returned to W0 by

POP W0
This syntax is equivalent to

MOV [--W15],W0
During any CALL instruction, the PC is PUSHed onto the stack, such that when the subroutine completes execution, program flow may resume from the correct location. When the PC is PUSHed onto the stack, PC<15:0> is PUSHed onto the first available stack word, then PC<22:16> is PUSHed. When PC<22:16> is PUSHed, the Most Significant 7 bits of the PC are zero-extended before the PUSH is made, as shown in Figure 4-3. During exception processing, the Most Significant 7 bits of the PC are concatenated with the lower byte of the STATUS register (SRL) and IPL<3>, CORCON<3>. This allows the primary STATUS register contents and CPU Interrupt Priority Level to be automatically preserved during interrupts. Note: Figure 4-3: 0x0000 15 Stack Grows Towards Higher Address 0 In order to protect against misaligned stack accesses, W15<0> is always clear. Stack Operation for CALL Instruction
PC<15:0> 0x0 PC<22:16> Top-of-Stack
W15 (before CALL) W15 (after CALL)
0xFFFE Note: For exceptions, the upper nine bits of the second PUSHed word contains the SRL and IPL<3>.
DS70157C-page 4-20

4.7.2 Stack Pointer Example
Figure 4-4 through Figure 4-7 show how the software stack is modified for the code snippet shown in Example 4-13. Figure 4-4 shows the software stack before the first PUSH has executed. Note that the SP has the initialized value of 0x0800. Furthermore, the example loads 0x5A5A and 0x3636 to W0 and W1, respectively. The stack is PUSHed for the first time in Figure 4-5 and the value contained in W0 is copied to TOS. W15 is automatically updated to point to the next available stack location, and the new TOS is 0x0802. In Figure 4-6, the contents of W1 are PUSHed onto the stack, and the new TOS becomes 0x0804. In Figure 4-7, the stack is POPped, which copies the last PUSHed value (W1) to W3. The SP is decremented during the POP operation, and at the end of the example, the final TOS is 0x0802. Example 4-13:
MOV MOV PUSH PUSH POP
Stack Pointer Usage

; ; ; ; ; Load W0 Load W1 Push W0 Push W1 Pop TOS with 0x5A5A with 0x3636 to TOS (see Figure 4-5) to TOS (see Figure 4-6) to W3 (see Figure 4-7)
#0x5A5A, W0 #0x3636, W1 W0 W1 W3
Figure 4-4:
Stack Pointer Before The First PUSH

0x0000 0x0800 <TOS> W15 (SP)
0xFFFE W0 = 0x5A5A W1 = 0x3636 W15 = 0x0800
Figure 4-5:
Stack Pointer After PUSH W0 Instruction

0x0000 0x0800 0x0802 5A5A <TOS> W15 (SP)
4
0xFFFE W0 = 0x5A5A W1 = 0x3636 W15 = 0x0802
DS70157C-page 4-21

Figure 4-6: Stack Pointer After PUSH W1 Instruction
0x0000 0x0800 0x0802 0x0804 0xFFFE W0 = 0x5A5A W1 = 0x3636 W15 = 0x0804 5A5A 3636 <TOS>
W15 (SP)
Figure 4-7:
Stack Pointer After POP W3 Instruction

0x0000 0x0800 0x0802 0x0804 0xFFFE W0 = 0x5A5A W1 = 0x3636 W3 = 0x3636 W15 = 0x0802 Note: The contents of 0x802, the new TOS, remain unchanged (0x3636). 5A5A <TOS> W15 (SP)
4.7.3
Software Stack Frame Pointer

A Stack Frame is a user-defined section of memory residing in the software stack. It is used to allocate memory for temporary variables which a function uses, and one Stack Frame may be created for each function. W14 is the default Stack Frame Pointer (FP) and it is initialized to 0x0000 on any Reset. If the Stack Frame Pointer is not used, W14 may be used like any other working register. The link (LNK) and unlink (ULNK) instructions provide Stack Frame functionality. The LNK instruction is used to create a Stack Frame. It is used during a call sequence to adjust the SP, such that the stack may be used to store temporary variables utilized by the called function. After the function completes execution, the ULNK instruction is used to remove the Stack Frame created by the LNK instruction. The LNK and ULNK instructions must always be used together to avoid stack overflow.
DS70157C-page 4-22

4.7.4 Stack Frame Pointer Example
Figure 4-8 through Figure 4-10 show how a Stack Frame is created and removed for the code snippet shown in Example 4-14. This example demonstrates how a Stack Frame operates and is not indicative of the code generated by the dsPIC30F/33F compiler. Figure 4-8 shows the stack condition at the beginning of the example, before any registers are PUSHed to the stack. Here, W15 points to the first free stack location (TOS) and W14 points to a portion of stack memory allocated for the routine that is currently executing. Before calling the function COMPUTE, the parameters of the function (W0, W1 and W2) are PUSHed on the stack. After the CALL COMPUTE instruction is executed, the PC changes to the address of COMPUTE and the return address of the function TASKA is placed on the stack (Figure 4-9). Function COMPUTE then uses the LNK #4 instruction to PUSH the calling routines Frame Pointer value onto the stack and the new Frame Pointer will be set to point to the current Stack Pointer. Then, the literal 4 is added to the Stack Pointer address in W15, which reserves memory for two words of temporary data (Figure 4-10). Inside the function COMPUTE, the FP is used to access the function parameters and temporary (local) variables. [W14 + n] will access the temporary variables used by the routine and [W14 n] is used to access the parameters. At the end of the function, the ULNK instruction is used to copy the Frame Pointer address to the Stack Pointer and then POP the calling subroutines Frame Pointer back to the W14 register. The ULNK instruction returns the stack back to the state shown in Figure 4-9. A RETURN instruction will return to the code that called the subroutine. The calling code is responsible for removing the parameters from the stack. The RETURN and POP instructions restore the stack to the state shown in Figure 4-8. Example 4-14:
TASKA: ... PUSH PUSH PUSH CALL POP POP POP ...
Frame Pointer Usage
W0 W1 W2 COMPUTE W2 W1 W0
; ; ; ; ; ; ;
Push parameter 1 Push parameter 2 Push parameter 3 Call COMPUTE function Pop parameter 3 Pop parameter 2 Pop parameter 1
COMPUTE: LNK #4 ... ULNK RETURN
4
; Stack FP, allocate 4 bytes for local variables
; Free allocated memory, restore original FP ; Return to TASKA
Figure 4-8:
Stack at the Beginning of Example 4-14

0x0000 0x0800 Frame of TASKA <TOS> W14 (FP) W15 (SP)
0xFFFE
DS70157C-page 4-23

Figure 4-9: Stack After CALLCOMPUTE Executes
0x0000 0x0800 Frame of TASKA Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 PC<15:0> 0:PC<22:16> <TOS> W14 (FP)
W15 (SP)
0xFFFE
Figure 4-10:
Stack After LNK #4 Executes

0x0000 0x0800 Frame of TASKA Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 PC<15:0> 0:PC<22:16> FP of TASKA Temp Word 1 Temp Word 2 <TOS> 0xFFFE
W14 (FP) W15 (SP)
4.7.5
Stack Pointer Overflow

There is a stack limit register (SPLIM) associated with the Stack Pointer that is reset to 0x0000. SPLIM is a 16-bit register, but SPLIM<0> is fixed to 0, because all stack operations must be word-aligned. The stack overflow check will not be enabled until a word write to SPLIM occurs, after which time it can only be disabled by a device Reset. All effective addresses generated using W15 as a source or destination are compared against the value in SPLIM. Should the effective address be greater than the contents of SPLIM, then a stack error trap is generated. If stack overflow checking has been enabled, a stack error trap will also occur if the W15 effective address calculation wraps over the end of data space (0xFFFF). Refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for more information on the stack error trap.
4.7.6
Stack Pointer Underflow

The stack is initialized to 0x0800 during Reset. A stack error trap will be initiated should the Stack Pointer address ever be less than 0x0800. Note: Locations in data space between 0x0000 and 0x07FF are, in general, reserved for core and peripheral Special Function Registers (SFR).
DS70157C-page 4-24

4.8 Conditional Branch Instructions
Conditional branch instructions are used to direct program flow, based on the contents of the STATUS register. These instructions are generally used in conjunction with a Compare class instruction, but they may be employed effectively after any operation that modifies the STATUS register. The compare instructions CP, CP0 and CPB, perform a subtract operation (minuend subtrahend), but do not actually store the result of the subtraction. Instead, compare instructions just update the flags in the STATUS register, such that an ensuing conditional branch instruction may change program flow by testing the contents of the updated STATUS register. If the result of the STATUS register test is true, the branch is taken. If the result of the STATUS register test is false, the branch is not taken. The conditional branch instructions supported by the dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices are shown in Table 4-8. This table identifies the condition in the STATUS register which must be true for the branch to be taken. In some cases, just a single bit is tested (as in BRA C), while in other cases, a complex logic operation is performed (as in BRA GT). It is worth noting that both signed and unsigned conditional tests are supported, and that support is provided for DSP algorithms with the OA, OB, SA and SB condition mnemonics. Table 4-8: Condition Mnemonic(1) C GE GEU(2) GT GTU LE LEU LT LTU(3) N NC NN NOV NZ OA OB OV SA SB Z Conditional Branch Instructions Description Carry (not Borrow) Signed greater than or equal Unsigned greater than or equal Signed greater than Unsigned greater than Signed less than or equal Unsigned less than or equal Signed less than Unsigned less than Negative Not Carry (Borrow) Not Negative Not Overflow Not Zero Accumulator A overflow Accumulator B overflow Overflow Accumulator A saturate Accumulator B saturate Zero C (N&&OV) || (N&&OV) C (Z&&N&&OV) || (Z&&N&&OV) C&&Z Z || (N&&OV) || (N&&OV) C || Z (N&&OV) || (N&&OV) C N C N OV Z OA OB OV SA SB Z Status Test
4
Note 1: Instructions are of the form: BRA mnemonic, Expr. 2: GEU is identical to C and will reverse assemble to BRA C, Expr. 3: LTU is identical to NC and will reverse assemble to BRA NC, Expr. Note: The Compare and Skip instructions (CPSEQ, CPSGT, CPSLT and CPSNE) do not modify the STATUS register.
DS70157C-page 4-25

4.9 Z Status Bit
The Z Status bit is a special zero Status bit that is useful for extended precision arithmetic. The Z bit functions like a normal Z flag for all instructions, except those that use the carry/borrow input (ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR). For the ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR instructions, the Z bit can only be cleared and never set. If the result of one of these instructions is non-zero, the Z bit will be cleared and will remain cleared, regardless of the result of subsequent ADDC, CPB, SUBB or SUBBR operations. This allows the Z bit to be used for performing a simple zero check on the result of a series of extended precision operations. A sequence of instructions working on multi-precision data (starting with an instruction with no carry/borrow input), will automatically logically AND the successive results of the zero test. All results must be zero for the Z flag to remain set at the end of the sequence of operations. If the result of the ADDC, CPB, SUBB or SUBBR instruction is non-zero, the Z bit will be cleared and remain cleared for all subsequent ADDC, CPB, SUBB or SUBBR instructions. Example 4-15 shows how the Z bit operates for a 32-bit addition. It shows how the Z bit is affected for a 32-bit addition implemented with an ADD/ADDC instruction sequence. The first example generates a zero result for only the most significant word, and the second example generates a zero result for both the least significant word and most significant word. Example 4-15: Z Status bit Operation for 32-bit Addition
; Add two doubles (W0:W1 and W2:W3) ; Store the result in W5:W4 ADD W0, W2, W4 ; Add LSWord and store to W4 ADDC W1, W3, W5 ; Add MSWord and store to W5
Before 32-bit Addition (zero result for the most significant word):
W0 W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 SR W0 W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 SR = = = = = = = = = = = = = = 0x2342 0xFFF0 0x39AA 0x0010 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x2342 0xFFF0 0x39AA 0x0010 0x5CEC 0x0000 0x0201 (DC,C=1)
After 32-bit Addition:
Before 32-bit Addition (zero result for the least significant word and most significant word):
W0 W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 SR W0 W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 SR = = = = = = = = = = = = = = 0xB76E 0xFB7B 0x4892 0x0484 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0xB76E 0xFB7B 0x4892 0x0485 0x0000 0x0000 0x0103 (DC,Z,C=1)
After 32-bit Addition:
DS70157C-page 4-26

4.10 Assigned Working Register Usage
The 16 working registers of the dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F provide a large register set for efficient code generation and algorithm implementation. In an effort to maintain an instruction set that provides advanced capability, a stable run-time environment and backwards compatibility with earlier Microchip processor cores, some working registers have a pre-assigned usage. Table 4-9 summarizes these working register assignments, with details provided in subsections 4.10.1 Implied DSP Operands through 4.10.3 PIC Microcontroller Compatibility. Table 4-9: W0 W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 W10 W11 W12 W13 W14 W15 Special Working Register Assignments Special Assignment Default WREG, Divide Quotient Divide Remainder MUL f Product least significant word MUL f Product most significant word MAC Operand MAC Operand MAC Operand MAC Operand MAC Prefetch Address (X Memory) MAC Prefetch Address (X Memory) MAC Prefetch Address (Y Memory) MAC Prefetch Address (Y Memory) MAC Prefetch Offset MAC Write Back Destination Frame Pointer Stack Pointer
Register
4.10.1
Implied DSP Operands

To assist instruction encoding and maintain uniformity among the DSP class of instructions, some working registers have pre-assigned functionality. For all DSP instructions which have prefetch ability, the following 10 register assignments must be adhered to: W4-W7 are used for arithmetic operands W8-W11 are used for prefetch addresses (pointers) W12 is used for the prefetch register offset index W13 is used for the accumulator Write Back destination
4
These restrictions only apply to the DSP MAC class of instructions, which utilize working registers and have prefetch ability (described in 4.15 DSP Accumulator Instructions). The affected instructions are CLR, ED, EDAC, MAC, MOVSAC, MPY, MPY.N and MSC. The DSP Accumulator class of instructions (described in 4.15 DSP Accumulator Instructions) are not required to follow the working register assignments in Table 4-9 and may freely use any working register when required.
4.10.2
Implied Frame and Stack Pointer

To accommodate software stack usage, W14 is the implied Frame Pointer (used by the LNK and ULNK instructions) and W15 is the implied Stack Pointer (used by the CALL, LNK, POP, PUSH, RCALL, RETFIE, RETLW, RETURN, TRAP and ULNK instructions). Even though W14 and W15 have this implied usage, they may still be used as generic operands in any instruction, with the exceptions outlined in 4.10.1 Implied DSP Operands. If W14 and W15 must be used for other purposes (it is strongly advised that they remain reserved for the Frame and Stack Pointer), extreme care must be taken such that the run-time environment is not corrupted.
DS70157C-page 4-27

4.10.3
4.10.3.1
PIC Microcontroller Compatibility

Default Working Register WREG To ease the migration path for users of the Microchip PIC MCU families, the dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F have matched the functionality of the PIC MCU instruction sets as closely as possible. One major difference between the dsPIC30F/33F and the PIC MCU processors is the number of working registers provided. The PIC MCU families only provide one 8-bit working register, while the dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F provide sixteen, 16-bit working registers. To accommodate for the one working register of the PIC MCU, the dsPIC30F/33F instruction set has designated one working register to be the default working register for all legacy file register instructions. The default working register is set to W0, and it is used by all instructions which use file register addressing. Additionally, the syntax used by the dsPIC30F/33F assembler to specify the default working register is similar to that used by the PIC MCU assembler. As shown in the detailed instruction descriptions in Section 5. Instruction Descriptions, WREG must be used to specify the default working register. Example 4-16 shows several instructions which use WREG. Example 4-16:
ADD ASR CLR.B DEC MOV SETM XOR
Using the Default Working Register WREG

; ; ; ; ; ; ; add RAM100 and WREG, store in RAM100 shift RAM100 right, store in WREG clear the WREG LS Byte decrement RAM100, store in WREG move WREG to RAM100 set all bits in the WREG XOR RAM100 and WREG, store in RAM100
RAM100 RAM100, WREG WREG RAM100, WREG WREG, RAM100 WREG RAM100
4.10.3.2
PRODH:PRODL Register Pair Another significant difference between the Microchip PIC MCU and dsPIC30F/33F architectures is the multiplier. Some PIC MCU families support an 8-bit x 8-bit multiplier, which places the multiply product in the PRODH:PRODL register pair. The dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F have a 17-bit x 17-bit multiplier, which may place the result into any two successive working registers (starting with an even register), or an accumulator. Despite this architectural difference, the dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F still support the legacy file register multiply instruction (MULWF) with the MUL{.B} f instruction (described on page 5-169). Supporting the legacy MULWF instruction has been accomplished by mapping the PRODH:PRODL registers to the working register pair W3:W2. This means that when MUL{.B} f is executed in Word mode, the multiply generates a 32-bit product which is stored in W3:W2, where W3 has the most significant word of the product and W2 has the least significant word of the product. When MUL{.B} f is executed in Byte mode, the 16-bit product is stored in W2, and W3 is unaffected. Examples of this instruction are shown in Example 4-17.
DS70157C-page 4-28

Example 4-17:
MUL.B
Unsigned f and WREG Multiply (Legacy MULWF Instruction)

; (0x100)*WREG (byte mode), store to W2
0x100
Before Instruction:
W0 (WREG) = 0x7705 W2 = 0x1235 W3 = 0x1000 Data Memory 0x0100 = 0x1255
After Instruction:
W0 (WREG) = 0x7705 W2 = 0x01A9 W3 = 0x1000 Data Memory 0x0100 = 0x1255
MUL
0x100
; (0x100)*WREG (word mode), store to W3:W2
Before Instruction:
W0 (WREG) = 0x7705 W2 = 0x1235 W3 = 0x1000 Data Memory 0x0100 = 0x1255
After Instruction:
W0 (WREG) = 0x7705 W2 = 0xDEA9 W3 = 0x0885 Data Memory 0x0100 = 0x1255
4.10.3.3
Moving Data with WREG The MOV{.B} f {,WREG} instruction (described on page 5-145) and MOV{.B} WREG, f instruction (described on page 5-146) allow for byte or word data to be moved between file register memory and the WREG (working register W0). These instructions provide equivalent functionality to the legacy Microchip PIC MCU MOVF and MOVWF instructions. The MOV{.B} f {,WREG} and MOV{.B} WREG, f instructions are the only MOV instructions which support moves of byte data to and from file register memory. Example 4-18 shows several MOV instruction examples using the WREG. Note: When moving word data between file register memory and the working register array, the MOV Wns, f and MOV f, Wnd instructions allow any working register (W0:W15) to be used as the source or destination register, not just WREG. Moving Data with WREG
; ; ; ; move move move move the the the the byte word byte word stored stored stored stored at at at at location 0x1001 to W0 location 0x1000 to W0 W0 to the TBLPAG register W0 to location 0x804
4
Example 4-18:
MOV.B MOV MOV.B MOV
0x1001, WREG 0x1000, WREG WREG, TBLPAG WREG, 0x804
DS70157C-page 4-29

4.11 4.11.1 DSP Data Formats Integer and Fractional Data
The dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices support both integer and fractional data types. Integer data is inherently represented as a signed twos complement value, where the Most Significant bit is defined as a sign bit. Generally speaking, the range of an N-bit twos complement integer is -2N-1 to 2N-1 1. For a 16-bit integer, the data range is -32768 (0x8000) to 32767 (0x7FFF), including 0. For a 32-bit integer, the data range is -2,147,483,648 (0x8000 0000) to 2,147,483,647 (0x7FFF FFFF). Fractional data is represented as a twos complement number, where the Most Significant bit is defined as a sign bit, and the radix point is implied to lie just after the sign bit. This format is commonly referred to as 1.15 (or Q15) format, where 1 is the number of bits used to represent the integer portion of the number, and 15 is the number of bits used to represent the fractional portion. The range of an N-bit twos complement fraction with this implied radix point is -1.0 to (1 21-N). For a 16-bit fraction, the 1.15 data range is -1.0 (0x8000) to 0.999969482 (0x7FFF), including 0.0 and it has a precision of 3.05176x10-5. In Normal Saturation mode, the 32-bit accumulators use a 1.31 format, which enhances the precision to 4.6566x10-10. Super Saturation mode expands the dynamic range of the accumulators by using the 8 bits of the Upper Accumulator register (ACCxU) as guard bits. Guard bits are used if the value stored in the accumulator overflows beyond the 32nd bit, and they are useful for implementing DSP algorithms. This mode is enabled when the ACCSAT bit (CORCON<4>), is set to 1 and it expands the accumulators to 40 bits. The accumulators then support an integer range of -5.498x1011 (0x80 0000 0000) to 5.498x1011 (0x7F FFFF FFFF). In Fractional mode, the guard bits of the accumulator do not modify the location of the radix point and the 40-bit accumulators use a 9.31 fractional format. Note that all fractional operation results are stored in the 40-bit Accumulator, justified with a 1.31 radix point. As in Integer mode, the guard bits merely increase the dynamic range of the accumulator. 9.31 fractions have a range of -256.0 (0x80 0000 0000) to (256.0 4.65661x10-10) (0x7F FFFF FFFF). Table 4-10 identifies the range and precision of integers and fractions on the dsPIC30F/33F devices for 16-bit, 32-bit and 40-bit registers. It should be noted that, with the exception of DSP multiplies, the ALU operates identically on integer and fractional data. Namely, an addition of two integers will yield the same result (binary number) as the addition of two fractional numbers. The only difference is how the result is interpreted by the user. However, multiplies performed by DSP operations are different. In these instructions, data format selection is made by the IF bit, CORCON<0>, and it must be set accordingly (0 for Fractional mode, 1 for Integer mode). This is required because of the implied radix point used by dsPIC30F/33F fractional numbers. In Integer mode, multiplying two 16-bit integers produces a 32-bit integer result. However, multiplying two 1.15 values generates a 2.30 result. Since the dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F devices use a 1.31 format for the accumulators, a DSP multiply in Fractional mode also includes a left shift of one bit to keep the radix point properly aligned. This feature reduces the resolution of the DSP multiplier to 2-30, but has no other effect on the computation (e.g., 0.5 x 0.5 = 0.25). Table 4-10: dsPIC30F/33F Data Ranges Integer Range -32768 to 32767 -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 -549,755,813,888 to 549,755,813,887 Fraction Range -1.0 to (1.0 2-15) -1.0 to (1.0 2-31) Fraction Resolution 3.052 x 10-5 4.657 x 10-10
Register Size 16-bit 32-bit 40-bit
-256.0 to (256.0 2-31) 4.657 x 10-10
DS70157C-page 4-30

4.11.2 Integer and Fractional Data Representation
Having a working knowledge of how integer and fractional data are represented on the dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F is fundamental to working with the device. Both integer and fractional data treat the Most Significant bit as a sign bit, and the binary exponent decreases by one as the bit position advances toward the Least Significant bit. The binary exponent for an N-bit integer starts at (N-1) for the Most Significant bit, and ends at 0 for the Least Significant bit. For an N-bit fraction, the binary exponent starts at 0 for the Most Significant bit, and ends at (1-N) for the Least Significant bit (as shown in Figure 4-11 for a positive value and in Figure 4-12 for a negative value). Convertion between integer and fractional representations can be performed using simple division and multiplication. To go from an N-bit integer to a fraction, divide the integer value by 2N-1. Likewise, to convert an N-bit fraction to an integer, multiply the fractional value by 2N-1. Figure 4-11: Integer:
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Different Representations of 0x4001
-215 214
213
212 . . . . . .
20
0x4001 = 214 + 20 = 16384 + 1 = 16385 1.15 Fractional:

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
-20 . 2-1
2-2
2-3 . . . . . .
2-15
Implied Radix Point 0x4001 = 2-1 + 2-15 = 0.5 + .000030518 = 0.500030518 Figure 4-12: Integer:
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
Different Representations of 0xC002
4
213 212 . . . . . . 20
-215 214
0xC002 = -215 + 214 + 21= -32768 + 16384 + 2 = -16382 1.15 Fractional:

1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
-20 . 2-1
2-2
2-3 . . . . . .
2-15
Implied Radix Point 0xC002 = -20 + 2-1 + 2-14 = -1.0 + 0.5 + 0.000061035 = -0.499938965
DS70157C-page 4-31

4.12 Accumulator Usage
Accumulators A and B are utilized by DSP instructions to perform mathematical and shifting operations. Since the accumulators are 40 bits wide and the X and Y data paths are only 16 bits, the method to load and store the accumulators must be understood. Item A in Figure 4-13 shows that each 40-bit Accumulator (ACCA and ACCB) consists of an 8-bit Upper register (ACCxU), a 16-bit High register (ACCxH) and a 16-bit Low register (ACCxL). To address the bus alignment requirement and provide the ability for 1.31 math, ACCxH is used as a destination register for loading the accumulator (with the LAC instruction), and also as a source register for storing the accumulator (with the SAC.R instruction). This is represented by Item B, Figure 4-13, where the upper and lower portions of the accumulator are shaded. In reality, during accumulator loads, ACCxL is zero backfilled and ACCxU is sign-extended to represent the sign of the value loaded in ACCxH. When Normal (31-bit) Saturation is enabled, DSP operations (such as ADD, MAC, MSC, etc.) utilize solely ACCxH:ACCxL (Item C in Figure 4-13) and ACCxU is only used to maintain the sign of the value stored in ACCxH:ACCxL. For instance, when a MPY instruction is executed, the result is stored in ACCxH:ACCxL, and the sign of the result is extended through ACCxU. When Super Saturation is enabled, all registers of the accumulator may be used (Item D in Figure 4-13) and the results of DSP operations are stored in ACCxU:ACCxH:ACCxL. The benefit of ACCxU is that it increases the dynamic range of the accumulator, as described in 4.11.1 Integer and Fractional Data. Refer to Table 4-10 to see the range of values which may be stored in the accumulator when in Normal and Super Saturation modes. Figure 4-13: Accumulator Alignment and Usage
A)
39
ACCxU
32 31 30
ACCxH
16 15
ACCxL
0
Implied Radix Point (between bits 31 and 30)
B)
C)
D)
A) B) C) D)
40-bit Accumulator consists of ACCxU:ACCxH:ACCxL Load and Store operations Operations in Normal Saturation mode Operations in Super Saturation mode
DS70157C-page 4-32

4.13 Accumulator Access
The six registers of Accumulator A and Accumulator B are memory mapped like any other Special Function Register. This feature allows them to be accessed with file register or indirect addressing, using any instruction which supports such addressing. However, it is recommended that the DSP instructions LAC, SAC and SAC.R be used to load and store the accumulators, since they provide sign-extension, shifting and rounding capabilities. LAC, SAC and SAC.R instruction details are provided in Section 5. Instruction Descriptions. Note: For convenience, ACCAU and ACCBU are sign-extended to 16 bits. This provides the flexibility to access these registers using either Byte or Word mode (when file register or indirect addressing is used).
4.14
DSP MAC Instructions

The DSP Multiply and Accumulate (MAC) operations are a special suite of instructions which provide the most efficient use of the dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F architectures. The DSP MAC instructions, shown in Table 4.14, utilize both the X and Y data paths of the CPU core, which enables these instructions to perform the following operations all in one cycle: two reads from data memory using prefetch working registers (MAC Prefetches) two updates to prefetch working registers (MAC Prefetch Register Updates) one mathematical operation with an accumulator (MAC Operations) In addition, four of the ten DSP MAC instructions are also capable of performing an operation with one accumulator, while storing out the rounded contents of the alternate accumulator. This feature is called accumulator Write Back (WB) and it provides flexibility for the software developer. For instance, the accumulator WB may be used to run two algorithms concurrently, or efficiently process complex numbers, among other things. Table 4-11: Instruction CLR ED EDAC MAC MAC MOVSAC MPY MPY MPY.N MSC DSP MAC Instructions Description Clear accumulator Euclidean distance (no accumulate) Euclidean distance Multiply and accumulate Square and accumulate Move from X and Y bus Multiply to accumulator Square to accumulator Negative multiply to accumulator Multiply and subtract Accumulator WB? Yes No No Yes No Yes No No No Yes
4
4.14.1
MAC Prefetches
Prefetches (or data reads) are made using the effective address stored in the working register. The two prefetches from data memory must be specified using the working register assignments shown in Table 4-9. One read must occur from the X data bus using W8 or W9, and one read must occur from the Y data bus using W10 or W11. The allowed destination registers for both prefetches are W4-W7. As shown in Table 4-3, one special Addressing mode exists for the MAC class of instructions. This mode is the Register Offset Addressing mode and utilizes W12. In this mode, the prefetch is made using the effective address of the specified working register, plus the 16-bit signed value stored in W12. Register Offset Addressing may only be used in the X space with W9, and in the Y-space with W11.
DS70157C-page 4-33

4.14.2 MAC Prefetch Register Updates
After the MAC prefetches are made, the effective address stored in each prefetch working register may be modified. This feature enables efficient single-cycle processing for data stored sequentially in X and Y memory. Since all DSP instructions execute in Word mode, only even numbered updates may be made to the effective address stored in the working register. Allowable address modifications to each prefetch register are -6, -4, -2, 0 (no update), +2, +4 and +6. This means that effective address updates may be made up to 3 words in either direction. When the Register Offset Addressing mode is used, no update is made to the base prefetch register (W9 or W11), or the offset register (W12).
4.14.3
MAC Operations
The mathematical operations performed by the MAC class of DSP instructions center around multiplying the contents of two working registers and either adding or storing the result to either Accumulator A or Accumulator B. This is the operation of the MAC, MPY, MPY.N and MSC instructions. Table 4-9 shows that W4-W7 must be used for data source operands in the MAC class of instructions. W4-W7 may be combined in any fashion, and when the same working register is specified for both operands, a square or square and accumulate operation is performed. For the ED and EDAC instructions, the same multiplicand operand must be specified by the instruction, because this is the definition of the Euclidean Distance operation. Another unique feature about this instruction is that the values prefetched from X and Y memory are not actually stored in W4-W7. Instead, only the difference of the prefetched data words is stored in W4-W7. The two remaining MAC class instructions, CLR and MOVSAC, are useful for initiating or completing a series of MAC or EDAC instructions and do not use the multiplier. CLR has the ability to clear Accumulator A or B, prefetch two values from data memory and store the contents of the other accumulator. Similarly, MOVSAC has the ability to prefetch two values from data memory and store the contents of either accumulator.
4.14.4
MAC Write Back

The write back ability of the MAC class of DSP instructions facilitates efficient processing of algorithms. This feature allows one mathematical operation to be performed with one accumulator, and the rounded contents of the other accumulator to be stored in the same cycle. As indicated in Table 4-9, register W13 is assigned for performing the write back, and two Addressing modes are supported: Direct and Indirect with Post-Increment. The CLR, MOVSAC and MSC instructions support accumulator Write Back, while the ED, EDAC, MPY and MPY.N instructions do not support accumulator Write Back. The MAC instruction, which multiplies two working registers which are not the same, also supports accumulator Write Back. However, the square and accumulate MAC instruction does not support accumulator Write Back (see Table 4.14).
4.14.5
MAC Syntax
The syntax of the MAC class of instructions can have several formats, which depend on the instruction type and the operation it is performing, with respect to prefetches and accumulator Write Back. With the exception of the CLR and MOVSAC instructions, all MAC class instructions must specify a target accumulator along with two multiplicands, as shown in Example 4-19.
DS70157C-page 4-34

Example 4-19: Base MAC Syntax
; MAC with no prefetch MAC W4*W5, A
Multiply W4*W5, Accumulate to ACCA
; MAC with no prefetch MAC W7*W7, B
Multiply W7*W7, Accumulate to ACCB If a prefetch is used in the instruction, the assembler is capable of discriminating the X or Y data prefetch based on the register used for the effective address. [W8] or [W9] specifies the X prefetch and [W10] or [W11] specifies the Y prefetch. Brackets around the working register are required in the syntax, and they designate that indirect addressing is used to perform the prefetch. When address modification is used, it must be specified using a minus-equals or plus-equals C-like syntax (i.e., [W8] = 2 or [W8] + = 6). When Register Offset Addressing is used for the prefetch, W12 is placed inside the brackets ([W9 + W12] for X prefetches and [W11 + W12] for Y prefetches). Each prefetch operation must also specify a prefetch destination register (W4-W7). In the instruction syntax, the destination register appears before the prefetch register. Legal forms of prefetch are shown in Example 4-20. Example 4-20: MAC Prefetch Syntax
; MAC with X only prefetch MAC W5*W6, A, [W8]+=2, W5
ACCA=ACCA+W5*W6 X([W8]+=2) W5
; MAC with Y only prefetch MAC W5*W5, B, [W11+W12], W5
4
ACCB=ACCB+W5*W5 Y([W11+W12]) W5
; MAC with X/Y prefetch MAC W6*W7, B, [W9], W6,
[W10]+=4, W7
ACCB=ACCB+W6*W7 X([W9]) W6 Y([W10]+=4) W7
DS70157C-page 4-35

If an accumulator Write Back is used in the instruction, it is specified last. The Write Back must use the W13 register, and allowable forms for the Write Back are W13 for direct addressing and [W13] + = 2 for indirect addressing with post-increment. By definition, the accumulator not used in the mathematical operation is stored, so the Write Back accumulator is not specified in the instruction. Legal forms of accumulator Write Back (WB) are shown in Example 4-21. Example 4-21: MAC Accumulator WB Syntax
; CLR with direct WB of ACCB CLR A, W13
0 ACCA ACCB W13
; MAC with indirect WB of ACCB MAC W4*W5, A [W13]+=2
ACCA=ACCA+W4*W5 ACCB [W13]+=2
; MAC with Y prefetch, direct WB of ACCA MAC W4*W5, B, [W10]+=2, W4, W13
ACCB=ACCB+W4*W5 Y([W10]+=2) W4 ACCA W13 Putting it all together, an MSC instruction which performs two prefetches and a write back is shown in Example 4-22. Example 4-22: MSC Instruction with Two Prefetches and Accumulator Write Back
; MSC with X/Y prefetch, indirect WB of ACCA MSC W6*W7, B, [W8]+=2, W6, [W10]-=6, W7 [W13]+=2 ACCB=ACCB-W6*W7 X([W8]+=2)W6 Y([W10]-=6)W7 ACCA[W13]+=2
DS70157C-page 4-36

4.15 DSP Accumulator Instructions
The DSP Accumulator instructions do not have prefetch or accumulator WB ability, but they do provide the ability to add, negate, shift, load and store the contents of either 40-bit Accumulator. In addition, the ADD and SUB instructions allow the two accumulators to be added or subtracted from each other. DSP Accumulator instructions are shown in Table 4-12 and instruction details are provided in Section 5. Instruction Descriptions. Table 4-12: Instruction ADD ADD LAC NEG SAC SAC.R SFTAC SFTAC SUB DSP Accumulator Instructions Description Add accumulators 16-bit signed accumulator add Load accumulator Negate accumulator Store accumulator Store rounded accumulator Arithmetic shift accumulator by Literal Arithmetic shift accumulator by (Wn) Subtract accumulators Accumulator WB? No No No No No No No No No
4.16
Scaling Data with the FBCL Instruction

To minimize quantization errors that are associated with data processing using DSP instructions, it is important to utilize the complete numerical result of the operations. This may require scaling data up to avoid underflow (i.e., when processing data from a 12-bit ADC), or scaling data down to avoid overflow (i.e., when sending data to a 10-bit DAC). The scaling, which must be performed to minimize quantization error, depends on the dynamic range of the input data which is operated on, and the required dynamic range of the output data. At times, these conditions may be known beforehand and fixed scaling may be employed. In other cases, scaling conditions may not be fixed or known, and then dynamic scaling must be used to process data. The FBCL instruction (Find First Bit Change Left) can efficiently be used to perform dynamic scaling, because it determines the exponent of a value. A fixed point or integer values exponent represents the amount which the value may be shifted before overflowing. This information is valuable, because it may be used to bring the data value to full scale, meaning that its numeric representation utilizes all the bits of the register it is stored in. The FBCL instruction determines the exponent of a word by detecting the first bit change starting from the values sign bit and working towards the LSB. Since the dsPIC DSC devices barrel shifter uses negative values to specify a left shift, the FBCL instruction returns the negated exponent of a value. If the value is being scaled up, this allows the ensuing shift to be performed immediately with the value returned by FBCL. Additionally, since the FBCL instruction only operates on signed quantities, FBCL produces results in the range of -15:0. When the FBCL instruction returns 0, it indicates that the value is already at full scale. When the instruction returns -15, it indicates that the value cannot be scaled (as is the case with 0x0 and 0xFFFF). Table 4-13 shows word data with various dynamic ranges, their exponents, and the value after scaling each data to maximize the dynamic range. Example 4-23 shows how the FBCL instruction may be used for block processing.
4
DS70157C-page 4-37

Table 4-13: Word Value 0x0001 0x0002 0x0004 0x0100 0x01FF 0x0806 0x2007 0x4800 0x7000 0x8000 0x900A 0xE001 0xFF07 Note: Scaling Examples Exponent 14 13 12 6 6 3 1 0 0 0 0 2 7 Full Scale Value (Word Value << Exponent) 0x4000 0x4000 0x4000 0x4000 0x7FC0 0x4030 0x400E 0x4800 0x7000 0x8000 0x900A 0x8004 0x8380
For the word values 0x0000 and 0xFFFF, the FBCL instruction returns -15.
As a practical example, assume that block processing is performed on a sequence of data with very low dynamic range stored in 1.15 fractional format. To minimize quantization errors, the data may be scaled up to prevent any quantization loss which may occur as it is processed. The FBCL instruction can be executed on the sample with the largest magnitude to determine the optimal scaling value for processing the data. Note that scaling the data up is performed by left shifting the data. This is demonstrated with the code snippet below. Example 4-23: Scaling with FBCL
; assume W0 contains the largest absolute value of the data block ; assume W4 points to the beginning of the data block ; assume the block of data contains BLOCK_SIZE words ; determine the exponent to use for scaling FBCL W0, W2 ; store exponent in W2 ; scale DO LAC SFTAC SCALE: SAC the entire data block before processing #(BLOCK_SIZE-1), SCALE [W4], A ; move the next data sample to ACCA A, W2 ; shift ACCA by W2 bits A, [W4++] ; store scaled input (overwrite original)
; now process the data ; (processing block goes here)
DS70157C-page 4-38

4.17 Normalizing the Accumulator with the FBCL Instruction
The process of scaling a quantized value for its maximum dynamic range is known as normalization (the data in the third column in Table 4-13 contains normalized data). Accumulator normalization is a technique used to ensure that the accumulator is properly aligned before storing data from the accumulator, and the FBCL instruction facilitates this function. The two 40-bit accumulators each have 8 guard bits from the ACCxU register, which expands the dynamic range of the accumulators from 1.31 to 9.31, when operating in Super Saturation mode (see Section 4.11.1 Integer and Fractional Data). However, even in Super Saturation mode, the Store Rounded Accumulator (SAC.R) instruction only stores 16-bit data (in 1.15 format) from ACCxH, as described in Section 4.12 Accumulator Usage. Under certain conditions, this may pose a problem. Proper data alignment for storing the contents of the accumulator may be achieved by scaling the accumulator down if ACCxU is in use, or scaling the accumulator up if all of the ACCxH bits are not being used. To perform such scaling, the FBCL instruction must operate on the ACCxU byte and it must operate on the ACCxH word. If a shift is required, the ALUs 40-bit shifter is employed, using the SFTAC instruction to perform the scaling. Example 4-24 contains a code snippet for accumulator normalization. Example 4-24: Normalizing with FBCL
; assume an operation in ACCA has just completed (SR intact) ; assume the processor is in super saturation mode ; assume ACCAH is defined to be the address of ACCAH (0x24) MOV #ACCAH, W5 BRA OA, FBCL_GUARD FBCL_HI: FBCL [W5], W0 BRA SHIFT_ACC FBCL_GUARD: FBCL [++W5], W0 ADD.B W0, #15, W0 SHIFT_ACC: SFTAC A, W0 ; W5 points to ACCAH ; if overflow we right shift ; extract exponent for left shift ; branch to the shift ; extract exponent for right shift ; adjust the sign for right shift ; shift ACCA to normalize
4
DS70157C-page 4-39

NOTES:
DS70157C-page 4-40
Section 5. Instruction Descriptions

HIGHLIGHTS
This section of the manual contains the following major topics: 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 Instruction Symbols........................................................................................................ 5-2 Instruction Encoding Field Descriptors Introduction....................................................... 5-2 Instruction Description Example .................................................................................... 5-6 Instruction Descriptions.................................................................................................. 5-7
5
Instruction Descriptions
DS70157C-page 5-1

5.1 5.2 Instruction Symbols
All the symbols used in Section 5.4 Instruction Descriptions are listed in Table 1-2.
Instruction Encoding Field Descriptors Introduction

All instruction encoding field descriptors used in Section 5.4 Instruction Descriptions are shown in Table 5-2 through Table 5-12. Table 5-1: Instruction Encoding Field Descriptors
Field A aa B bbbb D dddd f ffff ffff ffff fff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ggg hhh iiii jjjj k kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk mm mmm nnnn nnnn nnnn nnn0 nnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn ppp qqq rrrr ssss tttt vvvv W wwww xx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx yy z Description Accumulator selection bit: 0 = ACCA; 1 = CCB Accumulator Write Back mode (see Table 5-12) Byte mode selection bit: 0 = word operation; 1 = byte operation 4-bit bit position select: 0000 = LSB; 1111 = MSB Destination address bit: 0 = result stored in WREG; 1 = result stored in file register Wd destination register select: 0000 = W0; 1111 = W15 13-bit register file address (0x0000 to 0x1FFF) 15-bit register file word address (implied 0 LSB) (0x0000 to 0xFFFE) 16-bit register file byte address (0x0000 to 0xFFFF) Register Offset Addressing mode for Ws source register (see Table 5-4) Register Offset Addressing mode for Wd destination register (see Table 5-5) Prefetch X Operation (see Table 5-6) Prefetch Y Operation (see Table 5-8) 1-bit literal field, constant data or expression 4-bit literal field, constant data or expression 6-bit literal field, constant data or expression 8-bit literal field, constant data or expression 10-bit literal field, constant data or expression 14-bit literal field, constant data or expression 16-bit literal field, constant data or expression Multiplier source select with same working registers (see Table 5-10) Multiplier source select with different working registers (see Table 5-11) 23-bit program address for CALL and GOTO instructions 16-bit program offset field for relative branch/call instructions Addressing mode for Ws source register (see Table 5-2) Addressing mode for Wd destination register (see Table 5-3) Barrel shift count Ws source register select: 0000 = W0; 1111 = W15 Dividend select, most significant word Dividend select, least significant word Double Word mode selection bit: 0 = word operation; 1 = double word operation Wb base register select: 0000 = W0; 1111 = W15 Prefetch X Destination (see Table 5-7) 16-bit unused field (dont care) Prefetch Y Destination (see Table 5-9) Bit test destination: 0 = C flag bit; 1 = Z flag bit
kk kkkk kk kkkk kk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk
DS70157C-page 5-2

Table 5-2: ppp 000 001 010 011 100 101 11x Table 5-3: qqq 000 001 010 011 100 101 11x Table 5-4: ggg 000 001 010 011 100 101 11x Table 5-5: hhh 000 001 010 011 100 101 11x Register Direct Indirect Indirect with Post-Decrement Indirect with Post-Increment Indirect with Pre-Decrement Indirect with Pre-Increment Indirect with Register Offset Register Direct Indirect Indirect with Post-Decrement Indirect with Post-Increment Indirect with Pre-Decrement Indirect with Pre-Increment Indirect with Register Offset Register Direct Indirect Indirect with Post-Decrement Indirect with Post-Increment Indirect with Pre-Decrement Indirect with Pre-Increment Register Direct Indirect Indirect with Post-Decrement Indirect with Post-Increment Indirect with Pre-Decrement Indirect with Pre-Increment Unused Addressing Modes for Wd Destination Register Addressing Mode Destination Operand Wd [Wd] [Wd--] [Wd++] [--Wd] [++Wd] Addressing Modes for Ws Source Register Addressing Mode Ws [Ws] [Ws--] [Ws++] [--Ws] [++Ws] Source Operand
Unused (an attempt to use this Addressing mode will force a RESET instruction) Offset Addressing Modes for Ws Source Register (with Register Offset) Addressing Mode Ws [Ws] [Ws--] [Ws++] [--Ws] [++Ws] [Ws+Wb] Source Operand
Offset Addressing Modes for Wd Destination Register (with Register Offset) Addressing Mode Wd [Wd] [Wd--] [Wd++] [--Wd] [++Wd] [Wd+Wb] Source Operand
5
DS70157C-page 5-3

Table 5-6: iiii 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Table 5-7: xx 00 01 10 11 Table 5-8: jjjj 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Wyd = [W10] Wyd = [W10], W10 = W10 + 2 Wyd = [W10], W10 = W10 + 4 Wyd = [W10], W10 = W10 + 6 No Prefetch for Y Data Space Wyd = [W10], W10 = W10 6 Wyd = [W10], W10 = W10 4 Wyd = [W10], W10 = W10 2 Wyd = [W11] Wyd = [W11], W11 = W11 + 2 Wyd = [W11], W11 = W11 + 4 Wyd = [W11], W11 = W11 + 6 Wyd = [W11 + W12] Wyd = [W11], W11 = W11 6 Wyd = [W11], W11 = W11 4 Wyd = [W11], W11 = W11 2 W4 W5 W6 W7 Y Data Space Prefetch Operation Operation Wxd = [W8] Wxd = [W8], W8 = W8 + 2 Wxd = [W8], W8 = W8 + 4 Wxd = [W8], W8 = W8 + 6 No Prefetch for X Data Space Wxd = [W8], W8 = W8 6 Wxd = [W8], W8 = W8 4 Wxd = [W8], W8 = W8 2 Wxd = [W9] Wxd = [W9], W9 = W9 + 2 Wxd = [W9], W9 = W9 + 4 Wxd = [W9], W9 = W9 + 6 Wxd = [W9 + W12] Wxd = [W9], W9 = W9 6 Wxd = [W9], W9 = W9 4 Wxd = [W9], W9 = W9 2 X Data Space Prefetch Destination Wxd X Data Space Prefetch Operation Operation
DS70157C-page 5-4

Table 5-9: yy 00 01 10 11 W4 W5 W6 W7 Y Data Space Prefetch Destination Wyd
Table 5-10: MAC or MPY Source Operands (Same Working Register) mm 00 01 10 11 Table 5-11: mmm 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 Table 5-12: aa 00 01 10 11 W4 * W5 W4 * W6 W4 * W7 Invalid W5 * W6 W5 * W7 W6 * W7 Invalid MAC Accumulator Write Back Selection Write Back Selection W13 = Other Accumulator (Direct Addressing) [W13] + = 2 = Other Accumulator (Indirect Addressing with Post-Increment) No Write Back Invalid W4 * W4 W5 * W5 W6 * W6 W7 * W7 MAC or MPY Source Operands (Different Working Register) Multiplicands Multiplicands
5
DS70157C-page 5-5

5.3 Instruction Description Example
The example description below is for the fictitious instruction FOO. The following example instruction was created to demonstrate how the table fields (syntax, operands, operation, etc.) are used to describe the instructions presented in Section 5.4 Instruction Descriptions.
FOO
Syntax:
The Header field summarizes what the instruction does The Syntax field consists of an optional label, the instruction mnemonic, any optional extensions which exist for the instruction and the operands for the instruction. Most instructions support more than one operand variant to support the various dsPIC30F/dsPIC33F Addressing modes. In these circumstances, all possible instruction operands are listed beneath each other (as in the case of op2a, op2b and op2c above). Optional operands are enclosed in braces. The Operands field describes the set of values which each of the operands may take. Operands may be accumulator registers, file registers, literal constants (signed or unsigned), or working registers. The Operation field summarizes the operation performed by the instruction. The Status Affected field describes which bits of the STATUS Register are affected by the instruction. Status bits are listed by bit position in descending order. The Encoding field shows how the instruction is bit encoded. Individual bit fields are explained in the Description field, and complete encoding details are provided in Table 5.2. The Description field describes in detail the operation performed by the instruction. A key for the encoding bits is also provided. The Words field contains the number of program words that are used to store the instruction in memory. The Cycles field contains the number of instruction cycles that are required to execute the instruction. The Examples field contains examples that demonstrate how the instruction operates. Before and After register snapshots are provided, which allow the user to clearly understand what operation the instruction performs.
Operands:
Operation: Status Affected:
Encoding:
Description:
Words:
Cycles:
Examples:
DS70157C-page 5-6

5.4 Instruction Descriptions
ADD
Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: {label:}
Add f to WREG ADD{.B} f {,WREG}
f [0 ... 8191] (f) + (WREG) destination designated by D DC, N, OV, Z, C 1011 0100 0BDf ffff ffff ffff Add the contents of the default working register WREG to the contents of the file register, and place the result in the destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
Words: Cycles: Example 1:
1 1
ADD.B RAM100 ; Add WREG to RAM100 (Byte mode)
Before Instruction WREG CC80 RAM100 FFC0 SR 0000
After Instruction WREG CC80 RAM100 FF40 SR 0005 (OV, C = 1)
Example 2:
ADD
RAM200, WREG
; Add RAM200 to WREG (Word mode)
Before Instruction WREG CC80 RAM200 FFC0 SR 0000
After Instruction WREG CC40 RAM200 FFC0 SR 0001 (C = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-7
ADD
Syntax: Operands: {label:}
Add Literal to Wn ADD{.B} #lit10, Wn
lit10 [0 ... 255] for byte operation lit10 [0 ... 1023] for word operation Wn [W0 ... W15] lit10 + (Wn) Wn DC, N, OV, Z, C 1011 0000 0Bkk kkkk kkkk dddd Add the 10-bit unsigned literal operand to the contents of the working register Wn, and place the result back into the working register Wn. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The k bits specify the literal operand. The d bits select the address of the working register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: For byte operations, the literal must be specified as an unsigned value [0:255]. See Section 4.6 Using 10-bit Literal Operands for information on using 10-bit literal operands in Byte mode.
Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description:
1 1
ADD.B #0xFF, W7 ; Add -1 to W7 (Byte mode)
Before Instruction W7 12C0 SR 0000
After Instruction W7 12BF SR 0009 (N, C = 1)
Example 2:
ADD
#0xFF, W1
; Add 255 to W1 (Word mode)
Before Instruction W1 12C0 SR 0000
After Instruction W1 13BF SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-8
ADD
Syntax: {label:}
Add Wb to Short Literal ADD{.B} Wb, #lit5, Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Operands:
Wb [W0 ... W15] lit5 [0 ... 31] Wd [W0 ... W15] (Wb) + lit5 Wd DC, N, OV, Z, C 0100 0www wBqq qddd d11k kkkk Add the contents of the base register Wb to the 5-bit unsigned short literal operand, and place the result in the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Wd. The w bits select the address of the base register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The k bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
1 1
ADD.B W0, #0x1F, W7 ; Add W0 and 31 (Byte mode) ; Store the result in W7
Before Instruction W0 2290 W7 12C0 SR 0000 Example 2:

ADD
After Instruction W0 2290 W7 12AF SR 0008 (N = 1)

W3, #0x6, [--W4] ; Add W3 and 6 (Word mode) ; Store the result in [--W4]
Before Instruction W3 6006 W4 1000 Data 0FFE DDEE Data 1000 DDEE SR 0000
After Instruction W3 6006 W4 0FFE Data 0FFE 600C Data 1000 DDEE SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-9
ADD
Syntax: {label:}
Add Wb to Ws ADD{.B} Wb, Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Operands:
Wb [W0 ... W15] Ws [W0 ... W15] Wd [W0 ... W15] (Wb) + (Ws) Wd DC, N, OV, Z, C 0100 0www wBqq qddd dppp ssss Add the contents of the source register Ws and the contents of the base register Wb, and place the result in the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd. The w bits select the address of the base register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
1 1
ADD.B W5, W6, W7 ; Add W5 to W6, store result in W7 ; (Byte mode)
Before Instruction W5 AB00 W6 0030 W7 FFFF SR 0000 Example 2:

ADD
After Instruction W5 AB00 W6 0030 W7 FF30 SR 0000

W5, W6, W7 ; Add W5 to W6, store result in W7 ; (Word mode)
Before Instruction W5 AB00 W6 0030 W7 FFFF SR 0000
After Instruction W5 AB00 W6 0030 W7 AB30 SR 0008 (N = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-10
ADD
Syntax: Operands: Operation: {label:} Acc [A,B]
Add Accumulators ADD Acc
If (Acc = A): (ACCA) + (ACCB) ACCA Else: (ACCA) + (ACCB) ACCB OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB 1100 1011 A000 0000 0000 0000 Add the contents of Accumulator A to the contents of Accumulator B and place the result in the selected accumulator. This instruction performs a 40-bit addition. The A bit specifies the destination accumulator. 1 1
ADD A ; Add ACCB to ACCA
Status Affected: Encoding: Description:
ACCA ACCB SR Example 2:

ADD
Before Instruction 00 0022 3300 00 1833 4558 0000

B
ACCA ACCB SR
After Instruction 00 1855 7858 00 1833 4558 0000
; Add ACCA to ACCB ; Assume Super Saturation mode enabled ; (ACCSAT = 1, SATA = 1, SATB = 1)
ACCA ACCB SR
Before Instruction 00 E111 2222 00 7654 3210 0000
ACCA ACCB SR
After Instruction 00 E111 2222 01 5765 5432 4800 (OB, OAB = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-11
ADD
Syntax: {label:}
16-Bit Signed Add to Accumulator ADD Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [--Ws], [++Ws], [Ws+Wb], {#Slit4,} Acc
Operands:
Ws [W0 ... W15] Wb [W0 ... W15] Slit4 [-8 ... +7] Acc [A,B] ShiftSlit4(Extend(Ws)) + (Acc) Acc 1100 1001 Awww wrrr rggg ssss
Operation:
Status Affected: OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB Encoding: Description: Add a 16-bit value specified by the source working register to the most significant word of the selected accumulator. The source operand may specify the direct contents of a working register or an effective address. The value specified is added to the most significant word of the accumulator by sign-extending and zero backfilling the source operand prior to the operation. The value added to the accumulator may also be shifted by a 4-bit signed literal before the addition is made. The A bit specifies the destination accumulator. The w bits specify the offset register Wb. The r bits encode the optional shift. The g bits select the source Address mode. The s bits specify the source register Ws. Note: Positive values of operand Slit4 represent an arithmetic shift right and negative values of operand Slit4 represent an arithmetic shift left. The contents of the source register are not affected by Slit4.
1 1
ADD W0, #2, A ; Add W0 right-shifted by 2 to ACCA
W0 ACCA SR
Before Instruction 8000 00 7000 0000 0000
W0 ACCA SR
After Instruction 8000 00 5000 0000 0000
DS70157C-page 5-12

Example 2:
ADD [W5++], A ; Add the effective value of W5 to ACCA ; Post-increment W5
W5 ACCA Data 2000 SR
Before Instruction 2000 00 0067 2345 5000 0000
W5 ACCA Data 2000 SR
After Instruction 2002 00 5067 2345 5000 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-13
ADDC
Add f to WREG with Carry ADDC{.B} f {,WREG}
f [0 ... 8191] (f) + (WREG) + (C) destination designated by D DC, N, OV, Z, C 1011 0100 1BDf ffff ffff ffff Add the contents of the default working register WREG, the contents of the file register and the Carry bit and place the result in the destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The WREG is set to working register W0. 3: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR. These instructions can only clear Z.
1 1
ADDC.B RAM100 ; Add WREG and C bit to RAM100 ; (Byte mode)
Before After Instruction Instruction WREG CC60 WREG CC60 RAM100 8006 RAM100 8067 SR 0001 (C=1) SR 0000 Example 2:
ADDC RAM200, WREG ; Add RAM200 and C bit to the WREG ; (Word mode)
Before After Instruction Instruction WREG 5600 WREG 8A01 RAM200 3400 RAM200 3400 SR 0001 (C=1) SR 000C (N, OV = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-14
ADDC
Add Literal to Wn with Carry ADDC{.B} #lit10, Wn
lit10 [0 ... 255] for byte operation lit10 [0 ... 1023] for word operation Wn [W0 ... W15] lit10 + (Wn) + (C) Wn DC, N, OV, Z, C 1011 0000 1Bkk kkkk kkkk dddd Add the 10-bit unsigned literal operand, the contents of the working register Wn and the Carry bit, and place the result back into the working register Wn. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The k bits specify the literal operand. The d bits select the address of the working register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: For byte operations, the literal must be specified as an unsigned value [0:255]. See Section 4.6 Using 10-bit Literal Operands for information on using 10-bit literal operands in Byte mode. 3: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR. These instructions can only clear Z.
1 1
ADDC.B #0xFF, W7 ; Add -1 and C bit to W7 (Byte mode)
Before Instruction W7 12C0 SR 0000 (C = 0)
After Instruction W7 12BF SR 0009 (N,C = 1)
Example 2:
ADDC
#0xFF, W1
; Add 255 and C bit to W1 (Word mode)
Before Instruction W1 12C0 SR 0001 (C = 1)
After Instruction W1 13C0 SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-15
ADDC
Syntax: {label:}
Add Wb to Short Literal with Carry ADDC{.B} Wb, #lit5, Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Operands:
Wb [W0 ... W15] lit5 [0 ... 31] Wd [W0 ... W15] (Wb) + lit5 + (C) Wd DC, N, OV, Z, C 0100 1www wBqq qddd d11k kkkk Add the contents of the base register Wb, the 5-bit unsigned short literal operand and the Carry bit, and place the result in the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Wd. The w bits select the address of the base register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The k bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR. These instructions can only clear Z.
1 1
ADDC.B W0, #0x1F, [W7] ; Add W0, 31 and C bit (Byte mode) ; Store the result in [W7]
Before Instruction W0 CC80 W7 12C0 Data 12C0 B000 SR 0000 (C = 0) Example 2:

ADDC
After Instruction W0 CC80 W7 12C0 Data 12C0 B09F SR 0008 (N = 1)
W3, #0x6, [--W4] ; Add W3, 6 and C bit (Word mode) ; Store the result in [--W4]
Before Instruction W3 6006 W4 1000 Data 0FFE DDEE Data 1000 DDEE SR 0001 (C = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-16
W3 W4 Data 0FFE Data 1000 SR
After Instruction 6006 0FFE 600D DDEE 0000

ADDC
Syntax: {label:}
Add Wb to Ws with Carry ADDC{.B} Wb, Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Operands:
Wb [W0 ... W15] Ws [W0 ... W15] Wd [W0 ... W15] (Wb) + (Ws) + (C) Wd DC, N, OV, Z, C 0100 1www wBqq qddd dppp ssss Add the contents of the source register Ws, the contents of the base register Wb and the Carry bit, and place the result in the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd. The w bits select the address of the base register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR. These instructions can only clear Z.
1 1
ADDC.B W0,[W1++],[W2++] ; Add W0, [W1] and C bit (Byte mode) ; Store the result in [W2] ; Post-increment W1, W2
Before After Instruction Instruction W0 CC20 W0 CC20 W1 0800 W1 0801 W2 1000 W2 1001 Data 0800 AB25 Data 0800 AB25 Data 1000 FFFF Data 1000 FF46 SR 0001 (C = 1) SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-17

Example 2:
ADDC W3,[W2++],[W1++] ; Add W3, [W2] and C bit (Word mode) ; Store the result in [W1] ; Post-increment W1, W2
Before After Instruction Instruction W1 1000 W1 1002 W2 2000 W2 2002 W3 0180 W3 0180 Data 1000 8000 Data 1000 2681 Data 2000 2500 Data 2000 2500 SR 0001 (C = 1) SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-18
AND
AND f and WREG AND{.B} f {,WREG}
f [0 ... 8191] (f).AND.(WREG) destination designated by D N, Z 1011 0110 0BDf ffff ffff ffff Compute the logical AND operation of the contents of the default working register WREG and the contents of the file register, and place the result in the destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
1 1
AND.B RAM100 ; AND WREG to RAM100 (Byte mode)
Before Instruction WREG CC80 RAM100 FFC0 SR 0000 Example 2:

AND
After Instruction WREG CC80 RAM100 FF80 SR 0008 (N = 1)

; AND RAM200 to WREG (Word mode)
RAM200, WREG
Before Instruction WREG CC80 RAM200 12C0 SR 0000
After Instruction WREG 0080 RAM200 12C0 SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-19
AND
AND Literal and Wd AND{.B} #lit10, Wn
lit10 [0 ... 255] for byte operation lit10 [0 ... 1023] for word operation Wn [W0 ... W15] lit10.AND.(Wn) Wn N, Z 1011 0010 0Bkk kkkk kkkk dddd Compute the logical AND operation of the 10-bit literal operand and the contents of the working register Wn and place the result back into the working register Wn. Register direct addressing must be used for Wn. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The k bits specify the literal operand. The d bits select the address of the working register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: For byte operations, the literal must be specified as an unsigned value [0:255]. See Section 4.6 Using 10-bit Literal Operands for information on using 10-bit literal operands in Byte mode.
1 1
AND.B #0x83, W7 ; AND 0x83 to W7 (Byte mode)
Before Instruction W7 12C0 SR 0000 Example 2:

AND #0x333, W1
After Instruction W7 1280 SR 0008 (N = 1)

; AND 0x333 to W1 (Word mode)
Before Instruction W1 12D0 SR 0000
After Instruction W1 0210 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-20
AND
Syntax: {label:}
AND Wb and Short Literal AND{.B} Wb, #lit5, Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Operands:
Wb [W0 ... W15] lit5 [0 ... 31] Wd [W0 ... W15] (Wb).AND.lit5 Wd N, Z 0110 0www wBqq qddd d11k kkkk Compute the logical AND operation of the contents of the base register Wb and the 5-bit literal and place the result in the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Wd. The w bits select the address of the base register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The k bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
1 1
AND.B W0,#0x3,[W1++] ; AND W0 and 0x3 (Byte mode) ; Store to [W1] ; Post-increment W1
Before Instruction W0 23A5 W1 2211 Data 2210 9999 SR 0000 Example 2:

AND
After Instruction W0 23A5 W1 2212 Data 2210 0199 SR 0000

; AND W0 and 0x1F (Word mode) ; Store to W1
W0,#0x1F,W1
5
Before Instruction W0 6723 W1 7878 SR 0000
After Instruction W0 6723 W1 0003 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-21
AND
Syntax: {label:}
And Wb and Ws AND{.B} Wb, Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Operands:
Wb [W0 ... W15] Ws [W0 ... W15] Wd [W0 ... W15] (Wb).AND.(Ws) Wd N, Z 0110 0www wBqq qddd dppp ssss Compute the logical AND operation of the contents of the source register Ws and the contents of the base register Wb, and place the result in the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd. The w bits select the address of the base register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
1 1
AND.B W0, W1 [W2++] ; AND W0 and W1, and ; store to [W2] (Byte mode) ; Post-increment W2
Before Instruction W0 AA55 W1 2211 W2 1001 Data 1000 FFFF SR 0000
After Instruction W0 AA55 W1 2211 W2 1002 Data 1000 11FF SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-22

Example 2:
AND W0, [W1++], W2 ; AND W0 and [W1], and ; store to W2 (Word mode) ; Post-increment W1
Before Instruction W0 AA55 W1 1000 W2 55AA Data 1000 2634 SR 0000
After Instruction W0 AA55 W1 1002 W2 2214 Data 1000 2634 SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-23
ASR
Syntax: Operands: Operation: {label:}
Arithmetic Shift Right f ASR{.B} f {,WREG}
f [0 ... 8191] For byte operation: (f<7>) Dest<7> (f<7>) Dest<6> (f<6:1>) Dest<5:0> (f<0>) C For word operation: (f<15>) Dest<15> (f<15>) Dest<14> (f<14:1>) Dest<13:0> (f<0>) C
C
N, Z, C 1101 0101 1BDf ffff ffff ffff Shift the contents of the file register one bit to the right and place the result in the destination register. The Least Significant bit of the file register is shifted into the Carry bit of the STATUS Register. After the shift is performed, the result is sign-extended. The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
1 1
ASR.B RAM400, WREG ; ASR RAM400 and store to WREG ; (Byte mode)
Before Instruction WREG 0600 RAM400 0823 SR 0000 Example 2:

ASR RAM200
After Instruction WREG 0611 RAM400 0823 SR 0001 (C = 1)

; ASR RAM200 (Word mode)
Before Instruction RAM200 8009 SR 0000
After Instruction RAM200 C004 SR 0009 (N, C = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-24
ASR
Syntax: {label:}
Arithmetic Shift Right Ws ASR{.B} Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Operands: Operation:
Ws [W0 ... W15] Wd [W0 ... W15] For byte operation: (Ws<7>) Wd<7> (Ws<7>) Wd<6> (Ws<6:1>) Wd<5:0> (Ws<0>) C For word operation: (Ws<15>) Wd<15> (Ws<15>) Wd<14> (Ws<14:1>) Wd<13:0> (Ws<0>) C
C
N, Z, C 1101 0001 1Bqq qddd dppp ssss Shift the contents of the source register Ws one bit to the right and place the result in the destination register Wd. The Least Significant bit of Ws is shifted into the Carry bit of the STATUS register. After the shift is performed, the result is sign-extended. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
Words: Cycles:
1 1
5
DS70157C-page 5-25

Example 1:
ASR.B [W0++], [W1++] ; ASR [W0] and store to [W1] (Byte mode) ; Post-increment W0 and W1
Before Instruction W0 0600 W1 0801 Data 600 2366 Data 800 FFC0 SR 0000
After Instruction W0 0601 W1 0802 Data 600 2366 Data 800 33C0 SR 0000
Example 2:
ASR
W12, W13
; ASR W12 and store to W13 (Word mode)
Before Instruction W12 AB01 W13 0322 SR 0000
After Instruction W12 AB01 W13 D580 SR 0009 (N, C = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-26
ASR
Arithmetic Shift Right by Short Literal ASR Wb, #lit4, Wnd
Wb [W0 ... W15] lit4 [0...15] Wnd [W0 ... W15] lit4<3:0> Shift_Val Wb<15> Wnd<15:15-Shift_Val + 1> Wb<15:Shift_Val> Wnd<15-Shift_Val:0> N, Z 1101 1110 1www wddd d100 kkkk Arithmetic shift right the contents of the source register Wb by the 4-bit unsigned literal, and store the result in the destination register Wnd. After the shift is performed, the result is sign-extended. Direct addressing must be used for Wb and Wnd. The w bits select the address of the base register. The d bits select the destination register. The k bits provide the literal operand. Note: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
Operation:

ASR
1 1
W0, #0x4, W1 ; ASR W0 by 4 and store to W1
Before Instruction W0 060F W1 1234 SR 0000 Example 2:

ASR W0, #0x6, W1
After Instruction W0 060F W1 0060 SR 0000

; ASR W0 by 6 and store to W1
Before Instruction W0 80FF W1 0060 SR 0000 Example 3:

ASR W0, #0xF, W1
After Instruction W0 80FF W1 FE03 SR 0008 (N = 1)

; ASR W0 by 15 and store to W1
Before Instruction W0 70FF W1 CC26 SR 0000
After Instruction W0 70FF W1 0000 SR 0002 (Z = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-27
ASR
Arithmetic Shift Right by Wns ASR Wb, Wns, Wnd
Wb [W0 ... W15] Wns [W0 ...W15] Wnd [W0 ... W15] Wns<3:0> Shift_Val Wb<15> Wnd<15:15-Shift_Val + 1> Wb<15:Shift_Val> Wnd<15-Shift_Val:0> N, Z 1101 1110 1www wddd d000 ssss Arithmetic shift right the contents of the source register Wb by the 4 Least Significant bits of Wns (up to 15 positions) and store the result in the destination register Wnd. After the shift is performed, the result is sign-extended. Direct addressing must be used for Wb, Wns and Wnd. The w bits select the address of the base register. The d bits select the destination register. The s bits select the source register. Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only. 2: If Wns is greater than 15, Wnd = 0x0 if Wb is positive, and Wnd = 0xFFFF if Wb is negative.
Operation:
1 1
ASR W0, W5, W6 ; ASR W0 by W5 and store to W6
Before Instruction W0 80FF W5 0004 W6 2633 SR 0000 Example 2:

ASR W0, W5, W6
After Instruction W0 80FF W5 0004 W6 F80F SR 0000

; ASR W0 by W5 and store to W6
Before Instruction W0 6688 W5 000A W6 FF00 SR 0000 Example 3:

ASR W11, W12, W13
After Instruction W0 6688 W5 000A W6 0019 SR 0000

; ASR W11 by W12 and store to W13
Before Instruction W11 8765 W12 88E4 W13 A5A5 SR 0000
After Instruction W11 8765 W12 88E4 W13 F876 SR 0008 (N = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-28
BCLR
Bit Clear f BCLR{.B} f, #bit4
f [0 ... 8191] for byte operation f [0 ... 8190] (even only) for word operation bit4 [0 ... 7] for byte operation bit4 [0 ... 15] for byte operation 0 f<bit4> None 1010 1001 bbbf ffff ffff fffb Clear the bit in the file register f specified by bit4. Bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 7 for byte operations, bit 15 for word operations). The b bits select value bit4 of the bit position to be cleared. The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: When this instruction operates in Word mode, the file register address must be word-aligned. 3: When this instruction operates in Byte mode, bit4 must be between 0 and 7.
1 1
BCLR.B 0x800, #0x7 ; Clear bit 7 in 0x800
Before Instruction Data 0800 66EF SR 0000 Example 2:

BCLR
After Instruction Data 0800 666F SR 0000

; Clear bit 9 in 0x400
0x400, #0x9
Before Instruction Data 0400 AA55 SR 0000
After Instruction Data 0400 A855 SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-29
BCLR
Syntax: {label:}
Bit Clear in Ws BCLR{.B} Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], #bit4
Operands:
Ws [W0 ... W15] bit4 [0 ... 7] for byte operation bit4 [0 ... 15] for word operation 0 Ws<bit4> None 1010 0001 bbbb 0B00 0ppp ssss Clear the bit in register Ws specified by bit4. Bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 7 for byte operations, bit 15 for word operations). Register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws. The b bits select value bit4 of the bit position to be cleared. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The s bits select the source/destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: When this instruction operates in Word mode, the source register address must be word-aligned. 3: When this instruction operates in Byte mode, bit4 must be between 0 and 7.
1 1
BCLR.B W2, #0x2 ; Clear bit 3 in W2
Before Instruction W2 F234 SR 0000 Example 2:

BCLR [W0++], #0x0
After Instruction W2 F230 SR 0000

; Clear bit 0 in [W0] ; Post-increment W0
Before Instruction W0 2300 Data 2300 5607 SR 0000
After Instruction W0 2302 Data 2300 5606 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-30
BRA
Branch Unconditionally BRA Expr
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression. Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767]. (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC NOP Instruction Register None 0011 0111 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn The program will branch unconditionally, relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or expression. After the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of program words offset from (PC + 2).
1 2
002000 HERE: 002002 002004 002006 002008 00200A THERE: 00200C BRA . . . . . . . . . . . . THERE . . . . . . ; Branch to THERE
PC SR Example 2:
Before Instruction 00 2000 0000

BRA . . . . . . . . . . . . THERE+0x2 . . . . . .
After Instruction PC 00 200A SR 0000

; Branch to THERE+0x2
002000 HERE: 002002 002004 002006 002008 00200A THERE: 00200C
PC SR Example 3:

BRA 0x1366 . . . . . .
After Instruction PC 00 200C SR 0000

; Branch to 0x1366
5
002000 HERE: 002002 002004
PC SR
After Instruction PC 00 1366 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-31
BRA
Computed Branch BRA Wn
Wn [W0 ... W15] (PC + 2) + (2 * Wn) PC NOP Instruction Register None 0000 0001 0110 0000 0000 ssss The program branches unconditionally, relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the sign-extended 17-bit value (2 * Wn), which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. After this instruction executes, the new PC will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Wn, since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The s bits select the source register. 1 2
002000 HERE: 002002 ... ... 002108 00210A TABLE7: 00210C BRA . . . . . . . . . . . . W7 . . . . . . ; Branch forward (2+2*W7)
PC W7 SR
Before Instruction 00 2000 0084 0000
After Instruction PC 00 210A W7 0084 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-32
BRA C
Branch if Carry BRA C, Expr
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression. Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767]. Condition = C If (Condition) (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC NOP Instruction Register None 0011 0001 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn If the Carry flag bit is 1, then the program will branch relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or expression. If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second cycle. The n bits are a 16-bit signed literal that specify the offset from (PC + 2) in instruction words.
1 1 (2 if branch taken)
002000 002002 002004 002006 002008 00200A 00200C 00200E HERE: NO_C: BRA C, CARRY . . . . . . GOTO THERE . . . . . . . . . . . . ; If C is set, branch to CARRY ; Otherwise... continue
CARRY: THERE:
PC SR
Before Instruction 00 2000 0001 (C = 1)
PC SR
After Instruction 00 2008 0001 (C = 1)
Example 2:
002000 002002 002004 002006 002008 00200A 00200C 00200E
HERE: NO_C:
CARRY: THERE:
BRA C, CARRY ... ... GOTO THERE ... ... ... ...
; If C is set, branch to CARRY ; Otherwise... continue
5
After Instruction 00 2002 0000
PC SR
PC SR
DS70157C-page 5-33

Example 3:
006230 006232 006234 006236 006238 00623A 00623C 00623E HERE: NO_C: BRA C, CARRY ... ... GOTO THERE ... ... ... ... ; If C is set, branch to CARRY ; Otherwise... continue
CARRY: THERE:
PC SR Example 4:
PC SR
006230 START: 006232 006234 CARRY: 006236 006238 00623A 00623C HERE: 00623E
... ... ... ... ... ... BRA C, CARRY ...
; If C is set, branch to CARRY ; Otherwise... continue
PC SR
Before Instruction 00 623C 0001 (C = 1)
PC SR
DS70157C-page 5-34
BRA GE
Branch if Signed Greater Than or Equal BRA GE, Expr
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression. Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767]. Condition = (N&&OV)||(!N&&!OV) If (Condition) (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC NOP Instruction Register None 0011 1101 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn If the logical expression (N&&OV)||(!N&&!OV) is true, then the program will branch relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or expression. If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second cycle. The n bits are a 16-bit signed literal that specify the offset from (PC + 2) in instruction words. Note: The assembler will convert the specified label into the offset to be used.
Operation:
007600 LOOP: 007602 007604 007606 007608 HERE: 00760A NO_GE: . . . . . . . . BRA . . . . . . GE, LOOP .
; If GE, branch to LOOP ; Otherwise... continue
PC SR Example 2:

. . . . . . . . BRA . . . . . . GE, LOOP .
007600 LOOP: 007602 007604 007606 007608 HERE: 00760A NO_GE:
; If GE, branch to LOOP ; Otherwise... continue
5
PC SR
Before Instruction 00 7608 0008 (N = 1)
After Instruction PC 00 760A SR 0008 (N = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-35
BRA GEU
Branch if Unsigned Greater Than or Equal BRA GEU, Expr
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression. Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16 offset that supports an offset range of [-32768 ... +32767] program words. Condition = C If (Condition) (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC NOP Instruction Register None 0011 0001 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn If the Carry flag is 1, then the program will branch relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or expression. If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second cycle. The n bits are a 16-bit signed literal that specify the offset from (PC + 2) in instruction words. Note: This instruction is identical to the BRA C, Expr (Branch if Carry) instruction and has the same encoding. It will reverse assemble as BRA C, Slit16.
Operation:
002000 HERE: 002002 NO_GEU: 002004 002006 002008 00200A 00200C BYPASS: 00200E BRA GEU, BYPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . GOTO THERE . . . . . . ; If C is set, branch ; to BYPASS ; Otherwise... continue
PC SR
PC SR
After Instruction 00 200C 0001 (C = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-36
BRA GT
Branch if Signed Greater Than BRA GT, Expr
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression. Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767]. Condition = (!Z&&N&&OV)||(!Z&&!N&&!OV) If (Condition) (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC NOP Instruction Register None 0011 1100 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn If the logical expression (!Z&&N&&OV)||(!Z&&!N&&!OV) is true, then the program will branch relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or expression. If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second cycle. The n bits are a 16-bit signed literal that specify the offset from (PC + 2) in instruction words.
Operation:
002000 HERE: 002002 NO_GT: 002004 002006 002008 00200A 00200C BYPASS: 00200E BRA GT, BYPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . GOTO THERE . . . . . . ; If GT, branch to BYPASS ; Otherwise... continue
PC SR
PC SR
5
DS70157C-page 5-37
BRA GTU
Branch if Unsigned Greater Than BRA GTU, Expr
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression. Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767]. Condition = (C&&!Z) If (Condition) (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC NOP Instruction Register None 0011 1110 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn If the logical expression (C&&!Z) is true, then the program will branch relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or expression. If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second cycle. The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions offset from (PC + 2).
Operation:
002000 HERE: 002002 NO_GTU: 002004 002006 002008 00200A 00200C BYPASS: 00200E BRA GTU, BYPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . GOTO THERE . . . . . . ; If GTU, branch to BYPASS ; Otherwise... continue
PC SR
PC SR
DS70157C-page 5-38
BRA LE
Branch if Signed Less Than or Equal BRA LE, Expr
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression. Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767]. Condition = Z||(N&&!OV)||(!N&&OV) If (Condition) (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC NOP Instruction Register None 0011 0100 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn If the logical expression (Z||(N&&!OV)||(!N&&OV)) is true, then the program will branch relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or expression. If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second cycle. The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions offset from (PC + 2).
Operation:
002000 HERE: 002002 NO_LE: 002004 002006 002008 00200A 00200C BYPASS: 00200E BRA LE, BYPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . GOTO THERE . . . . . . ; If LE, branch to BYPASS ; Otherwise... continue
PC SR
PC SR
5
DS70157C-page 5-39
BRA LEU
Branch if Unsigned Less Than or Equal BRA LEU, Expr
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression. Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767]. Condition = !C||Z If (Condition) (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC NOP Instruction Register None 0011 0110 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn If the logical expression (!C||Z) is true, then the program will branch relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or expression. If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second cycle. The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions offset from (PC + 2).
Operation:
002000 HERE: 002002 NO_LEU: 002004 002006 002008 00200A 00200C BYPASS: 00200E BRA LEU, BYPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . GOTO THERE . . . . . . ; If LEU, branch to BYPASS ; Otherwise... continue
PC SR
PC SR
DS70157C-page 5-40
BRA LT
Branch if Signed Less Than BRA LT, Expr
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression. Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767]. Condition = (N&&!OV)||(!N&&OV) If (Condition) (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC NOP Instruction Register None 0011 0101 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn If the logical expression ( (N&&!OV)||(!N&&OV) ) is true, then the program will branch relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or expression. If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second cycle. The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions offset from (PC + 2).
Operation:
002000 HERE: 002002 NO_LT: 002004 002006 002008 00200A 00200C BYPASS: 00200E BRA LT, BYPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . GOTO THERE . . . . . . ; If LT, branch to BYPASS ; Otherwise... continue
PC SR
After Instruction PC 00 2002 SR 0001 (C = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-41
BRA LTU
Branch if Unsigned Less Than BRA LTU, Expr
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression. Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767]. Condition = !C If (Condition) (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC NOP Instruction Register None 0011 1001 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn If the Carry flag is 0, then the program will branch relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or expression. If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second cycle. The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions offset from (PC + 2). Note: This instruction is identical to the BRA NC, Expr (Branch if Not Carry) instruction and has the same encoding. It will reverse assemble as BRA NC, Slit16.
Operation:
002000 HERE: 002002 NO_LTU: 002004 002006 002008 00200A 00200C BYPASS: 00200E BRA LTU, BYPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . GOTO THERE . . . . . . ; If LTU, branch to BYPASS ; Otherwise... continue
PC SR
PC SR
DS70157C-page 5-42
BRA N
Branch if Negative BRA N, Expr
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression. Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767]. Condition = N If (Condition) (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC NOP Instruction Register. None 0011 0011 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn If the Negative flag is 1, then the program will branch relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or expression. If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second cycle. The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions offset from (PC + 2).
Operation:
002000 HERE: 002002 NO_N: 002004 002006 002008 00200A 00200C BYPASS: 00200E BRA N, BYPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . GOTO THERE . . . . . . ; If N, branch to BYPASS ; Otherwise... continue
PC SR
PC SR
After Instruction 00 200C 0008 (N = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-43
BRA NC
Branch if Not Carry BRA NC, Expr
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression. Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767]. Condition = !C If (Condition) (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC NOP Instruction Register None 0011 1001 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn If the Carry flag is 0, then the program will branch relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or expression. If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second cycle. The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions offset from (PC + 2).
Operation:
002000 HERE: 002002 NO_NC: 002004 002006 002008 00200A 00200C BYPASS: 00200E BRA NC, BYPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . GOTO THERE . . . . . . ; If NC, branch to BYPASS ; Otherwise... continue
PC SR
PC SR
DS70157C-page 5-44
BRA NN
Branch if Not Negative BRA NN, Expr
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression. Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767]. Condition = !N If (Condition) (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC NOP Instruction Register None 0011 1011 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn If the Negative flag is 0, then the program will branch relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or expression. If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second cycle. The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions offset from (PC + 2).
Operation:
002000 HERE: 002002 NO_NN: 002004 002006 002008 00200A 00200C BYPASS: 00200E BRA NN, BYPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . GOTO THERE . . . . . . ; If NN, branch to BYPASS ; Otherwise... continue
PC SR
PC SR
After Instruction 00 200C 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-45
BRA NOV
Branch if Not Overflow BRA NOV, Expr
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression. Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767]. Condition = !OV If (Condition) (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC NOP Instruction Register None 0011 1000 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn If the Overflow flag is 0, then the program will branch relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or expression. If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second cycle. The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions offset from (PC + 2).
Operation:
002000 HERE: 002002 NO_NOV: 002004 002006 002008 00200A 00200C BYPASS: 00200E BRA NOV, BYPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . GOTO THERE . . . . . . ; If NOV, branch to BYPASS ; Otherwise... continue
PC SR
PC SR
After Instruction 00 200C 0008 (N = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-46
BRA NZ
Branch if Not Zero BRA NZ, Expr
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression. Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767]. Condition = !Z If (Condition) (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC NOP Instruction Register None 0011 1010 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn If the Z flag is 0, then the program will branch relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or expression. If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second cycle. The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions offset from (PC + 2).
Operation:
002000 HERE: 002002 NO_NZ: 002004 002006 002008 00200A 00200C BYPASS: 00200E BRA NZ, BYPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . GOTO THERE . . . . . . ; If NZ, branch to BYPASS ; Otherwise... continue
PC SR
Before Instruction 00 2000 0002 (Z = 1)
PC SR
After Instruction 00 2002 0002 (Z = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-47
BRA OA
Branch if Overflow Accumulator A BRA OA, Expr
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression. Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767]. Condition = OA If (Condition) (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC NOP Instruction Register None 0000 1100 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn If the Overflow Accumulator A flag is 1, then the program will branch relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or expression. If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second cycle. The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions offset from (PC + 2). Note: The assembler will convert the specified label into the offset to be used.
Operation:
002000 HERE: 002002 NO_OA: 002004 002006 002008 00200A 00200C BYPASS: 00200E BRA OA, BYPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . GOTO THERE . . . . . . ; If OA, branch to BYPASS ; Otherwise... continue
PC SR
Before Instruction 00 2000 PC 8800 (OA, OAB = 1) SR
After Instruction 00 200C 8800 (OA, OAB = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-48
BRA OB
Branch if Overflow Accumulator B BRA OB, Expr
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression. Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767]. Condition = OB If (Condition) (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC NOP Instruction Register None 0000 1101 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn If the Overflow Accumulator B flag is 1, then the program will branch relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or expression. If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second cycle. The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions offset from (PC + 2).
Operation:
002000 HERE: 002002 NO_OB: 002004 002006 002008 00200A 00200C BYPASS: 00200E BRA OB, BYPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . GOTO THERE . . . . . . ; If OB, branch to BYPASS ; Otherwise... continue
PC SR
Before Instruction 00 2000 PC 8800 (OA, OAB = 1) SR
After Instruction 00 2002 8800 (OA, OAB = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-49
BRA OV
Branch if Overflow BRA OV, Expr
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression. Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767]. Condition = OV If (Condition) (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC NOP Instruction Register None 0011 0000 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn If the Overflow flag is 1, then the program will branch relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or expression. If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second cycle. The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions offset from (PC + 2).
Operation:
002000 HERE: 002002 NO_OV 002004 002006 002008 00200A 00200C BYPASS: 00200E BRA OV, BYPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . GOTO THERE . . . . . . ; If OV, branch to BYPASS ; Otherwise... continue
PC SR
PC SR
After Instruction 00 2002 0002 (Z = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-50
BRA SA
Branch if Saturation Accumulator A BRA SA, Expr
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression. Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767]. Condition = SA If (Condition) (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC NOP Instruction Register None 0000 1110 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn If the Saturation Accumulator A flag is 1, then the program will branch relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or expression. If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second cycle. The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions offset from (PC + 2).
Operation:
002000 HERE: 002002 NO_SA: 002004 002006 002008 00200A 00200C BYPASS: 00200E BRA SA, BYPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . GOTO THERE . . . . . . ; If SA, branch to BYPASS ; Otherwise... continue
PC SR
Before Instruction 00 2000 PC 2400 (SA, SAB = 1) SR
After Instruction 00 200C 2400 (SA, SAB = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-51
BRA SB
Branch if Saturation Accumulator B BRA SB, Expr
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression. Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767]. Condition = SB if (Condition) (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC NOP Instruction Register None 0000 1111 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn If the Saturation Accumulator B flag is 1, then the program will branch relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or expression. If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second cycle. The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions offset from (PC + 2).
Operation:
002000 HERE: 002002 NO_SB: 002004 002006 002008 00200A 00200C BYPASS: 00200E BRA SB, BYPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . GOTO THERE . . . . . . ; If SB, branch to BYPASS ; Otherwise... continue
PC SR
PC SR
DS70157C-page 5-52
BRA Z
Branch if Zero BRA Z, Expr
Operation:
Expr may be a label, absolute address or expression. Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767]. Condition = Z if (Condition) (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16 PC NOP Instruction Register None 0011 0010 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn If the Zero flag is 1, then the program will branch relative to the next PC. The offset of the branch is the twos complement number 2 * Slit16, which supports branches up to 32K instructions forward or backward. The Slit16 value is resolved by the linker from the supplied label, absolute address or expression. If the branch is taken, the new address will be (PC + 2) + 2 * Slit16, since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction. The instruction then becomes a two-cycle instruction, with a NOP executed in the second cycle. The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions offset from (PC + 2). 1 1 (2 if branch taken)
002000 HERE: 002002 NO_Z: 002004 002006 002008 00200A 00200C BYPASS: 00200E BRA Z, BYPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . GOTO THERE . . . . . . ; If Z, branch to BYPASS ; Otherwise... continue
PC SR
PC SR
After Instruction 00 200C 0002 (Z = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-53
BSET
Bit Set f BSET{.B} f, #bit4
f [0 ... 8191] for byte operation f [0 ... 8190] (even only) for word operation bit4 [0 ... 7] for byte operation bit4 [0 ... 15] for word operation 1 f<bit4> None 1010 1000 bbbf ffff ffff fffb Set the bit in the file register f specified by bit4. Bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 7 for byte operations, bit 15 for word operations). The b bits select value bit4 of the bit position to be set. The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: When this instruction operates in Word mode, the file register address must be word-aligned. 3: When this instruction operates in Byte mode, bit4 must be between 0 and 7.
1 1
BSET.B 0x601, #0x3 ; Set bit 3 in 0x601
Before Instruction Data 0600 F234 SR 0000 Example 2:

BSET
After Instruction Data 0600 FA34 SR 0000

; Set bit 15 in 0x444
0x444, #0xF
Before Instruction Data 0444 5604 SR 0000
After Instruction Data 0444 D604 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-54
BSET
Syntax: {label:}
Bit Set in Ws BSET{.B} Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], #bit4
Operands:
Ws [W0 ... W15] bit4 [0 ... 7] for byte operation bit4 [0 ... 15] for word operation 1 Ws<bit4> None 1010 0000 bbbb 0B00 0ppp ssss Set the bit in register Ws specified by bit4. Bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 7 for byte operations, bit 15 for word operations). Register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws. The b bits select value bit4 of the bit position to be cleared. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source/destination register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: When this instruction operates in Word mode, the source register address must be word-aligned. 3: When this instruction operates in Byte mode, bit4 must be between 0 and 7.
1 1
BSET.B W3, #0x7 ; Set bit 7 in W3
Before Instruction W3 0026 SR 0000 Example 2:

BSET [W4++], #0x0
After Instruction W3 00A6 SR 0000

; Set bit 0 in [W4] ; Post-increment W4
5
DS70157C-page 5-55
BSW
Syntax: {label:}
Bit Write in Ws BSW.C BSW.Z Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wb
Ws [W0 ... W15] Wb [W0 ... W15] For .C operation: C Ws<(Wb)> For .Z operation (default): Z Ws<(Wb)> None 1010 1101 Zwww w000 0ppp ssss The (Wb) bit in register Ws is written with the value of the C or Z flag from the STATUS register. Bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 15) of the working register. Only the four Least Significant bits of Wb are used to determine the destination bit number. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb, and either register direct, or indirect addressing may be used for Ws. The Z bit selects the C or Z flag as source. The w bits select the address of the bit select register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: This instruction only operates in Word mode. If no extension is provided, the .Z operation is assumed.
1 1
BSW.C W2, W3 ; Set bit W3 in W2 to the value ; of the C bit
Before After Instruction Instruction W2 F234 W2 7234 W3 111F W3 111F SR 0002 (Z = 1, C = 0) SR 0002 (Z = 1, C = 0)
Example 2:
BSW.Z
W2, W3
; Set bit W3 in W2 to the complement ; of the Z bit
Before After Instruction Instruction W2 E235 W2 E234 W3 0550 W3 0550 SR 0002 (Z = 1, C = 0) SR 0002 (Z = 1, C = 0)
DS70157C-page 5-56

Example 3:
BSW.C [++W0], W6 ; Set bit W6 in [W0++] to the value ; of the C bit
Before After Instruction Instruction W0 1000 W0 1002 W6 34A3 W6 34A3 Data 1002 2380 Data 1002 2388 SR 0001 (Z = 0, C = 1) SR 0001 (Z = 0, C = 1) Example 4:
BSW [W1--], W5 ; Set bit W5 in [W1] to the ; complement of the Z bit ; Post-decrement W1
Before After Instruction Instruction W1 1000 W1 0FFE W5 888B W5 888B Data 1000 C4DD Data 1000 CCDD SR 0001 (C = 1) SR 0001 (C = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-57
BTG
Bit Toggle f BTG{.B} f, #bit4
f [0 ... 8191] for byte operation f [0 ... 8190] (even only) for word operation bit4 [0 ... 7] for byte operation bit4 [0 ... 15] for word operation (f)<bit4> (f)<bit4> None 1010 1010 bbbf ffff ffff fffb Bit bit4 in file register f is toggled (complemented). For the bit4 operand, bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 7 for byte operation, bit 15 for word operation) of the byte. The b bits select value bit4, the bit position to toggle. The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: When this instruction operates in Word mode, the file register address must be word-aligned. 3: When this instruction operates in Byte mode, bit4 must be between 0 and 7.
1 1
BTG.B 0x1001, #0x4 ; Toggle bit 4 in 0x1001
Before Instruction Data 1000 F234 SR 0000 Example 2:

BTG
After Instruction Data 1000 E234 SR 0000

; Toggle bit 8 in RAM660
0x1660, #0x8
After Instruction Data 1660 5706 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-58
BTG
Syntax: {label:}
Bit Toggle in Ws BTG{.B} Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], #bit4
Operands:
Ws [W0 ... W15] bit4 [0 ... 7] for byte operation bit4 [0 ... 15] for word operation (Ws)<bit4> Ws<bit4> None 1010 0010 bbbb 0B00 0ppp ssss Bit bit4 in register Ws is toggled (complemented). For the bit4 operand, bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 7 for byte operations, bit 15 for word operations). Register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws. The b bits select value bit4, the bit position to test. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The s bits select the source/destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: When this instruction operates in Word mode, the source register address must be word-aligned. 3: When this instruction operates in Byte mode, bit4 must be between 0 and 7.

BTG
1 1
W2, #0x0 ; Toggle bit 0 in W2
Before Instruction W2 F234 SR 0000 Example 2:

BTG [W0++], #0x0
After Instruction W2 F235 SR 0000

; Toggle bit 0 in [W0] ; Post-increment W0
5
DS70157C-page 5-59
BTSC
Bit Test f, Skip if Clear BTSC{.B} f, #bit4
f [0 ... 8191] for byte operation f [0 ... 8190] (even only) for word operation bit4 [0 ... 7] for byte operation bit4 [0 ... 15] for word operation Test (f)<bit4>, skip if clear None 1010 1111 bbbf ffff ffff fffb Bit bit4 in the file register is tested. If the tested bit is 0, the next instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is discarded and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. If the tested bit is 1, the next instruction is executed as normal. In either case, the contents of the file register are not changed. For the bit4 operand, bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 7 for byte operations, bit 15 for word operations). The b bits select value bit4, the bit position to test. The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: When this instruction operates in Word mode, the file register address must be word-aligned. 3: When this instruction operates in Byte mode, bit4 must be between 0 and 7.
1 1 (2 or 3)
002000 HERE: 002002 002004 002006 002008 BYPASS: 00200A BTSC.B GOTO . . . . . . . . . . . . 0x1201, #2 ; If bit 2 of 0x1201 is 0, ; skip the GOTO BYPASS
PC Data 1200 SR
Before Instruction 00 2000 264F 0000
After Instruction PC 00 2002 Data 1200 264F SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-60

Example 2:
002000 HERE: 002002 002004 002006 002008 BYPASS: 00200A BTSC GOTO . . . . . . . . . . . . 0x804, #14 ; If bit 14 of 0x804 is 0, ; skip the GOTO BYPASS
PC Data 0804 SR
After Instruction PC 00 2004 Data 0804 2647 SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-61
BTSC
Syntax: {label:}
Bit Test Ws, Skip if Clear BTSC Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], #bit4
Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description:
Ws [W0 ... W15] bit4 [0 ... 15] Test (Ws)<bit4>, skip if clear None 1010 0111 bbbb 0000 0ppp ssss Bit bit4 in Ws is tested. If the tested bit is 0, the next instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is discarded and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. If the tested bit is 1, the next instruction is executed as normal. In either case, the contents of Ws are not changed. For the bit4 operand, bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 15) of the word. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws. The b bits select value bit4, the bit position to test. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
1 1 (2 or 3 if the next instruction is skipped)

002000 HERE: 002002 002004 002006 002008 BYPASS: 00200A BTSC GOTO . . . . . . . . . . . . W0, #0x0 BYPASS ; If bit 0 of W0 is 0, ; skip the GOTO
PC W0 SR
After Instruction PC 00 2002 W0 264F SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-62

Example 2:
002000 HERE: 002002 002004 002006 002008 BYPASS: 00200A BTSC GOTO . . . . . . . . . . . . W6, #0xF BYPASS ; If bit 15 of W6 is 0, ; skip the GOTO
PC W6 SR Example 3:

BTSC GOTO . . . . . . . . . . . .
PC W6 SR
After Instruction 00 2004 264F 0000

; If bit 12 of [W6] is 0, ; skip the GOTO ; Post-increment W6
003400 HERE: 003402 003404 003406 003408 BYPASS: 00340A
[W6++], #0xC BYPASS
PC W6 Data 1800 SR
PC W6 Data 1800 SR
5
DS70157C-page 5-63
BTSS
Bit Test f, Skip if Set BTSS{.B} f, #bit4
f [0 ... 8191] for byte operation f [0 ... 8190] (even only) for word operation bit4 [0 ... 7] for byte operation bit4 [0 ... 15] for word operation Test (f)<bit4>, skip if set None 1010 1110 bbbf ffff ffff fffb Bit bit4 in the file register f is tested. If the tested bit is 1, the next instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is discarded and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. If the tested bit is 0, the next instruction is executed as normal. In either case, the contents of the file register are not changed. For the bit4 operand, bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 7 for byte operation, bit 15 for word operation). The b bits select value bit4, the bit position to test. The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: When this instruction operates in Word mode, the file register address must be word-aligned. 3: When this instruction operates in Byte mode, bit4 must be between 0 and 7.

007100 HERE: 007102 007104 BTSS.B CLR . . . 0x1401, #0x1 ; If bit 1 of 0x1401 is 1, ; dont clear WREG WREG
PC Data 1400 SR Example 2:
PC Data 1400 SR
BTSS GOTO . . . . . .
After Instruction 00 7104 0280 0000
007100 HERE: 007102 007104 007106 BYPASS:
0x890, #0x9 ; If bit 9 of 0x890 is 1, ; skip the GOTO BYPASS
PC Data 0890 SR
Before Instruction 00 7100 00FE 0000
PC Data 0890 SR
After Instruction 00 7102 00FE 0000
DS70157C-page 5-64
BTSS
Syntax: {label:}
Bit Test Ws, Skip if Set BTSS Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], #bit4
Ws [W0 ... W15] bit4 [0 ... 15] Test (Ws)<bit4>, skip if set. None 1010 0110 bbbb 0000 0ppp ssss Bit bit4 in Ws is tested. If the tested bit is 1, the next instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is discarded and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. If the tested bit is 0, the next instruction is executed as normal. In either case, the contents of Ws are not changed. For the bit4 operand, bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 15) of the word. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws. The b bits select the value bit4, the bit position to test. The s bits select the source register. The p bits select the source Address mode. Note: This instruction operates in Word mode only.

002000 HERE: 002002 002004 002006 002008 BYPASS: 00200A BTSS GOTO . . . . . . . . . . . . W0, #0x0 BYPASS ; If bit 0 of W0 is 1, ; skip the GOTO
PC W0 SR
After Instruction PC 00 2004 W0 264F SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-65

Example 2:
002000 HERE: 002002 002004 002006 002008 BYPASS: 00200A BTSS GOTO . . . . . . . . . . . . W6, #0xF BYPASS ; If bit 15 of W6 is 1, ; skip the GOTO
PC W6 SR Example 3:

BTSS GOTO . . . . . . . . . . . .
PC W6 SR
After Instruction 00 2002 264F 0000

; If bit 12 of [W6] is 1, ; skip the GOTO ; Post-increment W6
003400 HERE: 003402 003404 003406 003408 BYPASS: 00340A
[W6++], 0xC BYPASS
PC W6 Data 1800 SR
PC W6 Data 1800 SR
DS70157C-page 5-66
BTST
Bit Test f BTST{.B} f, #bit4
f [0 ... 8191] for byte operation f [0 ... 8190] (even only) for word operation bit4 [0 ... 7] for byte operation bit4 [0 ... 15] for word operation (f)<bit4> Z Z 1010 1011 bbbf ffff ffff fffb Bit bit4 in file register f is tested and the complement of the tested bit is stored to the Z flag in the STATUS register. The contents of the file register are not changed. For the bit4 operand, bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 7 for byte operation, bit 15 for word operation). The b bits select value bit4, the bit position to be tested. The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: When this instruction operates in Word mode, the file register address must be word-aligned. 3: When this instruction operates in Byte mode, bit4 must be between 0 and 7.
1 1
BTST.B 0x1201, #0x3 ; Set Z = complement of ; bit 3 in 0x1201
Before Instruction Data 1200 F7FF SR 0000 Example 2:

BTST
After Instruction Data 1200 F7FF SR 0002 (Z = 1)

; Set Z = complement of ; bit 7 in 0x1302
0x1302, #0x7
Before After Instruction Instruction Data 1302 F7FF Data 1302 F7FF SR 0002 (Z = 1) SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-67
BTST
Syntax: {label:}
Bit Test in Ws BTST.C BTST.Z Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], #bit4
Ws [W0 ... W15] bit4 [0 ... 15] For .C operation: (Ws)<bit4> C For .Z operation (default): (Ws)<bit4> Z Z or C 1010 0011 bbbb Z000 0ppp ssss Bit bit4 in register Ws is tested. If the .Z option of the instruction is specified, the complement of the tested bit is stored to the Zero flag in the STATUS register. If the .C option of the instruction is specified, the value of the tested bit is stored to the Carry flag in the STATUS register. In either case, the contents of Ws are not changed. For the bit4 operand, bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 15) of the word. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws. The b bits select value bit4, the bit position to test. The Z bit selects the C or Z flag as destination. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: This instruction only operates in Word mode. If no extension is provided, the .Z operation is assumed.
1 1
BTST.C [W0++], #0x3 ; Set C = bit 3 in [W0] ; Post-increment W0
Before After Instruction Instruction W0 1200 W0 1202 Data 1200 FFF7 Data 1200 FFF7 SR 0001 (C = 1) SR 0000 Example 2:
BTST.Z W0, #0x7 ; Set Z = complement of bit 7 in W0
Before Instruction W0 F234 SR 0000
After Instruction W0 F234 SR 0002 (Z = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-68
BTST
Syntax: {label:}
Bit Test in Ws BTST.C BTST.Z Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wb
Ws [W0 ... W15] Wb [W0 ... W15] For .C operation: (Ws)<(Wb)> C For .Z operation (default): (Ws)<(Wb)> Z Z or C 1010 0101 Zwww w000 0ppp ssss The (Wb) bit in register Ws is tested. If the .C option of the instruction is specified, the value of the tested bit is stored to the Carry flag in the STATUS register. If the .Z option of the instruction is specified, the complement of the tested bit is stored to the Zero flag in the STATUS register. In either case, the contents of Ws are not changed. Only the four Least Significant bits of Wb are used to determine the bit number. Bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 15) of the working register. Register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws. The Z bit selects the C or Z flag as destination. The w bits select the address of the bit select register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: This instruction only operates in Word mode. If no extension is provided, the .Z operation is assumed.
1 1
BTST.C W2, W3 ; Set C = bit W3 of W2
Before Instruction W2 F234 W3 2368 SR 0001 (C = 1)
After Instruction W2 F234 W3 2368 SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-69

Example 2:
BTST.Z [W0++], W1 ; Set Z = complement of ; bit W1 in [W0], ; Post-increment W0
Before After Instruction Instruction W0 1200 W0 1202 W1 CCC0 W1 CCC0 Data 1200 6243 Data 1200 6243 SR 0002 (Z = 1) SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-70
BTSTS
Bit Test/Set f BTSTS{.B} f, #bit4
f [0 ... 8191] for byte operation f [0 ... 8190] (even only) for word operation bit4 [0 ... 7] for byte operation bit4 [0 ... 15] for word operation (f)<bit4> Z 1 (f)<bit4> Z 1010 1100 bbbf ffff ffff fffb Bit bit4 in file register f is tested and the complement of the tested bit is stored to the Zero flag in the STATUS register. The tested bit is then set to 1 in the file register. For the bit4 operand, bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit (bit 0) and advances to the Most Significant bit (bit 7 for byte operations, bit 15 for word operations). The b bits select value bit4, the bit position to test/set. The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: When this instruction operates in Word mode, the file register address must be word-aligned. 3: When this instruction operates in Byte mode, bit4 must be between 0 and 7.
1 1
BTSTS.B 0x1201, #0x3 ; Set Z = complement of bit 3 in 0x1201, ; then set bit 3 of 0x1201 = 1
Before Instruction Data 1200 F7FF SR 0000 Example 2:

BTSTS
After Instruction Data 1200 FFFF SR 0002 (Z = 1)

; Set Z = complement of bit 15 in 0x808, ; then set bit 15 of 0x808 = 1
0x808, #15
Before After Instruction Instruction RAM300 8050 RAM300 8050 SR 0002 (Z = 1) SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-71
BTSTS
Syntax: {label:}
Bit Test/Set in Ws BTSTS.C BTSTS.Z Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], #bit4
Ws [W0 ... W15] bit4 [0 ... 15] For .C operation: (Ws)<bit4> C 1 Ws<bit4> For .Z operation (default): (Ws)<bit4> Z 1 Ws<bit4> Z or C 1010 0100 bbbb Z000 0ppp ssss Bit bit4 in register Ws is tested. If the .Z option of the instruction is specified, the complement of the tested bit is stored to the Zero flag in the STATUS register. If the .C option of the instruction is specified, the value of the tested bit is stored to the Carry flag in the STATUS register. In both cases, the tested bit in Ws is set to 1. The b bits select the value bit4, the bit position to test/set. The Z bit selects the C or Z flag as destination. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: This instruction only operates in Word mode. If no extension is provided, the .Z operation is assumed.
1 1
BTSTS.C [W0++], #0x3 ; Set C = bit 3 in [W0] ; Set bit 3 in [W0] = 1 ; Post-increment W0
Before After Instruction Instruction W0 1200 W0 1202 Data 1200 FFF7 Data 1200 FFFF SR 0001 (C = 1) SR 0000 Example 2:
BTSTS.Z W0, #0x7 ; Set Z = complement of bit 7 ; in W0, and set bit 7 in W0 = 1
Before Instruction W0 F234 SR 0000
After Instruction W0 F2BC SR 0002 (Z = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-72
CALL
Call Subroutine CALL Expr
Status Affected: Encoding: 1st word 2nd word Description:
Expr may be a label or expression (but not a literal). Expr is resolved by the linker to a lit23, where lit23 [0 ... 8388606]. (PC) + 4 PC (PC<15:0>) (TOS) (W15) + 2 W15 (PC<23:16>) (TOS) (W15) + 2 W15 lit23 PC NOP Instruction Register None 0000 0010 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnn0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0nnn nnnn Direct subroutine call over the entire 4-Mbyte instruction program memory range. Before the CALL is made, the 24-bit return address (PC + 4) is PUSHed onto the stack. After the return address is stacked, the 23-bit value lit23 is loaded into the PC. The n bits form the target address. Note: The linker will resolve the specified expression into the lit23 to be used.
2 2
026000 026004 . . 026844 _FIR: 026846 CALL MOV ... ... MOV ... _FIR W0, W1 #0x400, W2 ; Call _FIR subroutine
; _FIR subroutine start
PC W15 Data A268 Data A26A SR Example 2:
Before Instruction 02 6000 A268 FFFF FFFF 0000

CALL MOV ... INC ...
PC W15 Data A268 Data A26A SR

_G66 W0, W1
After Instruction 02 6844 A26C 6004 0002 0000

; call routine _G66 ; routine start
072000 072004 . 077A28 _G66: 077A2A 077A2C
W6, [W7++]
PC W15 Data 9004 Data 9006 SR
Before Instruction 07 2000 9004 FFFF FFFF 0000
After Instruction 07 7A28 9008 2004 0007 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-73
CALL
Call Indirect Subroutine CALL Wn
Wn [W0 ... W15] (PC) + 2 PC (PC<15:0>) TOS (W15) + 2 W15 (PC<23:16>) TOS (W15) + 2 W15 0 PC<22:16> (Wn<15:1>) PC<15:1> NOP Instruction Register None 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 ssss Indirect subroutine call over the first 32K instructions of program memory. Before the CALL is made, the 24-bit return address (PC + 2) is PUSHed onto the stack. After the return address is stacked, Wn<15:1> is loaded into PC<15:1> and PC<22:16> is cleared. Since PC<0> is always 0, Wn<0> is ignored. The s bits select the source register. 1 2
001002 001004 . 001600 _BOOT: 001602 . CALL W0 ... ... MOV #0x400, W2 MOV #0x300, W6 ... ; Call BOOT subroutine indirectly ; using W0 ; _BOOT starts here
PC W0 W15 Data 6F00 Data 6F02 SR Example 2:
Before Instruction 00 1002 1600 6F00 FFFF FFFF 0000

CALL ... ... INC DEC ...
PC W0 W15 Data 6F00 Data 6F02 SR

W7 W1, W2 W1, W3
After Instruction 00 1600 1600 6F04 1004 0000 0000

; Call TEST subroutine indirectly ; using W7 ; _TEST starts here ;
004200 004202 . 005500 _TEST: 005502 .
Before Instruction 00 4200 5500 6F00 FFFF FFFF 0000
After Instruction 00 5500 5500 6F04 4202 0000 0000
DS70157C-page 5-74
CLR
Syntax: {label:}
Clear f or WREG CLR{.B} f WREG
f [0 ... 8191] 0 destination designated by D None 1110 1111 0BDf ffff ffff ffff Clear the contents of a file register or the default working register WREG. If WREG is specified, the WREG is cleared. Otherwise, the specified file register f is cleared. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
1 1
CLR.B RAM200 ; Clear RAM200 (Byte mode)
Before Instruction RAM200 8009 SR 0000 Example 2:

CLR WREG
After Instruction RAM200 8000 SR 0000

; Clear WREG (Word mode)
Before Instruction WREG 0600 SR 0000
After Instruction WREG 0000 SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-75
CLR
Syntax: {label:}
Clear Wd CLR{.B} Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Wd [W0 ... W15] 0 Wd None 1110 1011 0Bqq qddd d000 0000 Clear the contents of register Wd. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Wd. The B bit select byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
1 1
CLR.B W2 ; Clear W2 (Byte mode)

CLR [W0++]

; Clear [W0] ; Post-increment W0
DS70157C-page 5-76
CLR
Syntax: {label:} CLR
Clear Accumulator, Prefetch Operands Acc {,[Wx],Wxd} {,[Wy],Wyd} {,AWB}
{,[Wx] + = kx,Wxd} {,[Wy] + = ky,Wyd} {,[Wx] = kx,Wxd} {,[Wy] = ky,Wyd} {,[W9 + W12],Wxd} {,[W11 + W12],Wyd} Operands: Acc [A,B] Wx [W8, W9]; kx [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wxd [W4 ... W7] Wy [W10, W11]; ky [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wyd [W4 ... W7] AWB [W13, [W13] + = 2] 0 Acc(A or B) ([Wx]) Wxd; (Wx) +/ kx Wx ([Wy]) Wyd; (Wy) +/ ky Wy (Acc(B or A)) rounded AWB OA, OB, SA, SB 1100 0011 A0xx yyii iijj jjaa Clear all 40 bits of the specified accumulator, optionally prefetch operands in preparation for a MAC type instruction and optionally store the non-specified accumulator results. This instruction clears the respective overflow and saturate flags (either OA, SA or OB, SB). Operands Wx, Wxd, Wy and Wyd specify optional prefetch operations, which support indirect and register offset addressing, as described in Section 4.14.1 MAC Prefetches. Operand AWB specifies the optional register direct or indirect store of the convergently rounded contents of the other accumulator, as described in Section 4.14.4 MAC Write Back. The A bit selects the other accumulator used for write back. The x bits select the prefetch Wxd destination. The y bits select the prefetch Wyd destination. The i bits select the Wx prefetch operation. The j bits select the Wy prefetch operation. The a bits select the accumulator Write Back destination. Words: Cycles: Example 1:
CLR
Operation:
1 1
A, [W8]+=2, W4, W13 ; Clear ACCA ; Load W4 with [W8], post-inc W8 ; Store ACCB to W13
W4 W8 W13 ACCA ACCB Data 2000 SR
Before Instruction F001 2000 C623 00 0067 2345 00 5420 3BDD 1221 0000
W4 W8 W13 ACCA ACCB Data 2000 SR
After Instruction 1221 2002 5420 00 0000 0000 00 5420 3BDD 1221 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-77

Example 2:
CLR B, [W8]+=2, W6, [W10]+=2, W7, [W13]+=2 ; ; ; ; ; Clear ACCB Load W6 with [W8] Load W7 with [W10] Save ACCA to [W13] Post-inc W8,W10,W13
W6 W7 W8 W10 W13 ACCA ACCB Data 2000 Data 3000 Data 4000 SR
Before Instruction F001 C783 2000 3000 4000 00 0067 2345 00 5420 ABDD 1221 FF80 FFC3 0000
W6 W7 W8 W10 W13 ACCA ACCB Data 2000 Data 3000 Data 4000 SR
After Instruction 1221 FF80 2002 3002 4002 00 0067 2345 00 0000 0000 1221 FF80 0067 0000
DS70157C-page 5-78
CLRWDT
Syntax: Operands: Operation: {label:} None
Clear Watchdog Timer CLRWDT
0 WDT count register 0 WDT prescaler A count 0 WDT prescaler B count None 1111 1110 0110 0000 0000 0000 Clear the contents of the Watchdog Timer count register and the prescaler count registers. The Watchdog Prescaler A and Prescaler B settings, set by configuration fuses in the FWDT, are not changed. 1 1
CLRWDT ; Clear Watchdog Timer
Before Instruction SR 0000
After Instruction SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-79
COM
Complement f COM{.B} f {,WREG}
f [0 ... 8191] (f) destination designated by D N, Z 1110 1110 1BDf ffff ffff ffff Compute the 1s complement of the contents of the file register and place the result in the destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
1 1
COM.b RAM200 ; COM RAM200 (Byte mode)
Before Instruction RAM200 80FF SR 0000 Example 2:

COM
After Instruction RAM200 8000 SR 0002 (Z)

; COM RAM400 and store to WREG ; (Word mode)
RAM400, WREG
Before Instruction WREG 1211 RAM400 0823 SR 0000
After Instruction WREG F7DC RAM400 0823 SR 0008 (N = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-80
COM
Syntax: {label:}
Complement Ws COM{.B} Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Ws [W0 ... W15] Wd [W0 ... W15] (Ws) Wd N, Z 1110 1010 1Bqq qddd dppp ssss Compute the 1s complement of the contents of the source register Ws and place the result in the destination register Wd. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for both Ws and Wd. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.

COM.B
1 1
[W0++], [W1++] ; COM [W0] and store to [W1] (Byte mode) ; Post-increment W0, W1
Before Instruction W0 2301 W1 2400 Data 2300 5607 Data 2400 ABCD SR 0000 Example 2:
COM W0, [W1++]
After Instruction W0 2302 W1 2401 Data 2300 5607 Data 2400 ABA9 SR 0008 (N = 1)
; COM W0 and store to [W1] (Word mode) ; Post-increment W1
Before Instruction W0 D004 W1 1000 Data 1000 ABA9 SR 0000
After Instruction W0 D004 W1 1002 Data 1000 2FFB SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-81
CP
Compare f with WREG, Set Status Flags CP{.B} f
f [0 ...8191] (f) (WREG) DC, N, OV, Z, C 1110 0011 0B0f ffff ffff ffff Compute (f) (WREG) and update the STATUS register. This instruction is equivalent to the SUBWF instruction, but the result of the subtraction is not stored. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
1 1
CP.B RAM400 ; Compare RAM400 with WREG (Byte mode)

CP 0x1200
After Instruction WREG 8823 RAM400 0823 SR 0002 (Z = 1)

; Compare (0x1200) with WREG (Word mode)
Before Instruction WREG 2377 Data 1200 2277 SR 0000
After Instruction WREG 2377 Data 1200 2277 SR 0008 (N = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-82
CP
Compare Wb with lit5, Set Status Flags CP{.B} Wb, #lit5
Wb [W0 ... W15] lit5 [0 ... 31] (Wb) lit5 DC, N, OV, Z, C 1110 0001 0www wB00 011k kkkk Compute (Wb) lit5, and update the STATUS register. This instruction is equivalent to the SUB instruction, but the result of the subtraction is not stored. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. The w bits select the address of the Wb base register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The k bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
1 1
CP.B W4, #0x12 ; Compare W4 with 0x12 (Byte mode)

CP W4, #0x12

; Compare W4 with 0x12 (Word mode)
Before Instruction W4 7713 SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-83
CP
Syntax: {label:}
Compare Wb with Ws, Set Status Flags CP{.B} Wb, Ws [Ws] [Ws++] [Ws--] [++Ws] [--Ws]
Wb [W0 ... W15] Ws [W0 ... W15] (Wb) (Ws) DC, N, OV, Z, C 1110 0001 0www wB00 0ppp ssss Compute (Wb) (Ws), and update the STATUS register. This instruction is equivalent to the SUB instruction, but the result of the subtraction is not stored. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws. The w bits select the address of the Wb source register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the address of the Ws source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
1 1
CP.B W0, [W1++] ; Compare [W1] with W0 (Byte mode) ; Post-increment W1
Before Instruction W0 ABA9 W1 2000 Data 2000 D004 SR 0000 Example 2:

CP W5, W6
After Instruction W0 ABA9 W1 2001 Data 2000 D004 SR 0008 (N = 1)

; Compare W6 with W5 (Word mode)
After Instruction W5 2334 W6 8001 SR 000C (N, OV = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-84
CP0
Compare f with 0x0, Set Status Flags CP0{.B} f
f [0 ... 8191] (f) 0x0 DC, N, OV, Z, C 1110 0010 0B0f ffff ffff ffff Compute (f) 0x0 and update the STATUS register. The result of the subtraction is not stored. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
1 1
CP0.B RAM100 ; Compare RAM100 with 0x0 (Byte mode)
Before Instruction RAM100 44C3 SR 0000 Example 2:

CP0 0x1FFE
After Instruction RAM100 44C3 SR 0008 (N = 1)

; Compare (0x1FFE) with 0x0 (Word mode)
Before Instruction Data 1FFE 0001 SR 0000
After Instruction Data 1FFE 0001 SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-85
CP0
Syntax: {label:}
Compare Ws with 0x0, Set Status Flags CP0{.B} Ws [Ws] [Ws++] [Ws--] [++Ws] [--Ws]
Ws [W0 ... W15] (Ws) 0x0000 DC, N, OV, Z, C 1110 0000 0000 0B00 0ppp ssss Compute (Ws) 0x0000 and update the STATUS register. The result of the subtraction is not stored. Register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the address of the Ws source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
1 1
CP0.B [W4--] ; Compare [W4] with 0 (Byte mode) ; Post-decrement W4
Before Instruction W4 1001 Data 1000 0034 SR 0000 Example 2:

CP0 [--W5]
After Instruction W4 1000 Data 1000 0034 SR 0002 (Z = 1)

; Compare [--W5] with 0 (Word mode)
Before Instruction W5 2400 Data 23FE 9000 SR 0000
After Instruction W5 23FE Data 23FE 9000 SR 0008 (N = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-86
CPB
Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description:
Compare f with WREG using Borrow, Set Status Flags {label:} CPB{.B} f
f [0 ...8191] (f) (WREG) (C) DC, N, OV, Z, C 1110 0011 1B0f ffff ffff ffff Compute (f) (WREG) (C), and update the STATUS register. This instruction is equivalent to the SUBB instruction, but the result of the subtraction is not stored. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The WREG is set to working register W0. 3: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR. These instructions can only clear Z.
1 1
CPB.B RAM400 ; Compare RAM400 with WREG using C (Byte mode)

CPB 0x1200
After Instruction WREG 8823 RAM400 0823 SR 0008 (N = 1)

; Compare (0x1200) with WREG using C (Word mode)
Before After Instruction Instruction WREG 2377 WREG 2377 Data 1200 2377 Data 1200 2377 SR 0001 (C = 1) SR 0001 (C = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-87
CPB
Compare Wb with lit5 using Borrow, Set Status Flags {label:} CPB{.B} Wb, #lit5
Wb [W0 ... W15] lit5 [0 ... 31] (Wb) lit5 (C) DC, N, OV, Z, C 1110 0001 1www wB00 011k kkkk Compute (Wb) lit5 (C), and update the STATUS register. This instruction is equivalent to the SUBB instruction, but the result of the subtraction is not stored. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. The w bits select the address of the Wb source register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The k bits provide the literal operand, a five bit integer number. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR. These instructions can only clear Z.
1 1
CPB.B W4, #0x12 ; Compare W4 with 0x12 using C (Byte mode)
Before Instruction W4 7711 SR 0001 (C = 1) Example 2:

CPB.B W4, #0x12

; Compare W4 with 0x12 using C (Byte mode)

CPB W12, #0x1F

; Compare W12 with 0x1F using C (Word mode)
Before Instruction W12 0020 SR 0002 (Z = 1) Example 4:

CPB W12, #0x1F
After Instruction W12 0020 SR 0003 (Z, C = 1)

; Compare W12 with 0x1F using C (Word mode)
Before Instruction W12 0020 SR 0003 (Z, C = 1)
After Instruction W12 0020 SR 0001 (C = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-88
CPB
Syntax: {label:}
Compare Ws with Wb using Borrow, Set Status Flags CPB{.B} Wb, Ws [Ws] [Ws++] [Ws--] [++Ws] [--Ws]
Wb [W0 ... W15] Ws [W0 ... W15] (Wb) (Ws) (C) DC, N, OV, Z, C 1110 0001 1www wB00 0ppp ssss Compute (Wb) (Ws) (C), and update the STATUS register. This instruction is equivalent to the SUBB instruction, but the result of the subtraction is not stored. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws. The w bits select the address of the Wb source register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the address of the Ws source register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR. These instructions can only clear Z.
1 1
CPB.B W0, [W1++] ; Compare [W1] with W0 using C (Byte mode) ; Post-increment W1
Before After Instruction Instruction W0 ABA9 W0 ABA9 W1 1000 W1 1001 Data 1000 D0A9 Data 1000 D0A9 SR 0002 (Z = 1) SR 0008 (N = 1) Example 2:
CPB.B W0, [W1++] ; Compare [W1] with W0 using C (Byte mode) ; Post-increment W1
Before After Instruction Instruction W0 ABA9 W0 ABA9 W1 1000 W1 1001 Data 1000 D0A9 Data 1000 D0A9 SR 0001 (C = 1) SR 0001 (C = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-89

Example 3:
CPB W4, W5 ; Compare W5 with W4 using C (Word mode)
Before Instruction W4 4000 W5 3000 SR 0001 (C = 1)
After Instruction W4 4000 W5 3000 SR 0001 (C = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-90
CPSEQ
Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Equal (Wb = Wn) CPSEQ{.B} Wb, Wn
Wb [W0 ... W15] Wn [W0 ... W15] (Wb) (Wn) Skip if (Wb) = (Wn) None 1110 0111 1www wB00 0000 ssss Compare the contents of Wb with the contents of Wn by performing the subtraction (Wb) (Wn), but do not store the result. If (Wb) = (Wn), the next instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is discarded and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. If (Wb) (Wn), the next instruction is executed as normal. The w bits select the address of the Wb source register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The s bits select the address of the Ws source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
1 1 (2 or 3 if skip taken)
002000 HERE: CPSEQ.B W0, W1 002002 GOTO BYPASS 002004 . . . 002006 . . . 002008 BYPASS:. . . 00200A . . . ; If W0 = W1 (Byte mode), ; skip the GOTO
PC W0 W1 SR Example 2:

CPSEQ CALL ... ... W4, W8 _FIR
PC W0 W1 SR
018000 HERE: 018002 018006 018008
; If W4 = W8 (Word mode), ; skip the subroutine call
PC W4 W8 SR
Before Instruction 01 8000 3344 3344 0002 (Z = 1)
PC W4 W8 SR
After Instruction 01 8006 3344 3344 0002 (Z = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-91
CPSGT
Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Greater Than (Wb > Wn) {label:} CPSGT{.B} Wb, Wn
Wb [W0 ... W15] Wn [W0 ... W15] (Wb) (Wn) Skip if (Wb) > (Wn) None 1110 0110 0www wB00 0000 ssss Compare the contents of Wb with the contents of Wn by performing the subtraction (Wb) (Wn), but do not store the result. If (Wb) > (Wn), the next instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is discarded and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. Otherwise, the next instruction is executed as normal. The w bits select the address of the Wb source register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The s bits select the address of the Ws source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
002000 HERE: 002002 002006 002008 00200A BYPASS 00200C CPSGT.B GOTO . . . . . . . . . . . . W0, W1 ; If W0 > W1 (Byte mode), BYPASS ; skip the GOTO
Before Instruction 00 2000 00FF 26FE 0009 (N, C = 1)

CPSGT CALL ... ...
PC W0 W1 SR
After Instruction 00 2006 00FF 26FE 0009 (N, C = 1)
018000 HERE: 018002 018006 018008
W4, W5 ; If W4 > W5 (Word mode), _FIR ; skip the subroutine call
PC W4 W5 SR
Before Instruction 01 8000 2600 2600 0004 (OV = 1)
PC W4 W5 SR
After Instruction 01 8002 2600 2600 0004 (OV = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-92
CPSLT
Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Less Than (Wb < Wn) {label:} CPSLT{.B} Wb, Wn
Wb [W0 ... W15] Wn [W0 ... W15] (Wb) (Wn) Skip if (Wb) < (Wn) None 1110 0110 1www wB00 0000 ssss Compare the contents of Wb with the contents of Wn by performing the subtraction (Wb) (Wn), but do not store the result. If (Wb) < (Wn), the next instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is discarded and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. Otherwise, the next instruction is executed as normal. The w bits select the address of the Wb source register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The s bits select the address of the Ws source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
002000 HERE: 002002 002006 002008 00200A BYPASS: 00200C CPSLT.B GOTO . . . . . . . . . . . . W8, W9 ; If W8 < W9 (Byte mode), BYPASS ; skip the GOTO
Before Instruction 00 2000 00FF 26FE 0008 (N = 1)

CPSLT CALL . . . . . .
PC W8 W9 SR
After Instruction 00 2002 00FF 26FE 0008 (N = 1)
018000 HERE: 018002 018006 018008
W3, W6 ; If W3 < W6 (Word mode), _FIR ; skip the subroutine call
PC W3 W6 SR
PC W3 W6 SR
5
DS70157C-page 5-93
CPSNE
Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Not Equal (Wb Wn) CPSNE{.B} Wb, Wn
Wb [W0 ... W15] Wn [W0 ... W15] (Wb) (Wn) Skip if (Wb) (Wn) None 1110 0111 0www wB00 0000 ssss Compare the contents of Wb with the contents of Wn by performing the subtraction (Wb) (Wn), but do not store the result. If (Wb) (Wn), the next instruction (fetched during the current instruction execution) is discarded and on the next cycle, a NOP is executed instead. Otherwise, the next instruction is executed as normal. The w bits select the address of the Wb source register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The s bits select the address of the Ws source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
002000 HERE: 002002 002006 002008 00200A BYPASS: 00200C CPSNE.B GOTO . . . . . . . . . . . . W2, W3 ; If W2 != W3 (Byte mode), BYPASS ; skip the GOTO
Before Instruction 00 2000 00FF 26FE 0001 (C = 1)

CPSNE CALL ... ... W0, W8 _FIR
PC W2 W3 SR
After Instruction 00 2006 00FF 26FE 0001 (C = 1)
018000 HERE: 018002 018006 018008
; If W0 != W8 (Word mode), ; skip the subroutine call
PC W0 W8 SR
PC W0 W8 SR
DS70157C-page 5-94
DAW.B
Decimal Adjust Wn DAW.B Wn
Wn [W0 ... W15] If (Wn<3:0> > 9) or (DC = 1) (Wn<3:0>) + 6 Wn<3:0> Else (Wn<3:0>) Wn<3:0> If (Wn<7:4> > 9) or (C = 1) (Wn<7:4>) + 6 Wn<7:4> Else (Wn<7:4>) Wn<7:4>
C 1111 1101 0100 0000 0000 ssss Adjust the Least Significant Byte in Wn to produce a binary coded decimal (BCD) result. The Most Significant Byte of Wn is not changed, and the Carry flag is used to indicate any decimal rollover. Register direct addressing must be used for Wn. The s bits select the source/destination register. Note 1: This instruction is used to correct the data format after two packed BCD bytes have been added. 2: This instruction operates in Byte mode only and the .B extension must be included with the opcode.
1 1
DAW.B W0 ; Decimal adjust W0
Before Instruction W0 771A SR 0002 (DC = 1) Example 2:

DAW.B W3
After Instruction W0 7720 SR 0002 (DC = 1)
; Decimal adjust W3
Before Instruction W3 77AA SR 0000
After Instruction W3 7710 SR 0001 (C = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-95
DEC
Decrement f DEC{.B} f {,WREG}
f [0 ... 8191] (f) 1 destination designated by D DC, N, OV, Z, C 1110 1101 0BDf ffff ffff ffff Subtract one from the contents of the file register and place the result in the destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
1 1
DEC.B 0x200 ; Decrement (0x200) (Byte mode)
Before Instruction Data 200 80FF SR 0000 Example 2:

DEC
After Instruction Data 200 80FE SR 0009 (N, C = 1)

; Decrement RAM400 and store to WREG ; (Word mode)
RAM400, WREG
After Instruction WREG 0822 RAM400 0823 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-96
DEC
Syntax: {label:}
Decrement Ws DEC{.B} Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Ws [W0 ... W15] Wd [W0 ... W15] (Ws) 1 Wd DC, N, OV, Z, C 1110 1001 0Bqq qddd dppp ssss Subtract one from the contents of the source register Ws and place the result in the destination register Wd. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used by Ws and Wd. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
1 1
DEC.B [W7++], [W8++] ; DEC [W7] and store to [W8] (Byte mode) ; Post-increment W7, W8
DEC W5, [W6++]
After Instruction W7 2302 W8 2401 Data 2300 5607 Data 2400 AB55 SR 0000
; Decrement W5 and store to [W6] (Word mode) ; Post-increment W6
After Instruction W5 D004 W6 2002 Data 2000 D003 SR 0009 (N, C = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-97
DEC2
Decrement f by 2 DEC2{.B} f {,WREG}
f [0 ... 8191] (f) 2 destination designated by D DC, N, OV, Z, C 1110 1101 1BDf ffff ffff ffff Subtract two from the contents of the file register and place the result in the destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
1 1
DEC2.B 0x200 ; Decrement (0x200) by 2 (Byte mode)

DEC2
After Instruction Data 200 80FD SR 0009 (N, C = 1)

; Decrement RAM400 by 2 and ; store to WREG (Word mode)
RAM400, WREG
After Instruction WREG 0821 RAM400 0823 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-98
DEC2
Syntax: {label:}
Decrement Ws by 2 DEC2{.B} Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Ws [W0 ... W15] Wd [W0 ... W15] (Ws) 2 Wd DC, N, OV, Z, C 1110 1001 1Bqq qddd dppp ssss Subtract two from the contents of the source register Ws and place the result in the destination register Wd. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used by Ws and Wd. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
1 1
DEC2.B [W7--], [W8--]; DEC [W7] by 2, store to [W8] (Byte mode) ; Post-decrement W7, W8
DEC2
After Instruction W7 2300 W8 23FF Data 2300 0107 Data 2400 ABFF SR 0008 (N = 1)
W5, [W6++] ; DEC W5 by 2, store to [W6] (Word mode) ; Post-increment W6
After Instruction W5 D004 W6 1002 Data 1000 D002 SR 0009 (N, C = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-99
DISI
Disable Interrupts Temporarily DISI #lit14
lit14 [0 ... 16383] lit14 DISICNT 1 DISI Disable interrupts for (lit14 + 1) cycles None 1111 1100 00kk kkkk kkkk kkkk Disable interrupts of priority 0 through priority 6 for (lit14 + 1) instruction cycles. Priority 0 through priority 6 interrupts are disabled starting in the cycle that DISI executes, and remain disabled for the next (lit 14) cycles. The lit14 value is written to the DISICNT register, and the DISI flag (INTCON2<14>) is set to 1. This instruction can be used before executing time critical code, to limit the effects of interrupts. Note: This instruction does not prevent priority 7 interrupts and traps from running. See the dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for details.
1 1
002000 HERE: 002002 002004 DISI . . . #100 ; Disable interrupts for 101 cycles ; next 100 cycles protected by DISI
PC DISICNT INTCON2 SR
PC DISICNT INTCON2 SR
After Instruction 00 2002 0100 4000 (DISI = 1) 0000
DS70157C-page 5-100
DIV.S
Syntax: {label:}
Signed Integer Divide DIV.S{W} DIV.SD Wm, Wn Wm, Wn
Operands:
Wm [W0 ... W15] for word operation Wm [W0, W2, W4 ... W14] for double operation Wn [W2 ... W15] For word operation (default): Wm W0 If (Wm<15> = 1): 0xFFFF W1 Else: 0x0 W1 W1:W0 / Wn W0 Remainder W1 For double operation (DIV.SD): Wm + 1:Wm W1:W0 W1:W0 / Wn W0 Remainder W1
Operation:
N, OV, Z, C 1101 1000 0ttt tvvv vW00 ssss Iterative, signed integer divide, where the dividend is stored in Wm (for a 16-bit by 16-bit divide) or Wm + 1:Wm (for a 32-bit by 16-bit divide) and the divisor is stored in Wn. In the default word operation, Wm is first copied to W0 and sign-extended through W1 to perform the operation. In the double operation, Wm + 1:Wm is first copied to W1:W0. The 16-bit quotient of the divide operation is stored in W0, and the 16-bit remainder is stored in W1. This instruction must be executed 18 times using the REPEAT instruction (with an iteration count of 17) to generate the correct quotient and remainder. The N flag will be set if the remainder is negative and cleared otherwise. The OV flag will be set if the divide operation resulted in an overflow and cleared otherwise. The Z flag will be set if the remainder is 0 and cleared otherwise. The C flag is used to implement the divide algorithm and its final value should not be used. The t bits select the most significant word of the dividend for the double operation. These bits are clear for the word operation. The v bits select the least significant word of the dividend. The W bit selects the dividend size (0 for 16-bit, 1 for 32-bit). The s bits select the divisor register. Note 1: The extension .D in the instruction denotes a double word (32-bit) dividend rather than a word dividend. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: Unexpected results will occur if the quotient can not be represented in 16 bits. When this occurs for the double operation (DIV.SD), the OV status bit will be set and the quotient and remainder should not be used. For the word operation (DIV.S), only one type of overflow may occur (0x8000/0xFFFF = + 32768 or 0x00008000), which allows the OV status bit to interpret the result. 3: Dividing by zero will initiate an arithmetic error trap during the first cycle of execution. 4: This instruction is interruptible on each instruction cycle boundary.
5
DS70157C-page 5-101
DIV.S
Words: Cycles: Example 1: 1
Signed Integer Divide
18 (plus 1 for REPEAT execution)

REPEAT #17 DIV.S W3, W4 ; Execute DIV.S 18 times ; Divide W3 by W4 ; Store quotient to W0, remainder to W1
Before Instruction W0 5555 W1 1234 W3 3000 W4 0027 SR 0000 Example 2:

REPEAT DIV.SD #17 W0, W12
After Instruction W0 013B W1 0003 W3 3000 W4 0027 SR 0000

; Execute DIV.SD 18 times ; Divide W1:W0 by W12 ; Store quotient to W0, remainder to W1
Before Instruction W0 2500 W1 FF42 W12 2200 SR 0000
After Instruction W0 FA6B W1 EF00 W12 2200 SR 0008 (N = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-102
DIV.U
Syntax: {label:}
Unsigned Integer Divide DIV.U{W} DIV.UD Wm, Wn Wm, Wn
Operands:
Wm [W0 ... W15] for word operation Wm [W0, W2, W4 ... W14] for double operation Wn [W2 ... W15] For word operation (default): Wm W0 0x0 W1 W1:W0/Wn W0 Remainder W1 For double operation (DIV.UD): Wm + 1:Wm W1:W0 W1:W0/Wns W0 Remainder W1
Operation:
N, OV, Z, C 1101 1000 1ttt tvvv vW00 ssss Iterative, unsigned integer divide, where the dividend is stored in Wm (for a 16-bit by 16-bit divide), or Wm + 1:Wm (for a 32-bit by 16-bit divide) and the divisor is stored in Wn. In the word operation, Wm is first copied to W0 and W1 is cleared to perform the divide. In the double operation, Wm + 1:Wm is first copied to W1:W0. The 16-bit quotient of the divide operation is stored in W0, and the 16-bit remainder is stored in W1. This instruction must be executed 18 times using the REPEAT instruction (with an iteration count of 17) to generate the correct quotient and remainder. The N flag will always be cleared. The OV flag will be set if the divide operation resulted in an overflow and cleared otherwise. The Z flag will be set if the remainder is 0 and cleared otherwise. The C flag is used to implement the divide algorithm and its final value should not be used. The t bits select the most significant word of the dividend for the double operation. These bits are clear for the word operation. The v bits select the least significant word of the dividend. The W bit selects the dividend size (0 for 16-bit, 1 for 32-bit). The s bits select the divisor register. Note 1: The extension .D in the instruction denotes a double word (32-bit) dividend rather than a word dividend. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: Unexpected results will occur if the quotient can not be represented in 16 bits. This may only occur for the double operation (DIV.UD). When an overflow occurs, the OV status bit will be set and the quotient and remainder should not be used. 3: Dividing by zero will initiate an arithmetic error trap during the first cycle of execution. 4: This instruction is interruptible on each instruction cycle boundary.
5
Words: Cycles:
1 18 (plus 1 for REPEAT execution)
DS70157C-page 5-103

Example 1:
REPEAT #17 DIV.U W2, W4 ; Execute DIV.U 18 times ; Divide W2 by W4 ; Store quotient to W0, remainder to W1

REPEAT DIV.UD #17 W10, W12
After Instruction W0 0040 W1 0000 W2 8000 W4 0200 SR 0002 (Z = 1)

; Execute DIV.UD 18 times ; Divide W11:W10 by W12 ; Store quotient to W0, remainder to W1
Before Instruction W0 5555 W1 1234 W10 2500 W11 0042 W12 2200 SR 0000
After Instruction W0 01F2 W1 0100 W10 2500 W11 0042 W12 2200 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-104
DIVF
Fractional Divide DIVF Wm, Wn
Wm [W0 ... W15] Wn [W2 ... W15] 0x0 W0 Wm W1 W1:W0/Wn W0 Remainder W1 N, OV, Z, C 1101 1001 0ttt t000 0000 ssss Iterative, signed fractional 16-bit by 16-bit divide, where the dividend is stored in Wm and the divisor is stored in Wn. To perform the operation, W0 is first cleared and Wm is copied to W1. The 16-bit quotient of the divide operation is stored in W0, and the 16-bit remainder is stored in W1. The sign of the remainder will be the same as the sign of the dividend. This instruction must be executed 18 times using the REPEAT instruction (with an iteration count of 17) to generate the correct quotient and remainder. The N flag will be set if the remainder is negative and cleared otherwise. The OV flag will be set if the divide operation resulted in an overflow and cleared otherwise. The Z flag will be set if the remainder is 0 and cleared otherwise. The C flag is used to implement the divide algorithm and its final value should not be used. The t bits select the dividend register. The s bits select the divisor register. Note 1: For the fractional divide to be effective, Wm must be less than Wn. If Wm is greater than or equal to Wn, unexpected results will occur because the fractional result will be greater than or equal to 1.0. When this occurs, the OV status bit will be set and the quotient and remainder should not be used. 2: Dividing by zero will initiate an arithmetic error trap during the first cycle of execution. 3: This instruction is interruptible on each instruction cycle boundary.
1 18 (plus 1 for REPEAT execution)

REPEAT DIVF #17 W8, W9 ; Execute DIVF 18 times ; Divide W8 by W9 ; Store quotient to W0, remainder to W1
Before Instruction W0 8000 W1 1234 W8 1000 W9 4000 SR 0000
After Instruction W0 2000 W1 0000 W8 1000 W9 4000 SR 0002 (Z = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-105

Example 2:
REPEAT #17 DIVF W8, W9 ; Execute DIVF 18 times ; Divide W8 by W9 ; Store quotient to W0, remainder to W1

REPEAT #17 DIVF W0, W1
After Instruction W0 F000 W1 0000 W8 1000 W9 8000 SR 0002 (Z = 1)

; Execute DIVF 18 times ; Divide W0 by W1 ; Store quotient to W0, remainder to W1
After Instruction W0 7FFE W1 8002 SR 0008 (N = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-106
DO
Initialize Hardware Loop Literal DO #lit14, Expr
lit14 [0 ... 16383] Expr may be an absolute address, label or expression. Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767]. PUSH DO shadows (DCOUNT, DOEND, DOSTART) (lit14) DCOUNT (PC) + 4 PC (PC) DOSTART (PC) + (2 * Slit16) DOEND Increment DL<2:0> (CORCON<10:8>) DA 0000 0000 1000 0000 00kk nnnn kkkk nnnn kkkk nnnn kkkk nnnn
Operation:
Initiate a no overhead hardware DO loop, which is executed (lit14 + 1) times. The DO loop begins at the address following the DO instruction, and ends at the address 2 * Slit16 instruction words away. The 14-bit count value (lit14) supports a maximum loop count value of 16384, and the 16-bit offset value (Slit16) supports offsets of 32K instruction words in both directions. When this instruction executes, DCOUNT, DOSTART and DOEND are first PUSHed into their respective shadow registers, and then updated with the new DO loop parameters specified by the instruction. The DO level count, DL<2:0> (CORCON<8:10>), is then incremented. After the DO loop completes execution, the PUSHed DCOUNT, DOSTART and DOEND registers are restored, and DL<2:0> is decremented. The k bits specify the loop count. The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions offset from the PC to the last instruction executed in the loop. Special Features, Restrictions: The following features and restrictions apply to the DO instruction. 1. Using a loop count of 0 will result in the loop being executed one time. 2. Using a loop size of -2, -1 or 0 is invalid. Unexpected results may occur if these offsets are used. 3. The very last two instructions of the DO loop can NOT be: an instruction which changes program control flow a DO or REPEAT instruction Unexpected results may occur if any of these instructions are used. 4. If a hard trap occurs in the second to last instruction or third to last instruction of a DO loop, the loop will not function properly. The hard trap includes exceptions of priority level 13 through level 15, inclusive. Note 1: The DO instruction is interruptible and supports 1 level of hardware nesting. Nesting up to an additional 5 levels may be provided in software by the user. See the dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for details. 2: The linker will convert the specified expression into the offset to be used.
5
Words: Cycles:
2 2
DS70157C-page 5-107

Example 1:
002000 LOOP6: 002004 002006 002008 00200A END6: 00200C DO #5, END6 ADD W1, W2, W3 . . . . . . SUB W2, W3, W4 . . . ; Initiate DO loop (6 reps) ; First instruction in loop
; Last instruction in loop
PC DCOUNT DOSTART DOEND CORCON SR Example 2:
Before Instruction 00 2000 0000 FF FFFF FF FFFF 0000 0001 (C = 1)
PC DCOUNT DOSTART DOEND CORCON SR
After Instruction 00 2004 0005 00 2004 00 200A 0100 (DL = 1) 0201 (DA, C = 1)
; Init DO loop (353 reps) ; First instruction in loop
01C000 LOOP12: DO #0x160, END12 01C004 DEC W1, W2 01C006 . . . 01C008 . . . 01C00A . . . 01C00C . . . 01C00E . . . 01C010 CALL _FIR88 01C014 END12: NOP
; Call the FIR88 subroutine ; Last instruction in loop ; (Required NOP filler)
Before Instruction 01 C000 0000 FF FFFF FF FFFF 0000 0008 (N = 1)
After Instruction 01 C004 0160 01 C004 01 C014 0100 (DL = 1) 0208 (DA, N = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-108
DO
Initialize Hardware Loop Wn DO Wn, Expr
Wn [W0 ... W15] Expr may be an absolute address, label or expression. Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... +32767]. PUSH Shadows (DCOUNT, DOEND, DOSTART) (Wn) DCOUNT (PC) + 4 PC (PC) DOSTART (PC) + (2 * Slit16) DOEND Increment DL<2:0> (CORCON<10:8>) DA 0000 1000 0000 1000 nnnn 0000 nnnn 0000 nnnn ssss nnnn 0000
Operation:
Initiate a no overhead hardware DO loop, which is executed (Wn + 1) times. The DO loop begins at the address following the DO instruction, and ends at the address 2 * Slit16 instruction words away. The lower 14 bits of Wn support a maximum count value of 16384, and the 16-bit offset value (Slit16) supports offsets of 32K instruction words in both directions. When this instruction executes, DCOUNT, DOSTART and DOEND are first PUSHed into their respective shadow registers, and then updated with the new DO loop parameters specified by the instruction. The DO level count, DL<2:0> (CORCON<8:10>), is then incremented. After the DO loop completes execution, the PUSHed DCOUNT, DOSTART and DOEND registers are restored, and DL<2:0> is decremented. The s bits specify the register Wn that contains the loop count. The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the number of instructions offset from (PC + 4), which is the last instruction executed in the loop. Special Features, Restrictions: The following features and restrictions apply to the DO instruction. 1. Using a loop count of 0 will result in the loop being executed one time. 2. Using an offset of -2, -1 or 0 is invalid. Unexpected results may occur if these offsets are used. 3. The very last two instructions of the DO loop can NOT be: an instruction which changes program control flow a DO or REPEAT instruction Unexpected results may occur if these last instructions are used. 4. If a hard trap occurs in the second to last instruction or third to last instruction of a DO loop, the loop will not function properly. The hard trap includes exceptions of priority level 13 through level 15, inclusive. Note 1: The DO instruction is interruptible and supports 1 level of nesting. Nesting up to an additional 5 levels may be provided in software by the user. See the dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for details. 2: The linker will convert the specified expression into the offset to be used.
5
Words: Cycles:
2 2
DS70157C-page 5-109

Example 1:
002000 LOOP6: 002004 002006 002008 00200A 00200C 00200E 002010 END6: DO ADD . . . . . . . . . REPEAT SUB NOP W0, END6 ; Initiate DO loop (W0 reps) W1, W2, W3 ; First instruction in loop
#6 W2, W3, W4 ; Last instruction in loop ; (Required NOP filler)
PC W0 DCOUNT DOSTART DOEND CORCON SR Example 2:
Before Instruction 00 2000 0012 0000 FF FFFF FF FFFF 0000 0000

DO SWAP . . . . . . . . . MOV
PC W0 DCOUNT DOSTART DOEND CORCON SR

W7, ENDA W0
After Instruction 00 2004 0012 0012 00 2004 00 2010 0100 (DL = 1) 0080 (DA = 1)
; Initiate DO loop (W7 reps) ; First instruction in loop
002000 LOOPA: 002004 002006 002008 00200A 002010 ENDA:
W1, [W2++] ; Last instruction in loop
Before Instruction 00 2000 E00F 0000 FF FFFF FF FFFF 0000 0000
After Instruction 00 2004 E00F 200F 00 2004 00 2010 0100 (DL = 1) 0080 (DA = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-110
ED
Syntax: {label:} ED
Euclidean Distance (No Accumulate) Wm * Wm, Acc, [Wx], [Wy], Wxd
[Wx] + = kx, [Wy] + = ky, [Wx] = kx, [Wy] = ky, [W9 + W12], Operands: [W11 + W12],
Acc [A,B] Wm * Wm [W4 * W4, W5 * W5, W6 * W6, W7 * W7] Wx [W8, W9]; kx [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6] Wy [W10, W11]; ky [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6] Wxd [W4 ... W7] (Wm) * (Wm) Acc(A or B) ([Wx] [Wy]) Wxd (Wx) + kx Wx (Wy) + ky Wy OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB 1111 00mm A1xx 00ii iijj jj11 Compute the square of Wm, and optionally compute the difference of the prefetch values specified by [Wx] and [Wy]. The results of Wm * Wm are sign-extended to 40 bits and stored in the specified accumulator. The results of [Wx] [Wy] are stored in Wxd, which may be the same as Wm. Operands Wx, Wxd and Wyd specify the prefetch operations which support indirect and register offset addressing as described in Section 4.14.1 MAC Prefetches. The m bits select the operand register Wm for the square. The A bit selects the accumulator for the result. The x bits select the prefetch difference Wxd destination. The i bits select the Wx prefetch operation. The j bits select the Wy prefetch operation.
Operation:

ED
1 1
W4*W4, A, [W8]+=2, [W10]-=2, W4; ; ; ; Square W4 to ACCA [W8]-[W10] to W4 Post-increment W8 Post-decrement W10
W4 W8 W10 ACCA Data 1100 Data 2300 SR
Before Instruction 009A 1100 2300 00 3D0A 0000 007F 0028 0000
After Instruction 0057 1102 22FE 00 0000 5CA4 007F 0028 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-111

Example 2:
ED W5*W5, B, [W9]+=2, [W11+W12], W5 ; Square W5 to ACCB ; [W9]-[W11+W12] to W5 ; Post-increment W9
W5 W9 W11 W12 ACCB Data 1200 Data 2508 SR
Before Instruction 43C2 1200 2500 0008 00 28E3 F14C 6A7C 2B3D 0000
After Instruction 3F3F 1202 2500 0008 00 11EF 1F04 6A7C 2B3D 0000
DS70157C-page 5-112
EDAC
Syntax: {label:} EDAC
Euclidean Distance Wm * Wm, Acc, [Wx], [Wx] + = kx, [W9 + W12], [Wy], [Wy] + = ky, Wxd
[Wx] = kx, [Wy] = ky, [W11 + W12],
Operands:
Acc [A,B] Wm * Wm [W4 * W4, W5 * W5, W6 * W6, W7 * W7] Wx [W8, W9]; kx [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6] Wy [W10, W11]; ky [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6] Wxd [W4 ... W7] (Acc(A or B)) + (Wm) * (Wm) Acc(A or B) ([Wx] [Wy]) Wxd (Wx) + kx Wx (Wy) + ky Wy OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB 1111 00mm A1xx 00ii iijj jj10 Compute the square of Wm, and also the difference of the prefetch values specified by [Wx] and [Wy]. The results of Wm * Wm are sign-extended to 40 bits and added to the specified accumulator. The results of [Wx] [Wy] are stored in Wxd, which may be the same as Wm. Operands Wx, Wxd and Wyd specify the prefetch operations which support indirect and register offset addressing as described in Section 4.14.1 MAC Prefetches. The m bits select the operand register Wm for the square. The A bit selects the accumulator for the result. The x bits select the prefetch difference Wxd destination. The i bits select the Wx prefetch operation. The j bits select the Wy prefetch operation.
Operation:

EDAC
1 1
W4*W4, A, [W8]+=2, [w10]-=2, W4 ; ; ; ; ; Square W4 and add to ACCA [W8]-[W10] to W4 Post-increment W8 Post-decrement W10
Before Instruction 009A 1100 2300 00 3D0A 3D0A 007F 0028 0000
After Instruction 0057 1102 22FE 00 3D0A 99AE 007F 0028 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-113

Example 2:
EDAC W5*W5, B, [w9]+=2, [W11+W12], W5 ; ; ; ; Square W5 and add to ACCB [W9]-[W11+W12] to W5 Post-increment W9
Before Instruction 43C2 1200 2500 0008 00 28E3 F14C 6A7C 2B3D 0000
After Instruction 3F3F 1202 2500 0008 00 3AD3 1050 6A7C 2B3D 0000
DS70157C-page 5-114
EXCH
Exchange Wns and Wnd EXCH Wns, Wnd
Wns [W0 ... W15] Wnd [W0 ... W15] (Wns) (Wnd) None 1111 1101 0000 0ddd d000 ssss Exchange the word contents of two working registers. Register direct addressing must be used for Wns and Wnd. The d bits select the address of the first register. The s bits select the address of the second register. Note: This instruction only executes in Word mode.
1 1
EXCH W1, W9 ; Exchange the contents of W1 and W9
W1 W9 SR Example 2:
EXCH
Before Instruction 55FF A3A3 0000

W4, W5
After Instruction W1 A3A3 W9 55FF SR 0000

; Exchange the contents of W4 and W5
W4 W5 SR
Before Instruction ABCD 4321 0000
After Instruction W4 4321 W5 ABCD SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-115
FBCL
Syntax: {label:}
Find First Bit Change from Left FBCL Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wnd
Ws [W0 ... W15] Wnd [W0 ... W15] Max_Shift = 15 Sign = (Ws) & 0x8000 Temp = (Ws) << 1 Shift = 0 While ( (Shift < Max_Shift) && ( (Temp & 0x8000) == Sign) ) Temp = Temp << 1 Shift = Shift + 1 -Shift (Wnd) C 1101 1111 0000 0ddd dppp ssss Find the first occurrence of a one (for a positive value), or zero (for a negative value), starting from the Most Significant bit after the sign bit of Ws and working towards the Least Significant bit of the word operand. The bit number result is sign-extended to 16 bits and placed in Wnd. The next Most Significant bit after the sign bit is allocated bit number 0 and the Least Significant bit is allocated bit number -14. This bit ordering allows for the immediate use of Wd with the SFTAC instruction for scaling values up. If a bit change is not found, a result of -15 is returned and the C flag is set. When a bit change is found, the C flag is cleared. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
1 1
FBCL W1, W9 ; Find 1st bit change from left in W1 ; and store result to W9
Before Instruction W1 55FF W9 FFFF SR 0000
After Instruction W1 55FF W9 0000 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-116

Example 2:
FBCL W1, W9 ; Find 1st bit change from left in W1 ; and store result to W9
Before Instruction W1 FFFF W9 BBBB SR 0000 Example 3:

FBCL [W1++], W9
After Instruction W1 FFFF W9 FFF1 SR 0001 (C = 1)

; Find 1st bit change from left in [W1] ; and store result to W9 ; Post-increment W1
Before Instruction W1 2000 W9 BBBB Data 2000 FF0A SR 0000
After Instruction W1 2002 W9 FFF9 Data 2000 FF0A SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-117
FF1L
Syntax: {label:}
Find First One from Left FF1L Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wnd
Ws [W0 ... W15] Wnd [W0 ... W15] Max_Shift = 17 Temp = (Ws) Shift = 1 While ( (Shift < Max_Shift) && !(Temp & 0x8000) ) Temp = Temp << 1 Shift = Shift + 1 If (Shift == Max_Shift) 0 (Wnd) Else Shift (Wnd) C 1100 1111 1000 0ddd dppp ssss Finds the first occurrence of a 1 starting from the Most Significant bit of Ws and working towards the Least Significant bit of the word operand. The bit number result is zero-extended to 16 bits and placed in Wnd. Bit numbering begins with the Most Significant bit (allocated number 1) and advances to the Least Significant bit (allocated number 16). A result of zero indicates a 1 was not found, and the C flag will be set. If a 1 is found, the C flag is cleared. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
1 1
FF1L W2, W5 ; Find the 1st one from the left in W2 ; and store result to W5
Before Instruction W2 000A W5 BBBB SR 0000
After Instruction W2 000A W5 000D SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-118

Example 2:
FF1L [W2++], W5 ; Find the 1st one from the left in [W2] ; and store the result to W5 ; Post-increment W2
Before Instruction W2 2000 W5 BBBB Data 2000 0000 SR 0000
After Instruction W2 2002 W5 0000 Data 2000 0000 SR 0001 (C = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-119
FF1R
Syntax: {label:}
Find First One from Right FF1R Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wnd
Ws [W0 ... W15] Wnd [W0 ... W15] Max_Shift = 17 Temp = (Ws) Shift = 1 While ( (Shift < Max_Shift) && !(Temp & 0x1) ) Temp = Temp >> 1 Shift = Shift + 1 If (Shift == Max_Shift) 0 (Wnd) Else Shift (Wnd) C 1100 1111 0000 0ddd dppp ssss Finds the first occurrence of a 1 starting from the Least Significant bit of Ws and working towards the Most Significant bit of the word operand. The bit number result is zero-extended to 16 bits and placed in Wnd. Bit numbering begins with the Least Significant bit (allocated number 1) and advances to the Most Significant bit (allocated number 16). A result of zero indicates a 1 was not found, and the C flag will be set. If a 1 is found, the C flag is cleared. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
1 1
FF1R W1, W9 ; Find the 1st one from the right in W1 ; and store the result to W9
Before Instruction W1 000A W9 BBBB SR 0000
After Instruction W1 000A W9 0002 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-120

Example 2:
FF1R [W1++], W9 ; Find the 1st one from the right in [W1] ; and store the result to W9 ; Post-increment W1
Before Instruction W1 2000 W9 BBBB Data 2000 8000 SR 0000
After Instruction W1 2002 W9 0010 Data 2000 8000 SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-121
GOTO
Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: 1st word 2nd word Description: 0000 0000 {label:}
Unconditional Jump GOTO Expr
Expr may be label or expression (but not a literal). Expr is resolved by the linker to a lit23, where lit23 [0 ... 8388606]. lit23 PC NOP Instruction Register None
0100 0000
nnnn 0000
nnnn 0000
nnnn 0nnn
nnn0 nnnn
Unconditional jump to anywhere within the 4M instruction word program memory range. The PC is loaded with the 23-bit literal specified in the instruction. Since the PC must always reside on an even address boundary, lit23<0> is ignored. The n bits form the target address. Note: The linker will resolve the specified expression into the lit23 to be used.
2 2
026000 GOTO 026004 MOV . ... . ... 027844 _THERE: MOV 027846 ... _THERE W0, W1 ; Jump to _THERE
#0x400, W2
; Code execution ; resumes here
PC SR Example 2:

... ... GOTO ...
PC SR

; start of code
000100 _code: . 026000 026004
_code+2
; Jump to _code+2
PC SR
PC SR
DS70157C-page 5-122
GOTO
Unconditional Indirect Jump GOTO Wn
Wn [W0 ... W15] 0 PC<22:16> (Wn<15:1>) PC<15:1> 0 PC<0> NOP Instruction Register None 0000 0001 0100 0000 0000 ssss Unconditional indirect jump within the first 32K words of program memory. Zero is loaded into PC<22:16> and the value specified in (Wn) is loaded into PC<15:1>. Since the PC must always reside on an even address boundary, Wn<0> is ignored. The s bits select the source register. 1 2
006000 GOTO 006002 MOV . ... . ... 007844 _THERE: MOV 007846 ... W4 W0, W1 ; Jump unconditionally ; to 16-bit value in W4
#0x400, W2
; Code execution ; resumes here
W4 PC SR
W4 PC SR
After Instruction 7844 00 7844 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-123
INC
Increment f INC{.B} f {,WREG}
f [0 ... 8191] (f) + 1 destination designated by D DC, N, OV, Z, C 1110 1100 0BDf ffff ffff ffff Add one to the contents of the file register, and place the result in the destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
1 1
INC.B 0x1000 ; Increment 0x1000 (Byte mode)
Before Instruction Data 1000 8FFF SR 0000 Example 2:

INC
After Instruction Data 1000 8F00 SR 0101 (DC, C = 1)

; Increment 0x1000 and store to WREG ; (Word mode)
0x1000, WREG
Before Instruction WREG ABCD Data 1000 8FFF SR 0000
After Instruction WREG 9000 Data 1000 8FFF SR 0108 (DC, N = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-124
INC
Syntax: {label:}
Increment Ws INC{.B} Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Ws [W0 ... W15] Wd [W0 ... W15] (Ws) + 1 Wd DC, N, OV, Z, C 1110 1000 0Bqq qddd dppp ssss Add 1 to the contents of the source register Ws and place the result in the destination register Wd. Register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
1 1
INC.B W1, [++W2] ; Pre-increment W2 ; Increment W1 and store to W2 ; (Byte mode)
Before Instruction W1 FF7F W2 2000 Data 2000 ABCD SR 0000 Example 2:

INC W1, W2
After Instruction W1 FF7F W2 2001 Data 2000 80CD SR 010C (DC, N, OV = 1)

; Increment W1 and store to W2 ; (Word mode)
Before Instruction W1 FF7F W2 2000 SR 0000
After Instruction W1 FF7F W2 FF80 SR 0108 (DC, N = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-125
INC2
Increment f by 2 INC2{.B} f {,WREG}
f [0 ... 8191] (f) + 2 destination designated by D DC, N, OV, Z, C 1110 1100 1BDf ffff ffff ffff Add 2 to the contents of the file register and place the result in the destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
1 1
INC2.B 0x1000 ; Increment 0x1000 by 2 ; (Byte mode)
Before Instruction Data 1000 8FFF SR 0000 Example 2:

INC2
After Instruction Data 1000 8F01 SR 0101 (DC, C = 1)

; Increment 0x1000 by 2 and store to WREG ; (Word mode)
0x1000, WREG
Before Instruction WREG ABCD Data 1000 8FFF SR 0000
After Instruction WREG 9001 Data 1000 8FFF SR 0108 (DC, N = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-126
INC2
Syntax: {label:}
Increment Ws by 2 INC2{.B} Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Ws [W0 ... W15] Wd [W0 ... W15] (Ws) + 2 Wd DC, N, OV, Z, C 1110 1000 1Bqq qddd dppp ssss Add 2 to the contents of the source register Ws and place the result in the destination register Wd. Register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
1 1
INC2.B W1, [++W2] ; Pre-increment W2 ; Increment by 2 and store to W1 ; (Byte mode)
Before Instruction W1 FF7F W2 2000 Data 2000 ABCD SR 0000 Example 2:

INC2 W1, W2
After Instruction W1 FF7F W2 2001 Data 2000 81CD SR 010C (DC, N, OV = 1)

; Increment W1 by 2 and store to W2 ; (word mode)
Before Instruction W1 FF7F W2 2000 SR 0000
After Instruction W1 FF7F W2 FF81 SR 0108 (DC, N = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-127
IOR
{label:} Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description:
Inclusive OR f and WREG IOR{.B} f {,WREG}
f [0 ... 8191] (f).IOR.(WREG) destination designated by D N, Z 1011 0111 0BDf ffff ffff ffff Compute the logical inclusive OR operation of the contents of the working register WREG and the contents of the file register and place the result in the destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
1 1
IOR.B 0x1000 ; IOR WREG to (0x1000) (Byte mode) ; (Byte mode)
Before Instruction WREG 1234 Data 1000 FF00 SR 0000 Example 2:

IOR
After Instruction WREG 1234 Data 1000 FF34 SR 0000

; IOR (0x1000) to WREG ; (Word mode)
0x1000, WREG
Before After Instruction Instruction WREG 1234 WREG 1FBF Data 1000 0FAB Data 1000 0FAB SR 0008 (N = 1) SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-128
IOR
Inclusive OR Literal and Wn IOR{.B} #lit10, Wn
lit10 [0 ... 255] for byte operation lit10 [0 ... 1023] for word operation Wn [W0 ... W15] lit10.IOR.(Wn) Wn N, Z 1011 0011 0Bkk kkkk kkkk dddd Compute the logical inclusive OR operation of the 10-bit literal operand and the contents of the working register Wn and place the result back into the working register Wn. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The k bits specify the literal operand. The d bits select the address of the working register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: For byte operations, the literal must be specified as an unsigned value [0:255]. See Section 4.6 Using 10-bit Literal Operands for information on using 10-bit literal operands in Byte mode.
1 1
IOR.B #0xAA, W9 ; IOR 0xAA to W9 ; (Byte mode)

IOR #0x2AA, W4
After Instruction W9 12BE SR 0008 (N = 1)

; IOR 0x2AA to W4 ; (Word mode)
Before Instruction W4 A34D SR 0000
After Instruction W4 A3EF SR 0008 (N = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-129
IOR
Syntax: {label:}
Inclusive OR Wb and Short Literal IOR{.B} Wb, #lit5, Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Operands:
Wb [W0 ... W15] lit5 [0 ... 31] Wd [W0 ... W15] (Wb).IOR.lit5 Wd N, Z 0111 0www wBqq qddd d11k kkkk Compute the logical inclusive OR operation of the contents of the base register Wb and the 5-bit literal operand and place the result in the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Wd. The w bits select the address of the base register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The k bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
1 1
IOR.B W1, #0x5, [W9++] ; IOR W1 and 0x5 (Byte mode) ; Store to [W9] ; Post-increment W9
Before Instruction W1 AAAA W9 2000 Data 2000 0000 SR 0000 Example 2:

IOR
After Instruction W1 AAAA W9 2001 Data 2000 00AF SR 0008 (N = 1)

; IOR W1 with 0x0 (Word mode) ; Store to W9
W1, #0x0, W9
Before Instruction W1 0000 W9 A34D SR 0000
After Instruction W1 0000 W9 0000 SR 0002 (Z = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-130
IOR
Syntax: {label:}
Inclusive OR Wb and Ws IOR{.B} Wb, Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Operands:
Wb [W0 ... W15] Ws [W0 ... W15] Wd [W0 ... W15] (Wb).IOR.(Ws) Wd N, Z 0111 0www wBqq qddd dppp ssss Compute the logical inclusive OR operation of the contents of the source register Ws and the contents of the base register Wb, and place the result in the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd. The w bits select the address of the base register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
1 1
IOR.B W1, [W5++], [W9++] ; IOR W1 and [W5] (Byte mode) ; Store result to [W9] ; Post-increment W5 and W9
Before Instruction W1 AAAA W5 2000 W9 2400 Data 2000 1155 Data 2400 0000 SR 0000
After Instruction W1 AAAA W5 2001 W9 2401 Data 2000 1155 Data 2400 00FF SR 0008 (N = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-131

Example 2:
IOR W1, W5, W9 ; IOR W1 and W5 (Word mode) ; Store the result to W9
W1 W5 W9 SR
Before Instruction AAAA 5555 A34D 0000
After Instruction W1 AAAA W5 5555 W9 FFFF SR 0008 (N = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-132
LAC
Syntax: {label:}
Load Accumulator LAC Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [--Ws], [++Ws], [Ws+Wb], {#Slit4,} Acc
Operands:
Ws [W0 ... W15] Wb [W0 ... W15] Slit4 [-8 ... +7] Acc [A,B] ShiftSlit4(Extend(Ws)) Acc(A or B) OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB 1100 1010 Awww wrrr rggg ssss Read the contents of the source register, optionally perform a signed 4-bit shift and store the result in the specified accumulator. The shift range is -8:7, where a negative operand indicates an arithmetic left shift and a positive operand indicates an arithmetic right shift. The data stored in the source register is assumed to be 1.15 fractional data and is automatically sign-extended (through bit 39) and zero-backfilled (bits [15:0]), prior to shifting. The A bit specifies the destination accumulator. The w bits specify the offset register Wb. The r bits encode the accumulator pre-shift. The g bits select the source Address mode. The s bits specify the source register Ws. Note: If the operation moves more than sign-extension data into the upper Accumulator register (AccxU), or causes a saturation, the appropriate overflow and saturation bits will be set.
1 1
LAC [W4++], #-3, B ; ; ; ; ; Load ACCB with [W4] << 3 Contents of [W4] do not change Post increment W4 Assume saturation disabled (SATB = 0)
W4 ACCB Data 2000 SR
Before Instruction 2000 00 5125 ABCD 1221 0000
W4 ACCB Data 2000 SR
After Instruction 2002 FF 9108 0000 1221 4800 (OB, OAB = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-133

Example 2:
LAC [--W2], #7, A ; ; ; ; ; Pre-decrement W2 Load ACCA with [W2] >> 7 Contents of [W2] do not change Assume saturation disabled (SATA = 0)
W2 ACCA Data 4000 Data 4002 SR
Before Instruction 4002 00 5125 ABCD 9108 1221 0000
W2 ACCA Data 4000 Data 4002 SR
After Instruction 4000 FF FF22 1000 9108 1221 0000
DS70157C-page 5-134
LNK
Allocate Stack Frame LNK #lit14
lit14 [0 ... 16382] (W14) (TOS) (W15) + 2 W15 (W15) W14 (W15) + lit14 W15 None 1111 1010 00kk kkkk kkkk kkk0 This instruction allocates a Stack Frame of size lit14 bytes for a subroutine calling sequence. The Stack Frame is allocated by PUSHing the contents of the Frame Pointer (W14) onto the stack, storing the updated Stack Pointer (W15) to the Frame Pointer and then incrementing the Stack Pointer by the unsigned 14-bit literal operand. This instruction supports a maximum Stack Frame of 16382 bytes. The k bits specify the size of the Stack Frame. Note: Since the Stack Pointer can only reside on a word boundary, lit14 must be even.

LNK
1 1
#0xA0 ; Allocate a stack frame of 160 bytes
W14 W15 Data 2000 SR
W14 W15 Data 2000 SR
After Instruction 2002 20A2 2000 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-135
LSR
Logical Shift Right f LSR{.B} f {,WREG}
f [0 ... 8191] For byte operation: 0 Dest<7> (f<7:1>) Dest<6:0> (f<0>) C For word operation: 0 Dest<15> (f<15:1>) Dest<14:0> (f<0>) C
0 C
N, Z, C 1101 0101 0BDf ffff ffff ffff Shift the contents of the file register one bit to the right and place the result in the destination register. The Least Significant bit of the file register is shifted into the Carry bit of the STATUS register. Zero is shifted into the Most Significant bit of the destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
1 1
LSR.B 0x600 ; Logically shift right (0x600) by one ; (Byte mode)

LSR 0x600, WREG
After Instruction Data 600 557F SR 0001 (C = 1)

; Logically shift right (0x600) by one ; Store to WREG ; (Word mode)
Before Instruction Data 600 55FF WREG 0000 SR 0000
After Instruction Data 600 55FF WREG 2AFF SR 0001 (C = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-136
LSR
Syntax: {label:}
Logical Shift Right Ws LSR{.B} Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Ws [W0 ... W15] Wd [W0 ... W15] For byte operation: 0 Wd<7> (Ws<7:1>) Wd<6:0> (Ws<0>) C For word operation: 0 Wd<15> (Ws<15:1>) Wd<14:0> (Ws<0>) C
0 C
N, Z, C 1101 0001 0Bqq qddd dppp ssss Shift the contents of the source register Ws one bit to the right, and place the result in the destination register Wd. The Least Significant bit of Ws is shifted into the Carry bit of the STATUS register. Zero is shifted into the Most Significant bit of Wd. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
1 1
LSR.B W0, W1 ; LSR W0 (Byte mode) ; Store result to W1
Before Instruction W0 FF03 W1 2378 SR 0000
After Instruction W0 FF03 W1 2301 SR 0001 (C = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-137

Example 2:
LSR W0, W1 ; LSR W0 (Word mode) ; Store the result to W1
DS70157C-page 5-138
LSR
Logical Shift Right by Short Literal LSR Wb, #lit4, Wnd
Wb [W0 ... W15] lit4 [0 ... 15] Wnd [W0 ... W15] lit4<3:0> Shift_Val 0 Wnd<15:15-Shift_Val + 1> Wb<15:Shift_Val> Wnd<15-Shift_Val:0> N, Z 1101 1110 0www wddd d100 kkkk Logical shift right the contents of the source register Wb by the 4-bit unsigned literal and store the result in the destination register Wnd. Direct addressing must be used for Wb and Wnd. The w bits select the address of the base register. The d bits select the destination register. The k bits provide the literal operand. Note: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
Operation:

LSR
1 1
W4, #14, W5 ; LSR W4 by 14 ; Store result to W5
Before Instruction W4 C800 W5 1200 SR 0000 Example 2:

LSR W4, #1, W5
After Instruction W4 C800 W5 0003 SR 0000

; LSR W4 by 1 ; Store result to W5
Before Instruction W4 0505 W5 F000 SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-139
LSR
Logical Shift Right by Wns LSR Wb, Wns, Wnd
Wb [W0 ... W15] Wns [W0 ...W15] Wnd [W0 ... W15] Wns<4:0> Shift_Val 0 Wnd<15:15-Shift_Val + 1> Wb<15:Shift_Val> Wnd<15 - Shift_Val:0> N, Z 1101 1110 0www wddd d000 ssss Logical shift right the contents of the source register Wb by the 5 Least Significant bits of Wns (only up to 15 positions) and store the result in the destination register Wnd. Direct addressing must be used for Wb and Wnd. The w bits select the address of the base register. The d bits select the destination register. The s bits select the source register. Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only. 2: If Wns is greater than 15, Wnd will be loaded with 0x0.
Operation:

LSR
1 1
W0, W1, W2 ; LSR W0 by W1 ; Store result to W2
Before Instruction W0 C00C W1 0001 W2 2390 SR 0000 Example 2:

LSR W5, W4, W3
After Instruction W0 C00C W1 0001 W2 6006 SR 0000

; LSR W5 by W4 ; Store result to W3
Before Instruction W3 DD43 W4 000C W5 0800 SR 0000
After Instruction W3 0000 W4 000C W5 0800 SR 0002 (Z = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-140
MAC
Syntax: {label:} MAC
Multiply and Accumulate Wm*Wn, Acc {,[Wx], Wxd} {,[Wx] = kx, Wxd} {,[W9 + W12], Wxd} {,[Wy], Wyd} {,[Wy] = ky, Wyd} {,[W11 + W12], Wyd} {,AWB}
{,[Wx] + = kx, Wxd} {,[Wy] + = ky, Wyd}
Operands:
Wm * Wn [W4 * W5, W4 * W6, W4 * W7, W5 * W6, W5 * W7, W6 * W7] Acc [A,B] Wx [W8, W9]; kx [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wxd [W4 ... W7] Wy [W10, W11]; ky [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wyd [W4 ... W7] AWB [W13, [W13] + = 2] (Acc(A or B)) + (Wm) * (Wn) Acc(A or B) ([Wx]) Wxd; (Wx) + kx Wx ([Wy]) Wyd; (Wy) + ky Wy (Acc(B or A)) rounded AWB OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB 1100 0mmm A0xx yyii iijj jjaa Multiply the contents of two working registers, optionally prefetch operands in preparation for another MAC type instruction and optionally store the unspecified accumulator results. The 32-bit result of the signed multiply is sign-extended to 40 bits and added to the specified accumulator. Operands Wx, Wxd, Wy and Wyd specify optional prefetch operations, which support indirect and register offset addressing, as described in Section 4.14.1 MAC Prefetches. Operand AWB specifies the optional store of the other accumulator, as described in Section 4.14.4 MAC Write Back. The m bits select the operand registers Wm and Wn for the multiply. The A bit selects the accumulator for the result. The x bits select the prefetch Wxd destination. The y bits select the prefetch Wyd destination. The i bits select the Wx prefetch operation. The j bits select the Wy prefetch operation. The a bits select the accumulator Write Back destination. Note: The IF bit, CORCON<0>, determines if the multiply is fractional or an integer.
Operation:
Words: Cycles:
1 1
5
DS70157C-page 5-141

Example 1:
MAC W4*W5, A, [W8]+=6, W4, [W10]+=2, W5 ; Multiply W4*W5 and add to ACCA ; Fetch [W8] to W4, Post-increment W8 by 6 ; Fetch [W10] to W5, Post-increment W10 by 2 ; CORCON = 0x00C0 (fractional multiply, normal saturation)
W4 W5 W8 W10 ACCA Data 0A00 Data 1800 CORCON SR Example 2:
Before Instruction A022 B900 0A00 1800 00 1200 0000 2567 909C 00C0 0000
W4 W5 W8 W10 ACCA Data 0A00 Data 1800 CORCON SR
After Instruction 2567 909C 0A06 1802 00 472D 2400 2567 909C 00C0 0000
MAC W4*W5, A, [W8]-=2, W4, [W10]+=2, W5, W13 ; Multiply W4*W5 and add to ACCA ; Fetch [W8] to W4, Post-decrement W8 by 2 ; Fetch [W10] to W5, Post-increment W10 by 2 ; Write Back ACCB to W13 ; CORCON = 0x00D0 (fractional multiply, super saturation)
W4 W5 W8 W10 W13 ACCA ACCB Data 0A00 Data 1800 CORCON SR
Before Instruction 1000 3000 0A00 1800 2000 23 5000 2000 00 0000 8F4C 5BBE C967 00D0 0000
W4 W5 W8 W10 W13 ACCA ACCB Data 0A00 Data 1800 CORCON SR
After Instruction 5BBE C967 09FE 1802 0001 23 5600 2000 00 0000 1F4C 5BBE C967 00D0 8800 (OA, OAB = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-142
MAC
Syntax: {label:} MAC
Square and Accumulate Wm*Wm, Acc {,[Wx], Wxd} {,[Wy], Wyd}
{,[Wx] + = kx, Wxd} {,[Wy] + = ky, Wyd} {,[Wx] = kx, Wxd} {,[Wy] = ky, Wyd} {,[W9 + W12], Wxd} {,[W11 + W12], Wyd} Operands: Wm * Wm [W4 * W4, W5 * W5, W6 * W6, W7 * W7] Acc [A,B] Wx [W8, W9]; kx [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wxd [W4 ... W7] Wy [W10, W11]; ky [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wyd [W4 ... W7] (Acc(A or B)) + (Wm) * (Wm) Acc(A or B) ([Wx]) Wxd; (Wx) + kx Wx ([Wy]) Wyd; (Wy) + ky Wy OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB 1111 00mm A0xx yyii iijj jj00 Square the contents of a working register, optionally prefetch operands in preparation for another MAC type instruction and optionally store the unspecified accumulator results. The 32-bit result of the signed multiply is sign-extended to 40 bits and added to the specified accumulator. Operands Wx, Wxd, Wy and Wyd specify optional prefetch operations, which support indirect and register offset addressing, as described in Section 4.14.1 MAC Prefetches. The m bits select the operand register Wm for the square. The A bit selects the accumulator for the result. The x bits select the prefetch Wxd destination. The y bits select the prefetch Wyd destination. The i bits select the Wx prefetch operation. The j bits select the Wy prefetch operation. Note: Words: Cycles: 1 1 The IF bit, CORCON<0>, determines if the multiply is fractional or an integer.
Operation:
5
DS70157C-page 5-143

Example 1:
MAC W4*W4, B, [W9+W12], W4, [W10]-=2, W5 ; Square W4 and add to ACCB ; Fetch [W9+W12] to W4 ; Fetch [W10] to W5, Post-decrement W10 by 2 ; CORCON = 0x00C0 (fractional multiply, normal saturation)
W4 W5 W9 W10 W12 ACCB Data 0C20 Data 1900 CORCON SR Example 2:
Before Instruction A022 B200 0C00 1900 0020 00 2000 0000 A230 650B 00C0 0000
W4 W5 W9 W10 W12 ACCB Data 0C20 Data 1900 CORCON SR
After Instruction A230 650B 0C00 18FE 0020 00 67CD 0908 A230 650B 00C0 0000
MAC W7*W7, A, [W11]-=2, W7 ; Square W7 and add to ACCA ; Fetch [W11] to W7, Post-decrement W11 by 2 ; CORCON = 0x00D0 (fractional multiply, super saturation)
W7 W11 ACCA Data 2000 CORCON SR
Before Instruction 76AE 2000 FE 9834 4500 23FF 00D0 0000
After Instruction 23FF 1FFE FF 063E 0188 23FF 00D0 8800 (OA, OAB = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-144
MOV
Move f to Destination MOV{.B} f {,WREG}
f [0 ... 8191] (f) destination designated by D N, Z 1011 1111 1BDf ffff ffff ffff Move the contents of the specified file register to the destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored back to the file register and the only effect is to modify the STATUS register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The WREG is set to working register W0. 3: When moving word data from file register memory, the MOV f to Wnd (page 5-147) instruction allows any working register (W0:W15) to be the destination register.
1 1
MOV.B TMR0, WREG ; move (TMR0) to WREG (Byte mode)
Before Instruction WREG (W0) 9080 TMR0 2355 SR 0000 Example 2:

MOV 0x800
After Instruction WREG (W0) 9055 TMR0 2355 SR 0000

; update SR based on (0x800) (Word mode)
Before Instruction Data 0800 B29F SR 0000
After Instruction Data 0800 B29F SR 0008 (N = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-145
MOV
Move WREG to f MOV{.B} WREG, f
f [0 ... 8191] (WREG) f None 1011 0111 1B1f ffff ffff ffff Move the contents of the default working register WREG into the specified file register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte move rather than a word move. You may use a .W extension to denote a word move, but it is not required. 2: The WREG is set to working register W0. 3: When moving word data from the working register array to file register memory, the MOV Wns to f (page 5-148) instruction allows any working register (W0:W15) to be the source register.
1 1
MOV.B WREG, 0x801 ; move WREG to 0x801 (Byte mode)
Before Instruction WREG (W0) 98F3 Data 0800 4509 SR 0000 Example 2:
MOV
After Instruction WREG (W0) 98F3 Data 0800 F309 SR 0008 (N = 1)

; move WREG to DISICNT
WREG, DISICNT
Before Instruction WREG (W0) 00A0 DISICNT 0000 SR 0000
After Instruction WREG (W0) 00A0 DISICNT 00A0 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-146
MOV
Move f to Wnd MOV f, Wnd
f [0 ... 65534] Wnd [W0 ... W15] (f) Wnd None 1000 0fff ffff ffff ffff dddd Move the word contents of the specified file register to Wnd. The file register may reside anywhere in the 32K words of data memory, but must be word-aligned. Register direct addressing must be used for Wnd. The f bits select the address of the file register. The d bits select the destination register. Note 1: This instruction operates on word operands only. 2: Since the file register address must be word-aligned, only the upper 15 bits of the file register address are encoded (bit 0 is assumed to be 0). 3: To move a byte of data from file register memory, the MOV f to Destination instruction (page 5-145) may be used.

MOV
1 1
CORCON, W12 ; move CORCON to W12
Before Instruction W12 78FA CORCON 00F0 SR 0000 Example 2:

MOV
After Instruction W12 00F0 CORCON 00F0 SR 0000

; move (0x27FE) to W3
0x27FE, W3
Before Instruction W3 0035 Data 27FE ABCD SR 0000
After Instruction W3 ABCD Data 27FE ABCD SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-147
MOV
Move Wns to f MOV Wns, f
f [0 ... 65534] Wns [W0 ... W15] (Wns) f None 1000 1fff ffff ffff ffff ssss Move the word contents of the working register Wns to the specified file register. The file register may reside anywhere in the 32K words of data memory, but must be word-aligned. Register direct addressing must be used for Wn. The f bits select the address of the file register. The s bits select the source register. Note 1: This instruction operates on word operands only. 2: Since the file register address must be word-aligned, only the upper 15 bits of the file register address are encoded (bit 0 is assumed to be 0). 3: To move a byte of data to file register memory, the MOV WREG to f instruction (page 5-146) may be used.

MOV
1 1
W4, XMDOSRT ; move W4 to XMODSRT
Before Instruction W4 1200 XMODSRT 1340 SR 0000 Example 2:

MOV
After Instruction W4 1200 XMODSRT 1200 SR 0000

; move W8 to data address 0x1222
W8, 0x1222
Before Instruction W8 F200 Data 1222 FD88 SR 0000
After Instruction W8 F200 Data 1222 F200 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-148
MOV.B
Move 8-bit Literal to Wnd MOV.B #lit8, Wnd
lit8 [0 ... 255] Wnd [W0 ... W15] lit8 Wnd None 1011 0011 1100 kkkk kkkk dddd The unsigned 8-bit literal k is loaded into the lower byte of Wnd. The upper byte of Wnd is not changed. Register direct addressing must be used for Wnd. The k bits specify the value of the literal. The d bits select the address of the working register. Note: This instruction operates in Byte mode and the .B extension must be provided.
1 1
MOV.B #0x17, W5 ; load W5 with #0x17 (Byte mode)

MOV.B #0xFE, W9

; load W9 with #0xFE (Byte mode)
Before Instruction W9 AB23 SR 0000
After Instruction W9 ABFE SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-149
MOV
Move 16-bit Literal to Wnd MOV #lit16, Wnd
lit16 [-32768 ... 65535] Wnd [W0 ... W15] lit16 Wnd None 0010 kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk dddd The 16-bit literal k is loaded into Wnd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wnd. The k bits specify the value of the literal. The d bits select the address of the working register. Note 1: This instruction operates only in Word mode. 2: The literal may be specified as a signed value [-32768:32767], or unsigned value [0:65535].

MOV
1 1
#0x4231, W13 ; load W13 with #0x4231
Before Instruction W13 091B SR 0000 Example 2:

MOV #0x4, W2

; load W2 with #0x4
Before Instruction W2 B004 SR 0000 Example 3:

MOV #-1000, W8

; load W8 with #-1000
Before Instruction W8 23FF SR 0000
After Instruction W8 FC18 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-150
MOV
Move [Ws with offset] to Wnd MOV{.B} [Ws + Slit10], Wnd
Ws [W0 ... W15] Slit10 [-512 ... 511] for byte operation Slit10 [-1024 ... 1022] (even only) for word operation Wnd [W0 ... W15] [Ws + Slit10] Wnd None 1001 0kkk kBkk kddd dkkk ssss The contents of [Ws + Slit10] are loaded into Wnd. In Word mode, the range of Slit10 is increased to [-1024 ... 1022] and Slit10 must be even to maintain word address alignment. Register indirect addressing must be used for the source, and direct addressing must be used for Wnd. The k bits specify the value of the literal. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The d bits select the destination register. The s bits select the source register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte move rather than a word move. You may use a .W extension to denote a word move, but it is not required. 2: In Byte mode, the range of Slit10 is not reduced as specified in Section 4.6 Using 10-bit Literal Operands, since the literal represents an address offset from Ws.
1 1
MOV.B [W8+0x13], W10 ; load W10 with [W8+0x13] ; (Byte mode)
Before Instruction W8 1008 W10 4009 Data 101A 3312 SR 0000 Example 2:
MOV
After Instruction W8 1008 W10 4033 Data 101A 3312 SR 0000

; load W2 with [W4+0x3E8] ; (Word mode)
[W4+0x3E8], W2
Before Instruction W2 9088 W4 0800 Data 0BE8 5634 SR 0000
After Instruction W2 5634 W4 0800 Data 0BE8 5634 SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-151
MOV
Move Wns to [Wd with offset] MOV{.B} Wns, [Wd + Slit10]
Wns [W0 ... W15] Slit10 [-512 ... 511] in Byte mode Slit10 [-1024 ... 1022] (even only) in Word mode Wd [W0 ... W15] (Wns) [Wd + Slit10] None 1001 1kkk kBkk kddd dkkk ssss The contents of Wns are stored to [Wd + Slit10]. In Word mode, the range of Slit10 is increased to [-1024 ... 1022] and Slit10 must be even to maintain word address alignment. Register direct addressing must be used for Wns, and indirect addressing must be used for the destination. The k bits specify the value of the literal. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The d bits select the destination register. The s bits select the address of the destination register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte move rather than a word move. You may use a .W extension to denote a word move, but it is not required. 2: In Byte mode, the range of Slit10 is not reduced as specified in Section 4.6 Using 10-bit Literal Operands, since the literal represents an address offset from Wd.
1 1
MOV.B W0, [W1+0x7] ; store W0 to [W1+0x7] ; (Byte mode)
Before Instruction W0 9015 W1 1800 Data 1806 2345 SR 0000 Example 2:

MOV

; store W11 to [W1-0x400] ; (Word mode)
W11, [W1-0x400]
Before Instruction W1 1000 W11 8813 Data 0C00 FFEA SR 0000
After Instruction W1 1000 W11 8813 Data 0C00 8813 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-152
MOV
Syntax: {label:}
Move Ws to Wd MOV{.B} Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [--Ws], [++Ws], Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [--Wd] [++Wd]
[Ws + Wb], [Wd + Wb] Operands: Ws [W0 ... W15] Wb [W0 ... W15] Wd [W0 ... W15] (Ws) Wd None 0111 1www wBhh hddd dggg ssss Move the contents of the source register into the destination register. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd. The w bits define the offset register Wb. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The h bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The g bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte move rather than a word move. You may use a .W extension to denote a word move, but it is not required. 2: When Register Offset Addressing mode is used for both the source and destination, the offset must be the same because the w encoding bits are shared by Ws and Wd. 3: The instruction PUSH Ws translates to MOV Ws, [W15++]. 4: The instruction POP Wd translates to MOV [--W15], Wd. Words: Cycles: Example 1: 1 1
MOV.B [W0--], W4 ; Move [W0] to W4 (Byte mode) ; Post-decrement W0
Before Instruction W0 0A01 W4 2976 Data 0A00 8988 SR 0000
After Instruction W0 0A00 W4 2989 Data 0A00 8988 SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-153

Example 2:
MOV [W6++], [W2+W3] ; Move [W6] to [W2+W3] (Word mode) ; Post-increment W6
Before Instruction W2 0800 W3 0040 W6 1228 Data 0840 9870 Data 1228 0690 SR 0000
After Instruction W2 0800 W3 0040 W6 122A Data 0840 0690 Data 1228 0690 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-154
MOV.D
Syntax: {label:}
double Word Move from Source to Wnd MOV.D Wns, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wnd
Operands:
Wns [W0, W2, W4 ... W14] Ws [W0 ... W15] Wnd [W0, W2, W4 ... W14] For direct addressing of source: Wns Wnd Wns + 1 Wnd + 1 For indirect addressing of source: See Description None 1011 1110 0000 0ddd 0ppp ssss Move the double word specified by the source to a destination working register pair (Wnd:Wnd + 1). If register direct addressing is used for the source, the contents of two successive working registers (Wns:Wns + 1) are moved to Wnd:Wnd + 1. If indirect addressing is used for the source, Ws specifies the effective address for the least significant word of the double word. Any pre/post-increment or pre/post-decrement will adjust Ws by 4 bytes to accommodate for the double word. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the address of the first source register. Note 1: This instruction only operates on double words. See Figure 4-2 for information on how double words are aligned in memory. 2: Wnd must be an even working register. 3: The instruction POP.D Wnd translates to MOV.D [--W15], Wnd.
Operation:
1 2
MOV.D W2, W6 ; Move W2 to W6 (Double mode)
Before Instruction W2 12FB W3 9877 W6 9833 W7 FCC6 SR 0000
After Instruction W2 12FB W3 9877 W6 12FB W7 9877 SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-155

Example 2:
MOV.D [W7--], W4 ; Move [W7] to W4 (Double mode) ; Post-decrement W7
Before Instruction W4 B012 W5 FD89 W7 0900 Data 0900 A319 Data 0902 9927 SR 0000
After Instruction W4 A319 W5 9927 W7 08FC Data 0900 A319 Data 0902 9927 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-156
MOV.D
Syntax: {label:}
double Word Move from Wns to Destination MOV.D Wns, Wnd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Operands:
Wns [W0, W2, W4 ... W14] Wnd [W0, W2, W4 ... W14] Wd [W0 ... W15] For direct addressing of destination: Wns Wnd Wns + 1 Wnd + 1 For indirect addressing of destination: See Description None 1011 1110 10qq qddd d000 sss0 Move a double word (Wns:Wns + 1) to the specified destination. If register direct addressing is used for the destination, the contents of Wns:Wns + 1 are stored to Wnd:Wnd + 1. If indirect addressing is used for the destination, Wd specifies the effective address for the least significant word of the double word. Any pre/post-increment or pre/post-decrement will adjust Wd by 4 bytes to accommodate for the double word. The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The s bits select the address of the source register pair. Note 1: This instruction operates on double words only. See Figure 4-2 for information on how double words are aligned in memory. 2: Wnd must be an even working register. 3: The instruction PUSH.D Ws translates to MOV.D Wns, [W15++].
Operation:
1 2
MOV.D W10, W0 ; Move W10 to W0 (Double mode)
Before Instruction W0 9000 W1 4322 W10 CCFB W11 0091 SR 0000
After Instruction W0 CCFB W1 0091 W10 CCFB W11 0091 SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-157

Example 2:
MOV.D W4, [--W6] ; Pre-decrement W6 (Double mode) ; Move W4 to [W6]
Before Instruction W4 100A W5 CF12 W6 0804 Data 0800 A319 Data 0802 9927 SR 0000
After Instruction W4 100A W5 CF12 W6 0800 Data 0800 100A Data 0802 CF12 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-158
MOVSAC
Syntax: {label:} MOVSAC
Prefetch Operands and Store Accumulator Acc {,[Wx], Wxd} {,[Wy], Wyd} {,AWB}
{,[Wx] + = kx, Wxd} {,[Wy] + = ky, Wyd} {,[Wx] = kx, Wxd} {,[Wy] = ky, Wyd} {,[W9 + W12], Wxd} {,[W11 + W12], Wyd} Operands: Acc [A,B] Wx [W8, W9]; kx [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wxd [W4 ... W7] Wy [W10, W11]; ky [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wyd [W4 ... W7] AWB [W13, [W13] + = 2] ([Wx]) Wxd; (Wx) + kx Wx ([Wy]) Wyd; (Wy) + ky Wy (Acc(B or A)) rounded AWB None 1100 0111 A0xx yyii iijj jjaa Optionally prefetch operands in preparation for another MAC type instruction and optionally store the unspecified accumulator results. Even though an accumulator operation is not performed in this instruction, an accumulator must be specified to designate which accumulator to write back. Operands Wx, Wxd, Wy and Wyd specify optional prefetch operations which support indirect and register offset addressing, as described in Section 4.14.1 MAC Prefetches. Operand AWB specifies the optional store of the other accumulator, as described in Section 4.14.4 MAC Write Back. The A bit selects the other accumulator used for write back. The x bits select the prefetch Wxd destination. The y bits select the prefetch Wyd destination. The i bits select the Wx prefetch operation. The j bits select the Wy prefetch operation. The a bits select the accumulator Write Back destination. Words: Cycles: Example 1: 1 1
MOVSAC ; Fetch ; Fetch ; Store B, [W9], W6, [W11]+=4, W7, W13 [W9] to W6 [W11] to W7, Post-increment W11 by 4 ACCA to W13
Operation:
W6 W7 W9 W11 W13 ACCA Data 0800 Data 1900 SR
Before Instruction A022 B200 0800 1900 0020 00 3290 5968 7811 B2AF 0000
W6 W7 W9 W11 W13 ACCA Data 0800 Data 1900 SR
After Instruction 7811 B2AF 0800 1904 3290 00 3290 5968 7811 B2AF 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-159

Example 2:
MOVSAC ; Fetch ; Fetch ; Store A, [W9]-=2, W4, [W11+W12], W6, [W13]+=2 [W9] to W4, Post-decrement W9 by 2 [W11+W12] to W6 ACCB to [W13], Post-increment W13 by 2
W4 W6 W9 W11 W12 W13 ACCB Data 1200 Data 2024 Data 2300 SR
Before Instruction 76AE 2000 1200 2000 0024 2300 00 9834 4500 BB00 52CE 23FF 0000
W4 W6 W9 W11 W12 W13 ACCB Data 1200 Data 2024 Data 2300 SR
After Instruction BB00 52CE 11FE 2000 0024 2302 00 9834 4500 BB00 52CE 9834 0000
DS70157C-page 5-160
MPY
Syntax: {label:} MPY
Multiply Wm by Wn to Accumulator Wm * Wn, Acc {,[Wx], Wxd} {,[Wy], Wyd}
{,[Wx] + = kx, Wxd} {,[Wy] + = ky, Wyd} {,[Wx] = kx, Wxd} {,[Wy] = ky, Wyd} {,[W9 + W12], Wxd} {,[W11 + W12], Wyd} Operands: Wm * Wn [W4 * W5, W4 * W6, W4 * W7, W5 * W6, W5 * W7, W6 * W7] Acc [A,B] Wx [W8, W9]; kx [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wxd [W4 ... W7] Wy [W10, W11]; ky [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wyd [W4 ... W7] AWB [W13], [W13] + = 2 (Wm) * (Wn) Acc(A or B) ([Wx]) Wxd; (Wx) + kx Wx ([Wy]) Wyd; (Wy) + ky Wy OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB 1100 0mmm A0xx yyii iijj jj11 Multiply the contents of two working registers, optionally prefetch operands in preparation for another MAC type instruction and optionally store the unspecified accumulator results. The 32-bit result of the signed multiply is sign-extended to 40 bits and stored to the specified accumulator. Operands Wx, Wxd, Wy and Wyd specify optional prefetch operations which support indirect and register offset addressing, as described in Section 4.14.1 MAC Prefetches. The m bits select the operand registers Wm and Wn for the multiply: The A bit selects the accumulator for the result. The x bits select the prefetch Wxd destination. The y bits select the prefetch Wyd destination. The i bits select the Wx prefetch operation. The j bits select the Wy prefetch operation. Note: Words: Cycles: 1 1 The IF bit, CORCON<0>, determines if the multiply is fractional or an integer.
Operation:
5
DS70157C-page 5-161

Example 1:
MPY W4*W5, A, [W8]+=2, W6, [W10]-=2, W7 ; Multiply W4*W5 and store to ACCA ; Fetch [W8] to W6, Post-increment W8 by 2 ; Fetch [W10] to W7, Post-decrement W10 by 2 ; CORCON = 0x0000 (fractional multiply, no saturation)
W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W10 ACCA Data 1780 Data 2400 CORCON SR Example 2:
Before Instruction C000 9000 0800 B200 1780 2400 FF F780 2087 671F E3DC 0000 0000
W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W10 ACCA Data 1780 Data 2400 CORCON SR
After Instruction C000 9000 671F E3DC 1782 23FE 00 3800 0000 671F E3DC 0000 0000
MPY W6*W7, B, [W8]+=2, W4, [W10]-=2, W5 ; Multiply W6*W7 and store to ACCB ; Fetch [W8] to W4, Post-increment W8 by 2 ; Fetch [W10] to W5, Post-decrement W10 by 2 ; CORCON = 0x0000 (fractional multiply, no saturation)
W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W10 ACCB Data 1782 Data 23FE CORCON SR
Before Instruction C000 9000 671F E3DC 1782 23FE 00 9834 4500 8FDC 0078 0000 0000
W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W10 ACCB Data 1782 Data 23FE CORCON SR
After Instruction 8FDC 0078 671F E3DC 1784 23FC FF E954 3748 8FDC 0078 0000 0000
DS70157C-page 5-162
MPY
Syntax: {label:} MPY
Square to Accumulator Wm * Wm, Acc {,[Wx], Wxd} {,[Wy], Wyd}
{,[Wx] + = kx, Wxd} {,[Wy] + = ky, Wyd} {,[Wx] = kx, Wxd} {,[Wy] = ky, Wyd} {,[W9 + W12], Wxd} {,[W11 + W12], Wyd} Operands: Wm * Wm [W4 * W4, W5 * W5, W6 * W6, W7 * W7] Acc [A,B] Wx [W8, W9]; kx [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wxd [W4 ... W7] Wy [W10, W11]; ky [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wyd [W4 ... W7] (Wm) * (Wm) Acc(A or B) ([Wx]) Wxd; (Wx) + kx Wx ([Wy]) Wyd; (Wy) + ky Wy OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB 1111 00mm A0xx yyii iijj jj01 Square the contents of a working register, optionally prefetch operands in preparation for another MAC type instruction and optionally store the unspecified accumulator results. The 32-bit result of the signed multiply is sign-extended to 40 bits and stored in the specified accumulator. Operands Wx, Wxd, Wy and Wyd specify optional prefetch operations which support indirect and register offset addressing, as described in Section 4.14.1 MAC Prefetches. The m bits select the operand register Wm for the square. The A bit selects the accumulator for the result. The x bits select the prefetch Wxd destination. The y bits select the prefetch Wyd destination. The i bits select the Wx prefetch operation. The j bits select the Wy prefetch operation. Note: Words: Cycles: Example 1: 1 1
MPY W6*W6, A, [W9]+=2, W6 ; Square W6 and store to ACCA ; Fetch [W9] to W6, Post-increment W9 by 2 ; CORCON = 0x0000 (fractional multiply, no saturation)
Operation:
The IF bit, CORCON<0>, determines if the multiply is fractional or an integer.
Before Instruction 6500 0900 00 7C80 0908 B865 0000 0000
After Instruction B865 0902 00 4FB2 0000 B865 0000 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-163

Example 2:
MPY W4*W4, B, [W9+W12], W4, [W10]+=2, W5 ; Square W4 and store to ACCB ; Fetch [W9+W12] to W4 ; Fetch [W10] to W5, Post-increment W10 by 2 ; CORCON = 0x0000 (fractional multiply, no saturation)
W4 W5 W9 W10 W12 ACCB Data 1600 Data 1B00 CORCON SR
Before Instruction E228 9000 1700 1B00 FF00 00 9834 4500 8911 F678 0000 0000
W4 W5 W9 W10 W12 ACCB Data 1600 Data 1B00 CORCON SR
After Instruction 8911 F678 1700 1B02 FF00 00 06F5 4C80 8911 F678 0000 0000
DS70157C-page 5-164
MPY.N
Syntax: {label:} MPY.N
Multiply -Wm by Wn to Accumulator Wm * Wn, Acc {,[Wx], Wxd} {,[Wy], Wyd}
{,[Wx] + = kx, Wxd} {,[Wy] + = ky, Wyd} {,[Wx] = kx, Wxd} {,[Wy] = ky, Wyd} {,[W9 + W12], Wxd} {,[W11 + W12], Wyd} Operands: Wm * Wn [W4 * W5; W4 * W6; W4 * W7; W5 * W6; W5 * W7; W6 * W7] Acc [A,B] Wx [W8, W9]; kx [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wxd [W4 ... W7] Wy [W10, W11]; ky [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wyd [W4 ... W7] -(Wm) * (Wn) Acc(A or B) ([Wx]) Wxd; (Wx) + kx Wx ([Wy]) Wyd; (Wy) + ky Wy OA, OB, OAB 1100 0mmm A1xx yyii iijj jj11 Multiply the contents of a working register by the negative of the contents of another working register, optionally prefetch operands in preparation for another MAC type instruction and optionally store the unspecified accumulator results. The 32-bit result of the signed multiply is sign-extended to 40 bits and stored to the specified accumulator. The m bits select the operand registers Wm and Wn for the multiply. The A bit selects the accumulator for the result. The x bits select the prefetch Wxd destination. The y bits select the prefetch Wyd destination. The i bits select the Wx prefetch operation. The j bits select the Wy prefetch operation. Note: Words: Cycles: Example 1: 1 1
MPY.N W4*W5, A, [W8]+=2, W4, [W10]+=2, W5 ; Multiply W4*W5, negate the result and store to ACCA ; Fetch [W8] to W4, Post-increment W8 by 2 ; Fetch [W10] to W5, Post-increment W10 by 2 ; CORCON = 0x0001 (integer multiply, no saturation)
Operation:
The IF bit, CORCON<0>, determines if the multiply is fractional or an integer.
W4 W5 W8 W10 ACCA Data 0B00 Data 2000 CORCON SR
Before Instruction 3023 1290 0B00 2000 00 0000 2387 0054 660A 0001 0000
After Instruction 0054 660A 0B02 2002 FF FC82 7650 0054 660A 0001 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-165

Example 2:
MPY.N W4*W5, A, [W8]+=2, W4, [W10]+=2, W5 ; Multiply W4*W5, negate the result and store to ACCA ; Fetch [W8] to W4, Post-increment W8 by 2 ; Fetch [W10] to W5, Post-increment W10 by 2 ; CORCON = 0x0000 (fractional multiply, no saturation)
Before Instruction 3023 1290 0B00 2000 00 0000 2387 0054 660A 0000 0000
After Instruction 0054 660A 0B02 2002 FF F904 ECA0 0054 660A 0000 0000
DS70157C-page 5-166
MSC
Syntax: {label:} MSC
Multiply and Subtract from Accumulator Wm * Wn, Acc {,[Wx], Wxd} {,[Wy], Wyd} {,AWB}
{,[Wx] + = kx, Wxd} {,[Wy] + = ky, Wyd} {,[Wx] = kx, Wxd} {,[Wy] = ky, Wyd} {,[W9 + W12], Wxd} {,[W11 + W12], Wyd} Operands: Wm * Wn [W4 * W5, W4 * W6, W4 * W7, W5 * W6, W5 * W7, W6 * W7] Acc [A,B] Wx [W8, W9]; kx [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wxd [W4 ... W7] Wy [W10, W11]; ky [-6, -4, -2, 2, 4, 6]; Wyd [W4 ... W7] AWB [W13, [W13] + = 2] (Acc(A or B)) (Wm) * (Wn) Acc(A or B) ([Wx]) Wxd; (Wx) + kx Wx ([Wy]) Wyd; (Wy) + ky Wy (Acc(B or A)) rounded AWB OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB 1100 0mmm A1xx yyii iijj jjaa Multiply the contents of two working registers, optionally prefetch operands in preparation for another MAC type instruction and optionally store the unspecified accumulator results. The 32-bit result of the signed multiply is sign-extended to 40 bits and subtracted from the specified accumulator. Operands Wx, Wxd, Wy and Wyd specify optional prefetch operations which support indirect and register offset addressing as described in Section 4.14.1 MAC Prefetches. Operand AWB specifies the optional store of the other accumulator as described in Section 4.14.4 MAC Write Back. The m bits select the operand registers Wm and Wn for the multiply. The A bit selects the accumulator for the result. The x bits select the prefetch Wxd destination. The y bits select the prefetch Wyd destination. The i bits select the Wx prefetch operation. The j bits select the Wy prefetch operation. The a bits select the accumulator Write Back destination. Note: Words: Cycles: 1 1 The IF bit, CORCON<0>, determines if the multiply is fractional or an integer.
Operation:
5
DS70157C-page 5-167

Example 1:
MSC W6*W7, A, [W8]-=4, W6, [W10]-=4, W7 ; Multiply W6*W7 and subtract the result from ACCA ; Fetch [W8] to W6, Post-decrement W8 by 4 ; Fetch [W10] to W7, Post-decrement W10 by 4 ; CORCON = 0x0001 (integer multiply, no saturation)
W6 W7 W8 W10 ACCA Data 0C00 Data 1C00 CORCON SR Example 2:
Before Instruction 9051 7230 0C00 1C00 00 0567 8000 D309 100B 0001 0000
W6 W7 W8 W10 ACCA Data 0C00 Data 1C00 CORCON SR
After Instruction D309 100B 0BFC 1BFC 00 3738 5ED0 D309 100B 0001 0000
MSC W4*W5, B, [W11+W12], W5, W13 ; Multiply W4*W5 and subtract the result from ACCB ; Fetch [W11+W12] to W5 ; Write Back ACCA to W13 ; CORCON = 0x0000 (fractional multiply, no saturation)
W4 W5 W11 W12 W13 ACCA ACCB Data 2000 CORCON SR
Before Instruction 0500 2000 1800 0800 6233 00 3738 5ED0 00 1000 0000 3579 0000 0000
W4 W5 W11 W12 W13 ACCA ACCB Data 2000 CORCON SR
After Instruction 0500 3579 1800 0800 3738 00 3738 5ED0 00 0EC0 0000 3579 0000 0000
DS70157C-page 5-168
MUL
Integer Unsigned Multiply f and WREG MUL{.B} f
f [0 ... 8191] For byte operation: (WREG)<7:0> * (f)<7:0> W2 For word operation: (WREG) * (f) W2:W3 None 1011 1100 0B0f ffff ffff ffff Multiply the default working register WREG with the specified file register and place the result in the W2:W3 register pair. Both operands and the result are interpreted as unsigned integers. If this instruction is executed in Byte mode, the 16-bit result is stored in W2. In Word mode, the most significant word of the 32-bit result is stored in W3, and the least significant word of the 32-bit result is stored in W2. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The WREG is set to working register W0. 3: The IF bit, CORCON<0>, has no effect on this operation. 4: This is the only instruction, which provides for an 8-bit multiply.
1 1
MUL.B 0x800 ; Multiply (0x800)*WREG (Byte mode)
Before Instruction WREG (W0) 9823 W2 FFFF W3 FFFF Data 0800 2690 SR 0000 Example 2:
MUL TMR1
After Instruction WREG (W0) 9823 W2 13B0 W3 FFFF Data 0800 2690 SR 0000
; Multiply (TMR1)*WREG (Word mode)
Before Instruction WREG (W0) F001 W2 0000 W3 0000 TMR1 3287 SR 0000
After Instruction WREG (W0) F001 W2 C287 W3 2F5E TMR1 3287 SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-169
MUL.SS
Syntax: {label:}
Integer 16x16-bit Signed Multiply MUL.SS Wb, Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wnd
Operands:
Wb [W0 ... W15] Ws [W0 ... W15] Wnd [W0, W2, W4 ... W12] signed (Wb) * signed (Ws) Wnd:Wnd + 1 None 1011 1001 1www wddd dppp ssss Multiply the contents of Wb with the contents of Ws, and store the 32-bit result in two successive working registers. The least significant word of the result is stored in Wnd (which must be an even numbered working register), and the most significant word of the result is stored in Wnd + 1. Both source operands and the result Wnd are interpreted as twos complement signed integers. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb and Wnd. Register direct or register indirect addressing may be used for Ws. The w bits select the address of the base register. The d bits select the address of the lower destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only. 2: Since the product of the multiplication is 32 bits, Wnd must be an even working register. See Figure 4-2 for information on how double words are aligned in memory. 3: Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero. 4: The IF bit, CORCON<0>, has no effect on this operation.
1 1
MUL.SS W0, W1, W12 ; Multiply W0*W1 ; Store the result to W12:W13
Before Instruction W0 9823 W1 67DC W12 FFFF W13 FFFF SR 0000
After Instruction W0 9823 W1 67DC W12 D314 W13 D5DC SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-170

Example 2:
MUL.SS W2, [--W4], W0 ; Pre-decrement W4 ; Multiply W2*[W4] ; Store the result to W0:W1
Before Instruction W0 FFFF W1 FFFF W2 0045 W4 27FE Data 27FC 0098 SR 0000
After Instruction W0 28F8 W1 0000 W2 0045 W4 27FC Data 27FC 0098 SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-171
MUL.SU
Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned Short Literal Multiply MUL.SU Wb, #lit5, Wnd
Wb [W0 ... W15] lit5 [0 ... 31] Wnd [W0, W2, W4 ... W12] signed (Wb) * unsigned lit5 Wnd:Wnd + 1 None 1011 1001 0www wddd d11k kkkk Multiply the contents of Wb with the 5-bit literal, and store the 32-bit result in two successive working registers. The least significant word of the result is stored in Wnd (which must be an even numbered working register), and the most significant word of the result is stored in Wnd + 1. The Wb operand and the result Wnd are interpreted as a twos complement signed integer. The literal is interpreted as an unsigned integer. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb and Wnd. The w bits select the address of the base register. The d bits select the address of the lower destination register. The k bits define a 5-bit unsigned integer literal. Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only. 2: Since the product of the multiplication is 32 bits, Wnd must be an even working register. See Figure 4-2 for information on how double words are aligned in memory. 3: Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero. 4: The IF bit, CORCON<0>, has no effect on this operation.
1 1
MUL.SU W0, #0x1F, W2 ; Multiply W0 by literal 0x1F ; Store the result to W2:W3
Before Instruction W0 C000 W2 1234 W3 C9BA SR 0000
After Instruction W0 C000 W2 4000 W3 FFF8 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-172

Example 2:
MUL.SU W2, #0x10, W0 ; Multiply W2 by literal 0x10 ; Store the result to W0:W1
Before Instruction W0 ABCD W1 89B3 W2 F240 SR 0000
After Instruction W0 2400 W1 000F W2 F240 SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-173
MUL.SU
Syntax: {label:}
Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned Multiply MUL.SU Wb, Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wnd
Operands:
Wb [W0 ... W15] Ws [W0 ... W15] Wnd [W0, W2, W4 ... W12] signed (Wb) * unsigned (Ws) Wnd:Wnd + 1 None 1011 1001 0www wddd dppp ssss Multiply the contents of Wb with the contents of Ws, and store the 32-bit result in two successive working registers. The least significant word of the result is stored in Wnd (which must be an even numbered working register), and the most significant word of the result is stored in Wnd + 1. The Wb operand and the result Wnd are interpreted as a twos complement signed integer. The Ws operand is interpreted as an unsigned integer. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb and Wnd. Register direct or register indirect addressing may be used for Ws. The w bits select the address of the base register. The d bits select the address of the lower destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only. 2: Since the product of the multiplication is 32 bits, Wnd must be an even working register. See Figure 4-2 for information on how double words are aligned in memory. 3: Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero. 4: The IF bit, CORCON<0>, has no effect on this operation.
1 1
MUL.SU W8, [W9], W0 ; Multiply W8*[W9] ; Store the result to W0:W1
Before Instruction W0 68DC W1 AA40 W8 F000 W9 178C Data 178C F000 SR 0000
After Instruction W0 0000 W1 F100 W8 F000 W9 178C Data 178C F000 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-174

Example 2:
MUL.SU W2, [++W3], W4 ; Pre-Increment W3 ; Multiply W2*[W3] ; Store the result to W4:W5
Before Instruction W2 0040 W3 0280 W4 1819 W5 2021 Data 0282 0068 SR 0000
After Instruction W2 0040 W3 0282 W4 1A00 W5 0000 Data 0282 0068 SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-175
MUL.US
Syntax: {label:}
Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned-Signed Multiply MUL.US Wb, Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wnd
Operands:
Wb [W0 ... W15] Ws [W0 ... W15] Wnd [W0, W2, W4 ... W12] unsigned (Wb) * signed (Ws) Wnd:Wnd + 1 None 1011 1000 1www wddd dppp ssss Multiply the contents of Wb with the contents of Ws, and store the 32-bit result in two successive working registers. The least significant word of the result is stored in Wnd (which must be an even numbered working register), and the most significant word of the result is stored in Wnd + 1. The Wb operand is interpreted as an unsigned integer. The Ws operand and the result Wnd are interpreted as a twos complement signed integer. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb and Wnd. Register direct or register indirect addressing may be used for Ws. The w bits select the address of the base register. The d bits select the address of the lower destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only. 2: Since the product of the multiplication is 32 bits, Wnd must be an even working register. See Figure 4-2 for information on how double words are aligned in memory. 3: Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero. 4: The IF bit, CORCON<0>, has no effect on this operation.
1 1
MUL.US W0, [W1], W2 ; Multiply W0*[W1] (unsigned-signed) ; Store the result to W2:W3
Before Instruction W0 C000 W1 2300 W2 00DA W3 CC25 Data 2300 F000 SR 0000
After Instruction W0 C000 W1 2300 W2 0000 W3 F400 Data 2300 F000 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-176

Example 2:
MUL.US W6, [W5++], W10 ; Mult. W6*[W5] (unsigned-signed) ; Store the result to W10:W11 ; Post-Increment W5
Before Instruction W5 0C00 W6 FFFF W10 0908 W11 6EEB Data 0C00 7FFF SR 0000
After Instruction W5 0C02 W6 FFFF W10 8001 W11 7FFE Data 0C00 7FFF SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-177
MUL.UU
Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Short Literal Multiply MUL.UU Wb, #lit5, Wnd
Wb [W0 ... W15] lit5 [0 ... 31] Wnd [W0, W2, W4 ... W12] unsigned (Wb) * unsigned lit5 Wnd:Wnd + 1 None 1011 1000 0www wddd d11k kkkk Multiply the contents of Wb with the 5-bit literal, and store the 32-bit result in two successive working registers. The least significant word of the result is stored in Wnd (which must be an even numbered working register), and the most significant word of the result is stored in Wnd + 1. Both operands and the result are interpreted as unsigned integers. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb and Wnd. The w bits select the address of the base register. The d bits select the address of the lower destination register. The k bits define a 5-bit unsigned integer literal. Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only. 2: Since the product of the multiplication is 32 bits, Wnd must be an even working register. See Figure 4-2 for information on how double words are aligned in memory. 3: Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero. 4: The IF bit, CORCON<0>, has no effect on this operation.
1 1
MUL.UU W0, #0xF, W12 ; Multiply W0 by literal 0xF ; Store the result to W12:W13
Before Instruction W0 2323 W12 4512 W13 7821 SR 0000 Example 2:

MUL.UU
After Instruction W0 2323 W12 0F0D W13 0002 SR 0000

; Multiply W7 by literal 0x1F ; Store the result to W0:W1
W7, #0x1F, W0
Before Instruction W0 780B W1 3805 W7 F240 SR 0000
After Instruction W0 55C0 W1 001D W7 F240 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-178
MUL.UU
Syntax: {label:}
Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Multiply MUL.UU Wb, Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wnd
Operands:
Wb [W0 ... W15] Ws [W0 ... W15] Wnd [W0, W2, W4 ... W12] unsigned (Wb) * unsigned (Ws) Wnd:Wnd + 1 None 1011 1000 0www wddd dppp ssss Multiply the contents of Wb with the contents of Ws, and store the 32-bit result in two successive working registers. The least significant word of the result is stored in Wnd (which must be an even numbered working register), and the most significant word of the result is stored in Wnd + 1. Both source operands and the result are interpreted as unsigned integers. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb and Wnd. Register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws. The w bits select the address of the base register. The d bits select the address of the lower destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only. 2: Since the product of the multiplication is 32 bits, Wnd must be an even working register. See Figure 4-2 for information on how double words are aligned in memory. 3: Wnd may not be W14, since W15<0> is fixed to zero. 4: The IF bit, CORCON<0>, has no effect on this operation.
1 1
MUL.UU W4, W0, W2 ; Multiply W4*W0 (unsigned-unsigned) ; Store the result to W2:W3
Before Instruction W0 FFFF W2 2300 W3 00DA W4 FFFF SR 0000
After Instruction W0 FFFF W2 0001 W3 FFFE W4 FFFF SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-179

Example 2:
MUL.UU W0, [W1++], W4
; Mult. W0*[W1] (unsigned-unsigned) ; Store the result to W4:W5 ; Post-Increment W1
Before Instruction W0 1024 W1 2300 W4 9654 W5 BDBC Data 2300 D625 SR 0000
After Instruction W0 1024 W1 2302 W4 6D34 W5 0D80 Data 2300 D625 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-180
NEG
Negate f NEG{.B} f {,WREG}
f [0 ... 8191] (f) + 1 destination designated by D DC, N, OV, Z, C 1110 1110 0BDf ffff ffff ffff Compute the twos complement of the contents of the file register and place the result in the destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
1 1
NEG.B 0x880, WREG ; Negate (0x880) (Byte mode) ; Store result to WREG
Before Instruction WREG (W0) 9080 Data 0880 2355 SR 0000 Example 2:
NEG 0x1200
After Instruction WREG (W0) 90AB Data 0880 2355 SR 0008 (N = 1)

; Negate (0x1200) (Word mode)
After Instruction Data 1200 76DD SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-181
NEG
Syntax: {label:}
Negate Ws NEG{.B} Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Ws [W0 ... W15] Wd [W0 ... W15] (Ws) + 1 Wd DC, N, OV, Z, C 1110 1010 0Bqq qddd dppp ssss Compute the twos complement of the contents of the source register Ws and place the result in the destination register Wd. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for both Ws and Wd. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.

NEG.B
1 1
W3, [W4++] ; Negate W3 and store to [W4] (Byte mode) ; Post-increment W4

NEG
After Instruction W3 7839 W4 1006 Data 1004 C755 SR 0008 (N = 1)

; Pre-decrement W4 (Word mode) ; Negate [W2] and store to [W4] ; Post-increment W2
[W2++], [--W4]
Before Instruction W2 0900 W4 1002 Data 0900 870F Data 1000 5105 SR 0000
After Instruction W2 0902 W4 1000 Data 0900 870F Data 1000 78F1 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-182
NEG
Negate Accumulator NEG Acc
If (Acc = A): -ACCA ACCA Else: -ACCB ACCB OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB 1100 1011 A001 0000 0000 0000 Compute the twos complement of the contents of the specified accumulator. Regardless of the Saturation mode, this instruction operates on all 40 bits of the accumulator. The A bit specifies the selected accumulator. 1 1
NEG A ; Negate ACCA ; Store result to ACCA ; CORCON = 0x0000 (no saturation)
ACCA CORCON SR Example 2:

NEG
Before Instruction 00 3290 59C8 0000 0000

B
ACCA CORCON SR
After Instruction FF CD6F A638 0000 0000
; Negate ACCB ; Store result to ACCB ; CORCON = 0x00C0 (normal saturation)
ACCB CORCON SR
Before Instruction FF F230 10DC 00C0 0000
ACCB CORCON SR
After Instruction 00 0DCF EF24 00C0 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-183
NOP
Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Words: Cycles: Example 1:
NOP
No Operation {label:} None No Operation None 0000 0000 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx No Operation is performed. The x bits can take any value. 1 1
; execute no operation
NOP
PC SR Example 2:
NOP
PC SR
Before Instruction 00 08AE 0000
After Instruction PC 00 08B0 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-184
NOPR
Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: Words: Cycles: Example 1: {label:} None
No Operation NOPR
No Operation None 1111 1111 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx No Operation is performed. The x bits can take any value. 1 1
NOPR ; execute no operation
PC SR Example 2:
NOPR
PC SR
5
DS70157C-page 5-185
POP
Pop TOS to f POP f
f [0 ... 65534] (W15) 2 W15 (TOS) f None 1111 1001 ffff ffff ffff fff0 The Stack Pointer (W15) is pre-decremented by 2 and the Top-of-Stack (TOS) word is written to the specified file register, which may reside anywhere in the lower 32K words of data memory. The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only. 2: The file register address must be word-aligned.

POP
1 1
0x1230 ; Pop TOS to 0x1230
Before Instruction W15 1006 Data 1004 A401 Data 1230 2355 SR 0000 Example 2:
POP 0x880
After Instruction W15 1004 Data 1004 A401 Data 1230 A401 SR 0000
; Pop TOS to 0x880
Before Instruction W15 2000 Data 0880 E3E1 Data 1FFE A090 SR 0000
After Instruction W15 1FFE Data 0880 A090 Data 1FFE A090 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-186
POP
Syntax: {label:}
Pop TOS to Wd POP Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [--Wd] [++Wd] [Wd+Wb]
Wd [W0 ... W15] Wb [W0 ... W15] (W15) 2 W15 (TOS) Wd None 0111 1www w0hh hddd d100 1111 The Stack Pointer (W15) is pre-decremented by 2 and the Top-of-Stack (TOS) word is written to Wd. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Wd. The w bits define the offset register Wb. The h bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only. 2: This instruction is a specific version of the MOV Ws, Wd instruction (MOV [--W15], Wd). It reverse assembles as MOV.

POP
1 1
W4 ; Pop TOS to W4
Before Instruction W4 EDA8 W15 1008 Data 1006 C45A SR 0000 Example 2:
POP [++W10]
After Instruction W4 C45A W15 1006 Data 1006 C45A SR 0000

; Pre-increment W10 ; Pop TOS to [W10]
Before Instruction W10 0E02 W15 1766 Data 0E04 E3E1 Data 1764 C7B5 SR 0000
After Instruction W10 0E04 W15 1764 Data 0E04 C7B5 Data 1764 C7B5 SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-187
POP.D
Double Pop TOS to Wnd:Wnd+1 POP.D Wnd
Wnd [W0, W2, W4, ... W14] (W15) 2 W15 (TOS) Wnd + 1 (W15) 2 W15 (TOS) Wnd None 1011 1110 0000 0ddd 0100 1111 A double word is POPped from the Top-of-Stack (TOS) and stored to Wnd:Wnd + 1. The most significant word is stored to Wnd + 1, and the least significant word is stored to Wnd. Since a double word is POPped, the Stack Pointer (W15) gets decremented by 4. The d bits select the address of the destination register pair. Note 1: This instruction operates on double words. See Figure 4-2 for information on how double words are aligned in memory. 2: Wnd must be an even working register. 3: This instruction is a specific version of the MOV.D Ws, Wnd instruction (MOV.D [--W15], Wnd). It reverse assembles as MOV.D.
1 2
POP.D W6 ; Double pop TOS to W6
Before Instruction W6 07BB W7 89AE W15 0850 Data 084C 3210 Data 084E 7654 SR 0000 Example 2:
POP.D W0
After Instruction W6 3210 W7 7654 W15 084C Data 084C 3210 Data 084E 7654 SR 0000
; Double pop TOS to W0
Before Instruction W0 673E W1 DD23 W15 0BBC Data 0BB8 791C Data 0BBA D400 SR 0000
After Instruction W0 791C W1 D400 W15 0BB8 Data 0BB8 791C Data 0BBA D400 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-188
POP.S
Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: {label:} None
Pop Shadow Registers POP.S
POP shadow registers DC, N, OV, Z, C 1111 1110 1000 0000 0000 0000 The values in the shadow registers are copied into their respective primary registers. The following registers are affected: W0-W3, and the C, Z, OV, N and DC STATUS register flags. Note 1: The shadow registers are not directly accessible. They may only be accessed with PUSH.S and POP.S. 2: The shadow registers are only one-level deep.
1 1
POP.S ; Pop the shadow registers ; (See PUSH.S Example 1 for contents of shadows)
Before Instruction W0 07BB W1 03FD W2 9610 W3 7249 SR 00E0 (IPL = 7) Note:
After Instruction W0 0000 W1 1000 W2 2000 W3 3000 SR 00E1 (IPL = 7, C = 1)
After instruction execution, contents of shadow registers are NOT modified.
5
DS70157C-page 5-189
PUSH
Push f to TOS PUSH f
f [0 ... 65534] (f) (TOS) (W15) + 2 W15 None 1111 1000 ffff ffff ffff fff0 The contents of the specified file register are written to the Top-of-Stack (TOS) location and then the Stack Pointer (W15) is incremented by 2. The file register may reside anywhere in the lower 32K words of data memory. The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only. 2: The file register address must be word-aligned.

PUSH
1 1
0x2004 ; Push (0x2004) to TOS
Before Instruction W15 0B00 Data 0B00 791C Data 2004 D400 SR 0000 Example 2:
PUSH 0xC0E
After Instruction W15 0B02 Data 0B00 D400 Data 2004 D400 SR 0000
; Push (0xC0E) to TOS
Before Instruction W15 0920 Data 0920 0000 Data 0C0E 67AA SR 0000
After Instruction W15 0922 Data 0920 67AA Data 2004 67AA SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-190
PUSH
Syntax: {label:}
Push Ws to TOS PUSH Ws [Ws] [Ws++] [Ws--] [--Ws] [++Ws] [Ws+Wb]
Ws [W0 ... W15] Wb [W0 ... W15] (Ws) (TOS) (W15) + 2 W15 None 0111 1www w001 1111 1ggg ssss The contents of Ws are written to the Top-of-Stack (TOS) location and then the Stack Pointer (W15) is incremented by 2. The w bits define the offset register Wb. The g bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only. 2: This instruction is a specific version of the MOV Ws, Wd instruction (MOV Ws, [W15++]). It reverse assembles as MOV.

PUSH
1 1
W2 ; Push W2 to TOS
PUSH [W5+W10]

; Push [W5+W10] to TOS
Before Instruction W5 1200 W10 0044 W15 0806 Data 0806 216F Data 1244 B20A SR 0000
After Instruction W5 1200 W10 0044 W15 0808 Data 0806 B20A Data 1244 B20A SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-191
PUSH.D
Double Push Wns:Wns+1 to TOS PUSH.D Wns
Wns [W0, W2, W4 ... W14] (Wns) (TOS) (W15) + 2 W15 (Wns + 1) (TOS) (W15) + 2 W15 None 1011 1110 1001 1111 1000 sss0 A double word (Wns:Wns + 1) is PUSHed to the Top-of-Stack (TOS). The least significant word (Wns) is PUSHed to the TOS first, and the most significant word (Wns + 1) is PUSHed to the TOS last. Since a double word is PUSHed, the Stack Pointer (W15) gets incremented by 4. The s bits select the address of the source register pair. Note 1: This instruction operates on double words. See Figure 4-2 for information on how double words are aligned in memory. 2: Wns must be an even working register. 3: This instruction is a specific version of the MOV.D Wns, Wd instruction (MOV.D Wns, [W15++]). It reverse assembles as MOV.D.
1 2
PUSH.D W6 ; Push W6:W7 to TOS
Before Instruction W6 C451 W7 3380 W15 1240 Data 1240 B004 Data 1242 0891 SR 0000 Example 2:
PUSH.D W10
After Instruction W6 C451 W7 3380 W15 1244 Data 1240 C451 Data 1242 3380 SR 0000
; Push W10:W11 to TOS
Before Instruction W10 80D3 W11 4550 W15 0C08 Data 0C08 79B5 Data 0C0A 008E SR 0000
After Instruction W10 80D3 W11 4550 W15 0C0C Data 0C08 80D3 Data 0C0A 4550 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-192
PUSH.S
Syntax: Operands: Operation: Status Affected: Encoding: Description: {label:} None
Push Shadow Registers PUSH.S
PUSH shadow registers None 1111 1110 1010 0000 0000 0000 The contents of the primary registers are copied into their respective shadow registers. The following registers are shadowed: W0-W3, and the C, Z, OV, N and DC STATUS register flags. Note 1: The shadow registers are not directly accessible. They may only be accessed with PUSH.S and POP.S. 2: The shadow registers are only one-level deep.
1 1
PUSH.S ; Push primary registers into shadow registers
Before Instruction W0 0000 W1 1000 W2 2000 W3 3000 SR 0001 (C = 1) Note:
After Instruction W0 0000 W1 1000 W2 2000 W3 3000 SR 0001 (C = 1)
After an instruction execution, contents of the shadow registers are updated.
5
DS70157C-page 5-193
PWRSAV
Syntax: Operands: Operation: {label:} lit1 [0,1]
Enter Power Saving Mode PWRSAV #lit1
0 WDT count register 0 WDT prescaler A count 0 WDT prescaler B count 0 WDTO (RCON<4>) 0 SLEEP (RCON<3>) 0 IDLE (RCON<2>) If (lit1 = 0): Enter Sleep mode Else: Enter Idle mode None 1111 1110 0100 0000 0000 000k Place the processor into the specified Power Saving mode. If lit1 = 0, Sleep mode is entered. In Sleep mode, the clock to the CPU and peripherals are shutdown. If an on-chip oscillator is being used, it is also shutdown. If lit1 = 1, Idle mode is entered. In Idle mode, the clock to the CPU shuts down, but the clock source remains active and the peripherals continue to operate. This instruction resets the Watchdog Timer Count register and the Prescaler Count registers. In addition, the WDTO, Sleep and Idle flags of the Reset System and Control (RCON) register are reset. Note 1: The processor will exit from Idle or Sleep through an interrupt, processor Reset or Watchdog Time-out. See the dsPIC30F Data Sheet for details. 2: If awakened from Idle mode, Idle (RCON<2>) is set to 1 and the clock source is applied to the CPU. 3: If awakened from Sleep mode, Sleep (RCON<3>) is set to 1 and the clock source is started. 4: If awakened from a Watchdog Time-out, WDTO (RCON<4>) is set to 1.
1 1
PWRSAV #0 ; Enter SLEEP mode
Before Instruction SR 0040 (IPL = 2) Example 2:

PWRSAV #1
After Instruction SR 0040 (IPL = 2)
; Enter IDLE mode
Before Instruction SR 0020 (IPL = 1)
After Instruction SR 0020 (IPL = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-194
RCALL
Relative Call RCALL Expr
Expr may be an absolute address, label or expression. Expr is resolved by the linker to a Slit16, where Slit16 [-32768 ... 32767]. (PC) + 2 PC (PC<15:0>) (TOS) (W15) + 2 W15 (PC<22:16>) (TOS) (W15) + 2 W15 (PC) + (2 * Slit16) PC NOP Instruction Register None 0000 0111 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn Relative subroutine call with a range of 32K program words forward or back from the current PC. Before the call is made, the return address (PC + 2) is PUSHed onto the stack. After the return address is stacked, the sign-extended 17-bit value (2 * Slit16) is added to the contents of the PC and the result is stored in the PC. The n bits are a signed literal that specifies the size of the relative call (in program words) from (PC + 2). Note: When possible, this instruction should be used instead of CALL, since it only consumes one word of program memory.
1 2
012004 012006 . . 012458 _Task1: 01245A RCALL ADD ... ... SUB ... _Task1 W0, W1, W2 W0, W2, W3 ; Call _Task1
; _Task1 subroutine
PC W15 Data 0810 Data 0812 SR Example 2:
Before Instruction 01 2004 0810 FFFF FFFF 0000

RCALL MOV ... ... CLR ...

; Call _Init
00620E 006210 . . 007000 _Init: 007002
_Init W0, [W4++] W2
; _Init subroutine
5
PC W15 Data 0C50 Data 0C52 SR
Before Instruction 00 620E 0C50 FFFF FFFF 0000
PC W15 Data 0C50 Data 0C52 SR
After Instruction 00 7000 0C54 6210 0000 0000
DS70157C-page 5-195
RCALL
Computed Relative Call RCALL Wn
Wn [W0 ... W15] (PC) + 2 PC (PC<15:0>) (TOS) (W15) + 2 W15 (PC<22:16>) (TOS) (W15) + 2 W15 (PC) + (2 * (Wn)) PC NOP Instruction Register None 0000 0001 0010 0000 0000 ssss Computed, relative subroutine call specified by the working register Wn. The range of the call is 32K program words forward or back from the current PC. Before the call is made, the return address (PC + 2) is PUSHed onto the stack. After the return address is stacked, the sign-extended 17-bit value (2 * (Wn)) is added to the contents of the PC and the result is stored in the PC. Register direct addressing must be used for Wn. The s bits select the source register. 1 2
00FF8C 00FF8E . . 010008 01000A 01000C EX1: INC ... ... ... RCALL MOVE W2, W3 ; Destination of RCALL
W6 W4, [W10]
; RCALL with W6
PC W6 W15 Data 1004 Data 1006 SR Example 2:
Before Instruction 01 000A FFC0 1004 98FF 2310 0000

RCALL FF1L ... ... CLR ...
PC W6 W15 Data 1004 Data 1006 SR

W2 W0, W1
After Instruction 00 FF8C FFC0 1008 000C 0001 0000

; RCALL with W2
000302 000304 . . 000450 000452
EX2:
W2
; Destination of RCALL
Before Instruction 00 0302 00A6 1004 32BB 901A 0000
After Instruction 00 0450 00A6 1008 0304 0000 0000
DS70157C-page 5-196
REPEAT
Repeat Next Instruction lit14+1 Times REPEAT #lit14
lit14 [0 ... 16383] (lit14) RCOUNT (PC) + 2 PC Enable Code Looping RA 0000 1001 00kk kkkk kkkk kkkk Repeat the instruction immediately following the REPEAT instruction (lit14 + 1) times. The repeated instruction (or target instruction) is held in the instruction register for all iterations and is only fetched once. When this instruction executes, the RCOUNT register is loaded with the repeat count value specified in the instruction. RCOUNT is decremented with each execution of the target instruction. When RCOUNT equals zero, the target instruction is executed one more time, and then normal instruction execution continues with the instruction following the target instruction. The k bits are an unsigned literal that specifies the loop count. Special Features, Restrictions: 1. When the repeat literal is 0, REPEAT has the effect of a NOP and the RA bit is not set. 2. The target REPEAT instruction can NOT be: an instruction that changes program flow a DO, DISI, LNK, MOV.D, PWRSAV, REPEAT or UNLK instruction a 2-word instruction Unexpected results may occur if these target instructions are used. Note: The REPEAT and target instruction are interruptible.
1 1
000452 000454 REPEAT #9 ADD [W0++], W1, [W2++] ; Execute ADD 10 times ; Vector update
PC RCOUNT SR Example 2:

REPEAT CLR
After Instruction PC 00 0454 RCOUNT 0009 SR 0010 (RA = 1)

#0x3FF [W6++] ; Execute CLR 1024 times ; Clear the scratch space
00089E 0008A0
5
PC RCOUNT SR
Before Instruction 00 089E 0000 0000
After Instruction PC 00 08A0 RCOUNT 03FF SR 0010 (RA = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-197
REPEAT
Repeat Next Instruction Wn+1 Times REPEAT Wn
Wn [W0 ... W15] (Wn<13:0>) RCOUNT (PC) + 2 PC Enable Code Looping RA 0000 1001 1000 0000 0000 ssss Repeat the instruction immediately following the REPEAT instruction (Wn<13:0>) times. The instruction to be repeated (or target instruction) is held in the instruction register for all iterations and is only fetched once. When this instruction executes, the RCOUNT register is loaded with the lower 14 bits of Wn. RCOUNT is decremented with each execution of the target instruction. When RCOUNT equals zero, the target instruction is executed one more time, and then normal instruction execution continues with the instruction following the target instruction. The s bits specify the Wn register that contains the repeat count. Special Features, Restrictions: 1. When (Wn) = 0, REPEAT has the effect of a NOP and the RA bit is not set. 2. The target REPEAT instruction can NOT be: an instruction that changes program flow a DO, DISI, LNK, MOV.D, PWRSAV, REPEAT or ULNK instruction a 2-word instruction Unexpected results may occur if these target instructions are used. Note: The REPEAT and target instruction are interruptible.
1 1
000A26 000A28 REPEAT COM W4 [W0++], [W2++] ; Execute COM (W4+1) times ; Vector complement
PC W4 RCOUNT SR
Before Instruction 00 0A26 0023 0000 0000
PC W4 RCOUNT SR
After Instruction 00 0A28 0023 0023 0010 (RA = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-198

Example 2:
00089E 0008A0 REPEAT TBLRDL W10 ; Execute TBLRD (W10+1) times [W2++], [W3++] ; Decrement (0x840)
PC W10 RCOUNT SR
Before Instruction 00 089E 00FF 0000 0000
After Instruction PC 00 08A0 W10 00FF RCOUNT 00FF SR 0010 (RA = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-199
RESET
Reset RESET
Force all registers that are affected by a MCLR Reset to their Reset condition. 1 SWR (RCON<6>) 0 PC OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB, DA, DC, IPL<2:0>, RA, N, OV, Z, C 1111 1110 0000 0000 0000 0000 This instruction provides a way to execute a software Reset. All core and peripheral registers will take their power-on value. The PC will be set to 0, the location of the RESET GOTO instruction. The SWR bit, RCON<6>, will be set to 1 to indicate that the RESET instruction was executed. Note: Refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference (DS70046) for the power-on value of all registers. Manual
1 1
00202A RESET ; Execute software RESET
PC W0 W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 W10 W11 W12 W13 W14 W15 SPLIM TBLPAG PSVPAG CORCON RCON SR
Before After Instruction Instruction 00 202A PC 00 0000 8901 W0 0000 08BB W1 0000 B87A W2 0000 872F W3 0000 C98A W4 0000 AAD4 W5 0000 981E W6 0000 1809 W7 0000 C341 W8 0000 90F4 W9 0000 F409 W10 0000 1700 W11 0000 1008 W12 0000 6556 W13 0000 231D W14 0000 1704 W15 0800 1800 SPLIM 0000 007F TBLPAG 0000 0001 PSVPAG 0000 00F0 CORCON 0020 (SATDW = 1) 0000 RCON 0040 (SWR = 1) 0021 (IPL, C = 1) SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-200
RETFIE
Return from Interrupt RETFIE
(W15) - 2 W15 (TOS<15:8>) (SR<7:0>) (TOS<7>) (IPL3, CORCON<3>) (TOS<6:0>) (PC<22:16>) (W15) - 2 W15 (TOS<15:0>) (PC<15:0>) NOP Instruction Register IPL<3:0>, RA, N, OV, Z, C 0000 0110 0100 0000 0000 0000 Return from Interrupt Service Routine. The stack is POPped, which loads the low byte of the STATUS register, IPL<3> (CORCON<3>) and the Most Significant Byte of the PC. The stack is POPped again, which loads the lower 16 bits of the PC. Note 1: Restoring IPL<3> and the low byte of the STATUS register restores the Interrupt Priority Level to the level before the execution was processed. 2: Before RETFIE is executed, the appropriate interrupt flag must be cleared in software to avoid recursive interrupts.
1 3 (2 if exception pending)
000A26 RETFIE ; Return from ISR
PC W15 Data 0830 Data 0832 CORCON SR Example 2:
Before Instruction 00 0A26 0834 0230 8101 0001 0000

RETFIE
PC W15 Data 0830 Data 0832 CORCON SR
After Instruction 01 0230 0830 0230 8101 0001 0081 (IPL = 4, C = 1)
008050
; Return from ISR
After Instruction 00 7008 0922 7008 0300 0000 0003 (Z, C = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-201
RETLW
Return with Literal in Wn RETLW{.B} #lit10, Wn
lit10 [0 ... 255] for byte operation lit10 [0 ... 1023] for word operation Wn [W0 ... W15] (W15) 2 W15 (TOS) (PC<22:16>) (W15) 2 W15 (TOS) (PC<15:0>) lit10 Wn None 0000 0101 0Bkk kkkk kkkk dddd Return from subroutine with the specified, unsigned 10-bit literal stored in Wn. The software stack is POPped twice to restore the PC and the signed literal is stored in Wn. Since two POPs are made, the Stack Pointer (W15) is decremented by 4. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The k bits specify the value of the literal. The d bits select the destination register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: For byte operations, the literal must be specified as an unsigned value [0:255]. See Section 4.6 Using 10-bit Literal Operands for information on using 10-bit literal operands in Byte mode.
Operation:
1 3 (2 if exception pending)
000440 RETLW.B #0xA, W0 ; Return with 0xA in W0
PC W0 W15 Data 1984 Data 1986 SR Example 2:

RETLW

#0x230, W2
After Instruction 00 7006 980A 1984 7006 0000 0000
00050A
; Return with 0x230 in W2
PC W2 W15 Data 11FC Data 11FE SR
Before Instruction 00 050A 0993 1200 7008 0001 0000
PC W2 W15 Data 11FC Data 11FE SR
After Instruction 01 7008 0230 11FC 7008 0001 0000
DS70157C-page 5-202
RETURN
Return RETURN
(W15) 2 W15 (TOS) (PC<22:16>) (W15) 2 W15 (TOS) (PC<15:0>) NOP Instruction Register None 0000 0110 0000 0000 0000 0000 Return from subroutine. The software stack is POPped twice to restore the PC. Since two POPs are made, the Stack Pointer (W15) is decremented by 4. 1 3 (2 if exception pending)
001A06 RETURN ; Return from subroutine
PC W15 Data 1244 Data 1246 SR Example 2:
Before Instruction 00 1A06 1248 0004 0001 0000

RETURN
005404
; Return from subroutine
Before Instruction 00 5404 090A 0966 0000 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-203
RLC
Rotate Left f through Carry RLC{.B} f {,WREG}
f [0 ... 8191] For byte operation: (C) Dest<0> (f<6:0>) Dest<7:1> (f<7>) C For word operation: (C) Dest<0> (f<14:0>) Dest<15:1> (f<15>) C
N, Z, C 1101 0110 1BDf ffff ffff ffff Rotate the contents of the file register f one bit to the left through the Carry flag and place the result in the destination register. The Carry flag of the STATUS Register is shifted into the Least Significant bit of the destination, and it is then overwritten with the Most Significant bit of Ws. The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The D bit selects the destination (0 for f, 1 for WREG). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
1 1
RLC.B 0x1233 ; Rotate Left w/ C (0x1233) (Byte mode)
Before Instruction Data 1232 E807 SR 0000 Example 2:

RLC
After Instruction Data 1232 D007 SR 0009 (N, C = 1)

; Rotate Left w/ C (0x820) (Word mode) ; Store result in WREG
0x820, WREG
Before After Instruction Instruction WREG (W0) 5601 WREG (W0) 42DD Data 0820 216E Data 0820 216E SR 0001 (C = 1) SR 0000 (C = 0)
DS70157C-page 5-204
RLC
Syntax: {label:}
Rotate Left Ws through Carry RLC{.B} Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Ws [W0 ... W15] Wd [W0 ... W15] For byte operation: (C) Wd<0> (Ws<6:0>) Wd<7:1> (Ws<7>) C For word operation: (C) Wd<0> (Ws<14:0>) Wd<15:1> (Ws<15>) C
N, Z, C 1101 0010 1Bqq qddd dppp ssss Rotate the contents of the source register Ws one bit to the left through the Carry flag and place the result in the destination register Wd. The Carry flag of the STATUS register is shifted into the Least Significant bit of Wd, and it is then overwritten with the Most Significant bit of Ws. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
1 1
RLC.B W0, W3 ; Rotate Left w/ C (W0) (Byte mode) ; Store the result in W3
5
After Instruction W0 9976 W3 58ED SR 0009 (N = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-205

Example 2:
RLC [W2++], [W8] ; Rotate Left w/ C [W2] (Word mode) ; Post-increment W2 ; Store result in [W8]
Before After Instruction Instruction W2 2008 W2 200A W8 094E W8 094E Data 094E 3689 Data 094E 8082 Data 2008 C041 Data 2008 C041 SR 0001 (C = 1) SR 0009 (N, C = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-206
RLNC
Rotate Left f without Carry RLNC{.B} f {,WREG}
f [0 ... 8191] For byte operation: (f<6:0>) Dest<7:1> (f<7>) Dest<0> For word operation: (f<14:0>) Dest<15:1> (f<15>) Dest<0>
N, Z 1101 0110 0BDf ffff ffff ffff Rotate the contents of the file register f one bit to the left and place the result in the destination register. The Most Significant bit of f is stored in the Least Significant bit of the destination, and the Carry flag is not affected. The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
1 1
RLNC.B 0x1233 ; Rotate Left (0x1233) (Byte mode)

RLNC
After Instruction Data 1233 D107 SR 0008 (N = 1)

; Rotate Left (0x820) (Word mode) ; Store result in WREG
0x820, WREG
Before After Instruction Instruction WREG (W0) 5601 WREG (W0) 42DC Data 0820 216E Data 0820 216E SR 0001 (C = 1) SR 0000 (C = 0)
5
DS70157C-page 5-207
RLNC
Syntax: {label:}
Rotate Left Ws without Carry RLNC{.B} Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Ws [W0 ... W15] Wd [W0 ... W15] For byte operation: (Ws<6:0>) Wd<7:1> (Ws<7>) Wd<0> For word operation: (Ws<14:0>) Wd<15:1> (Ws<15>) Wd<0>
N, Z 1101 0010 0Bqq qddd dppp ssss Rotate the contents of the source register Ws one bit to the left and place the result in the destination register Wd. The Most Significant bit of Ws is stored in the Least Significant bit of Wd, and the Carry flag is not affected. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for byte, 1 for word). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
1 1
RLNC.B W0, W3 ; Rotate Left (W0) (Byte mode) ; Store the result in W3
After Instruction W0 9976 W3 58EC SR 0009 (N, C = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-208

Example 2:
RLNC [W2++], [W8] ; Rotate Left [W2] (Word mode) ; Post-increment W2 ; Store result in [W8]
Before After Instruction Instruction W2 2008 W2 200A W8 094E W8 094E Data 094E 3689 Data 094E 8083 Data 2008 C041 Data 2008 C041 SR 0001 (C = 1) SR 0009 (N, C = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-209
RRC
Rotate Right f through Carry RRC{.B} f {,WREG}
f [0 ... 8191] For byte operation: (C) Dest<7> (f<7:1>) Dest<6:0> (f<0>) C For word operation: (C) Dest<15> (f<15:1>) Dest<14:0> (f<0>) C
C
N, Z, C 1101 0111 1BDf ffff ffff ffff Rotate the contents of the file register f one bit to the right through the Carry flag and place the result in the destination register. The Carry flag of the STATUS Register is shifted into the Most Significant bit of the destination, and it is then overwritten with the Least Significant bit of Ws. The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for byte, 1 for word). The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
1 1
RRC.B 0x1233 ; Rotate Right w/ C (0x1233) (Byte mode)

RRC

; Rotate Right w/ C (0x820) (Word mode) ; Store result in WREG
0x820, WREG
Before After Instruction Instruction WREG (W0) 5601 WREG (W0) 90B7 Data 0820 216E Data 0820 216E SR 0001 (C = 1) SR 0008 (N = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-210
RRC
Syntax: {label:}
Rotate Right Ws through Carry RRC{.B} Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Ws [W0 ... W15] Wd [W0 ... W15] For byte operation: (C) Wd<7> (Ws<7:1>) Wd<6:0> (Ws<0>) C For word operation: (C) Wd<15> (Ws<15:1>) Wd<14:0> (Ws<0>) C
C
N, Z, C 1101 0011 1Bqq qddd dppp ssss Rotate the contents of the source register Ws one bit to the right through the Carry flag and place the result in the destination register Wd. The Carry flag of the STATUS Register is shifted into the Most Significant bit of Wd, and it is then overwritten with the Least Significant bit of Ws. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
1 1
RRC.B W0, W3 ; Rotate Right w/ C (W0) (Byte mode) ; Store the result in W3
After Instruction W0 9976 W3 58BB SR 0008 (N = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-211

Example 2:
RRC [W2++], [W8] ; Rotate Right w/ C [W2] (Word mode) ; Post-increment W2 ; Store result in [W8]
Before After Instruction Instruction W2 2008 W2 200A W8 094E W8 094E Data 094E 3689 Data 094E E020 Data 2008 C041 Data 2008 C041 SR 0001 (C = 1) SR 0009 (N, C = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-212
RRNC
Rotate Right f without Carry RRNC{.B} f {,WREG}
f [0 ... 8191] For byte operation: (f<7:1>) Dest<6:0> (f<0>) Dest<7> For word operation: (f<15:1>) Dest<14:0> (f<0>) Dest<15>
N, Z 1101 0111 0BDf ffff ffff ffff Rotate the contents of the file register f one bit to the right and place the result in the destination register. The Least Significant bit of f is stored in the Most Significant bit of the destination, and the Carry flag is not affected. The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
1 1
RRNC.B 0x1233 ; Rotate Right (0x1233) (Byte mode)

RRNC

; Rotate Right (0x820) (Word mode) ; Store result in WREG
0x820, WREG
Before After Instruction Instruction WREG (W0) 5601 WREG (W0) 10B7 Data 0820 216E Data 0820 216E SR 0001 (C = 1) SR 0001 (C = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-213
RRNC
Syntax: {label:}
Rotate Right Ws without Carry RRNC{.B} Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Ws [W0 ... W15] Wd [W0 ... W15] For byte operation: (Ws<7:1>) Wd<6:0> (Ws<0>) Wd<7> For word operation: (Ws<15:1>) Wd<14:0> (Ws<0>) Wd<15>
N, Z 1101 0011 0Bqq qddd dppp ssss Rotate the contents of the source register Ws one bit to the right and place the result in the destination register Wd. The Least Significant bit of Ws is stored in the Most Significant bit of Wd, and the Carry flag is not affected. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
1 1
RRNC.B W0, W3 ; Rotate Right (W0) (Byte mode) ; Store the result in W3
After Instruction W0 9976 W3 583B SR 0001 (C = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-214

Example 2:
RRNC
[W2++], [W8]
; Rotate Right [W2] (Word mode) ; Post-increment W2 ; Store result in [W8]
Before Instruction W2 2008 W8 094E Data 094E 3689 Data 2008 C041 SR 0000
After Instruction W2 200A W8 094E Data 094E E020 Data 2008 C041 SR 0008 (N = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-215
SAC
Syntax: {label:}
Store Accumulator SAC Acc, {#Slit4,} Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [--Wd] [++Wd] [Wd + Wb]
Operands:
Acc [A,B] Slit4 [-8 ... +7] Wb, Wd [W0 ... W15] ShiftSlit4(Acc) (optional) (Acc[31:16]) Wd None 1100 1100 Awww wrrr rhhh dddd Perform an optional, signed 4-bit shift of the specified accumulator, then store the shifted contents of ACCxH (Acc[31:16]) to Wd. The shift range is -8:7, where a negative operand indicates an arithmetic left shift and a positive operand indicates an arithmetic right shift. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Wd. The A bit specifies the source accumulator. The w bits specify the offset register Wb. The r bits encode the optional accumulator pre-shift. The h bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits specify the destination register Wd. Note 1: This instruction does not modify the contents of Acc. 2: This instruction stores the truncated contents of Acc. The instruction SAC.R may be used to store the rounded accumulator contents. 3: If Data Write saturation is enabled (SATDW, CORCON<5>, = 1), the value stored to Wd is subject to saturation after the optional shift is performed.
1 1
SAC A, #4, W5 ; Right shift ACCA by 4 ; Store result to W5 ; CORCON = 0x0010 (SATDW = 1)
W5 ACCA CORCON SR
Before Instruction B900 00 120F FF00 0010 0000
W5 ACCA CORCON SR
After Instruction 0120 00 120F FF00 0010 0000
DS70157C-page 5-216

Example 2:
SAC B, #-4, [W5++] ; Left shift ACCB by 4 ; Store result to [W5], Post-increment W5 ; CORCON = 0x0010 (SATDW = 1)
W5 ACCB Data 2000 CORCON SR
Before Instruction 2000 FF C891 8F4C 5BBE 0010 0000
After Instruction 2002 FF C891 1F4C 8000 0010 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-217
SAC.R
Syntax: {label:}
Store Rounded Accumulator SAC.R Acc, {#Slit4,} Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [--Wd] [++Wd] [Wd + Wb]
Operands:
Acc [A,B] Slit4 [-8 ... +7] Wb [W0 ... W15] Wd [W0 ... W15] ShiftSlit4(Acc) (optional) Round(Acc) (Acc[31:16]) Wd None 1100 1101 Awww wrrr rhhh dddd Perform an optional, signed 4-bit shift of the specified accumulator, then store the rounded contents of ACCxH (Acc[31:16]) to Wd. The shift range is -8:7, where a negative operand indicates an arithmetic left shift and a positive operand indicates an arithmetic right shift. The Rounding mode (Conventional or Convergent) is set by the RND bit, CORCON<1>. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Wd. The A bit specifies the source accumulator. The w bits specify the offset register Wb. The r bits encode the optional accumulator pre-shift. The h bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits specify the destination register Wd. Note 1: This instruction does not modify the contents of the Acc. 2: This instruction stores the rounded contents of Acc. The instruction SAC may be used to store the truncated accumulator contents. 3: If Data Write saturation is enabled (SATDW, CORCON<5>, = 1), the value stored to Wd is subject to saturation after the optional shift is performed.
Operation:
1 1
SAC.R A, #4, W5 ; Right shift ACCA by 4 ; Store rounded result to W5 ; CORCON = 0x0010 (SATDW = 1)
W5 ACCA CORCON SR
Before Instruction B900 00 120F FF00 0010 0000
W5 ACCA CORCON SR
After Instruction 0121 00 120F FF00 0010 0000
DS70157C-page 5-218

Example 2:
SAC.R B, #-4, [W5++] ; Left shift ACCB by 4 ; Store rounded result to [W5], Post-increment W5 ; CORCON = 0x0010 (SATDW = 1)
Before Instruction 2000 FF F891 8F4C 5BBE 0010 0000
After Instruction 2002 FF F891 8F4C 8919 0010 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-219
SE
Syntax: {label:}
Sign-Extend Ws SE Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wnd
Ws [W0 ... W15] Wnd [W0 ... W15] Ws<7:0> Wnd<7:0> If (Ws<7> = 1): 0xFF Wnd<15:8> Else: 0 Wnd<15:8> N, Z, C 1111 1011 0000 0ddd dppp ssss Sign-extend the byte in Ws and store the 16-bit result in Wnd. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws, and register direct addressing must be used for Wnd. The C flag is set to the complement of the N flag. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note 1: This operation converts a byte to a word, and it uses no .B or .W extension. 2: The source Ws is addressed as a byte operand, so any address modification is by 1.

SE
1 1
W3, W4 ; Sign-extend W3 and store to W4
Before Instruction W3 7839 W4 1005 SR 0000 Example 2:

SE [W2++], W12

; Sign-extend [W2] and store to W12 ; Post-increment W2
Before Instruction W2 0900 W12 1002 Data 0900 008F SR 0000
After Instruction W2 0901 W12 FF8F Data 0900 008F SR 0008 (N = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-220
SETM
Syntax: {label:}
Set f or WREG SETM{.B} f WREG
f [0 ... 8191] For byte operation: 0xFF destination designated by D For word operation: 0xFFFF destination designated by D None 1110 1111 1BDf ffff ffff ffff All the bits of the specified register are set to 1. If WREG is specified, the bits of WREG are set. Otherwise, the bits of the specified file register are set. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The WREG is set to working register W0.

SETM.B
1 1
0x891 ; Set 0x891 (Byte mode)
Before Instruction Data 0890 2739 SR 0000 Example 2:

SETM WREG
After Instruction Data 0890 FF39 SR 0000

; Set WREG (Word mode)
Before Instruction WREG (W0) 0900 SR 0000
After Instruction WREG (W0) FFFF SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-221
SETM
Syntax: {label:}
Set Ws SETM{.B} Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Wd [W0 ... W15] For byte operation: 0xFF Wd for byte operation For word operation: 0xFFFF Wd for word operation None 1110 1011 1Bqq qddd d000 0000 All the bits of the specified register are set to 1. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Wd. The B bits selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.

SETM.B
1 1
W13 ; Set W13 (Byte mode)

SETM [--W6]
After Instruction W13 27FF SR 0000

; Pre-decrement W6 (Word mode) ; Set [W6]
Before Instruction W6 1250 Data 124E 3CD9 SR 0000
After Instruction W6 124E Data 124E FFFF SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-222
SFTAC
Arithmetic Shift Accumulator by Slit6 SFTAC Acc, #Slit6
Acc [A,B] Slit6 [-16 ... 16] Shiftk(Acc) Acc OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB 1100 1000 A000 0000 01kk kkkk Arithmetic shift the 40-bit contents of the specified accumulator by the signed, 6-bit literal and store the result back into the accumulator. The shift range is -16:16, where a negative operand indicates a left shift and a positive operand indicates a right shift. Any bits which are shifted out of the accumulator are lost. The A bit selects the accumulator for the result. The k bits determine the number of bits to be shifted. Note 1: If saturation is enabled for the target accumulator (SATA, CORCON<7> or SATB, CORCON<6>), the value stored to the accumulator is subject to saturation. 2: If the shift amount is greater than 16 or less than -16, no modification will be made to the accumulator, and an arithmetic trap will occur.
1 1
SFTAC A, #12 ; Arithmetic right shift ACCA by 12 ; Store result to ACCA ; CORCON = 0x0080 (SATA = 1)
ACCA CORCON SR Example 2:
Before Instruction 00 120F FF00 0080 0000
ACCA CORCON SR
After Instruction 00 0001 20FF 0080 0000
SFTAC B, #-10 ; Arithmetic left shift ACCB by 10 ; Store result to ACCB ; CORCON = 0x0040 (SATB = 1)
ACCB CORCON SR
Before Instruction FF FFF1 8F4C 0040 0000
ACCB CORCON SR
After Instruction FF C63D 3000 0040 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-223
SFTAC
Arithmetic Shift Accumulator by Wb SFTAC Acc, Wb
Acc [A,B] Wb [W0 ... W15] Shift(Wb)(Acc) Acc OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB 1100 1000 A000 0000 0000 ssss Arithmetic shift the 40-bit contents of the specified accumulator and store the result back into the accumulator. The Least Significant 6 bits of Wb are used to specify the shift amount. The shift range is -16:16, where a negative value indicates a left shift and a positive value indicates a right shift. Any bits which are shifted out of the accumulator are lost. The A bit selects the accumulator for the source/destination. The s bits select the address of the shift count register. Note 1: If saturation is enabled for the target accumulator (SATA, CORCON<7> or SATB, CORCON<6>), the value stored to the accumulator is subject to saturation. 2: If the shift amount is greater than 16 or less than -16, no modification will be made to the accumulator, and an arithmetic trap will occur.
1 1
SFTAC A, W0 ; Arithmetic shift ACCA by (W0) ; Store result to ACCA ; CORCON = 0x0000 (saturation disabled)
W0 ACCA CORCON SR Example 2:
Before Instruction FFFC 00 320F AB09 0000 0000
W0 ACCA CORCON SR
After Instruction FFFC 03 20FA B090 0000 8800 (OA, OAB = 1)
SFTAC B, W12 ; Arithmetic shift ACCB by (W12) ; Store result to ACCB ; CORCON = 0x0040 (SATB = 1)
W12 ACCB CORCON SR
Before Instruction 000F FF FFF1 8F4C 0040 0000
W12 ACCB CORCON SR
After Instruction 000F FF FFFF FFE3 0040 0000
DS70157C-page 5-224
SL
Shift Left f SL{.B} f {,WREG}
f [0... 8191] For byte operation: (f<7>) (C) (f<6:0>) Dest<7:1> 0 Dest<0> For word operation: (f<15>) (C) (f<14:0>) Dest<15:1> 0 Dest<0>
C 0
N, Z, C 1101 0100 0BDf ffff ffff ffff Shift the contents of the file register one bit to the left and place the result in the destination register. The Most Significant bit of the file register is shifted into the Carry bit of the STATUS register, and zero is shifted into the Least Significant bit of the destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The WREG is set to working register W0.

SL.B
1 1
0x909 ; Shift left (0x909) (Byte mode)
Before Instruction Data 0908 9439 SR 0000 Example 2:

SL
After Instruction Data 0908 0839 SR 0001 (C = 1)

; Shift left (0x1650) (Word mode) ; Store result in WREG
0x1650, WREG
5
Before Instruction WREG (W0) 0900 Data 1650 4065 SR 0000
After Instruction WREG (W0) 80CA Data 1650 4065 SR 0008 (N = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-225
SL
Syntax: {label:}
Shift Left Ws SL{.B} Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Ws [W0 ... W15] Wd [W0 ... W15] For byte operation: (Ws<7>) C (Ws<6:0>) Wd<7:1> 0 Wd<0> For word operation: (Ws<15>) C (Ws<14:0>) Wd<15:1> 0 Wd<0>
C 0
N, Z, C 1101 0000 0Bqq qddd dppp ssss Shift the contents of the source register Ws one bit to the left and place the result in the destination register Wd. The Most Significant bit of Ws is shifted into the Carry bit of the STATUS register, and 0 is shifted into the Least Significant bit of Wd. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.

SL.B
1 1
W3, W4 ; Shift left W3 (Byte mode) ; Store result to W4
Before Instruction W3 78A9 W4 1005 SR 0000
After Instruction W3 78A9 W4 1052 SR 0001 (C = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-226

Example 2:
SL [W2++], [W12] ; Shift left [W2] (Word mode) ; Store result to [W12] ; Post-increment W2
Before Instruction W2 0900 W12 1002 Data 0900 800F Data 1002 6722 SR 0000
After Instruction W2 0902 W12 1002 Data 0900 800F Data 1002 001E SR 0001 (C = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-227
SL
Shift Left by Short Literal SL Wb, #lit4, Wnd
Wb [W0 ... W15] lit4 [0...15] Wnd [W0 ... W15] lit4<3:0> Shift_Val Wnd<15:Shift_Val> = Wb<15-Shift_Val:0> Wd<Shift_Val 1:0> = 0 N, Z 1101 1101 0www wddd d100 kkkk Shift left the contents of the source register Wb by the 4-bit unsigned literal and store the result in the destination register Wnd. Any bits shifted out of the source register are lost. Direct addressing must be used for Wb and Wnd. The w bits select the address of the base register. The d bits select the destination register. The k bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number. Note: This instruction operates in Word mode only.
Operation:

SL
1 1
W2, #4, W2 ; Shift left W2 by 4 ; Store result to W2
Before Instruction W2 78A9 SR 0000 Example 2:

SL W3, #12, W8
After Instruction W2 8A90 SR 0008 (N = 1)

; Shift left W3 by 12 ; Store result to W8
DS70157C-page 5-228
SL
Shift Left by Wns SL Wb, Wns, Wnd
Wb [W0 ... W15] Wns [W0 ...W15] Wnd [W0 ... W15] Wns<4:0> Shift_Val Wnd<15:Shift_Val> = Wb<15 Shift_Val:0> Wd<Shift_Val 1:0> = 0 N, Z 1101 1101 0www wddd d000 ssss Shift left the contents of the source register Wb by the 5 Least Significant bits of Wns (only up to 15 positions) and store the result in the destination register Wnd. Any bits shifted out of the source register are lost. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb, Wns and Wnd. The w bits select the address of the base register. The d bits select the destination register. The s bits select the source register. Note 1: This instruction operates in Word mode only. 2: If Wns is greater than 15, Wnd will be loaded with 0x0.
Operation:

SL
1 1
W0, W1, W2 ; Shift left W0 by W1<0:4> ; Store result to W2
Before Instruction W0 09A4 W1 8903 W2 78A9 SR 0000 Example 2:

SL W4, W5, W6
After Instruction W0 09A4 W1 8903 W2 4D20 SR 0000

; Shift left W4 by W5<0:4> ; Store result to W6
Before Instruction W4 A409 W5 FF01 W6 0883 SR 0000
After Instruction W4 A409 W5 FF01 W6 4812 SR 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-229
SUB
Subtract WREG from f SUB{.B} f {,WREG}
f [0 ... 8191] (f) (WREG) destination designated by D DC, N, OV, Z, C 1011 0101 0BDf ffff ffff ffff Subtract the contents of the default working register WREG from the contents of the specified file register, and place the result in the destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The WREG is set to working register W0.
1 1
SUB.B 0x1FFF ; Sub. WREG from (0x1FFF) (Byte mode) ; Store result to 0x1FFF
Before Instruction WREG (W0) 7804 Data 1FFE 9439 SR 0000 Example 2:
SUB
After Instruction WREG (W0) 7804 Data 1FFE 9039 SR 0009 (N, C = 1)
; Sub. WREG from (0xA04) (Word mode) ; Store result to WREG
0xA04, WREG
Before Instruction WREG (W0) 6234 Data 0A04 4523 SR 0000
After Instruction WREG (W0) E2EF Data 0A04 4523 SR 0008 (N = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-230
SUB
Subtract Literal from Wn SUB{.B} #lit10, Wn
lit10 [0 ... 255] for byte operation lit10 [0 ... 1023] for word operation Wn [W0 ... W15] (Wn) lit10 Wn DC, N, OV, Z, C 1011 0001 0Bkk kkkk kkkk dddd Subtract the 10-bit unsigned literal operand from the contents of the working register Wn, and store the result back in the working register Wn. Register direct addressing must be used for Wn. The B bit selects byte or word operation. The k bits specify the literal operand. The d bits select the address of the working register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: For byte operations, the literal must be specified as an unsigned value [0:255]. See Section 4.6 Using 10-bit Literal Operands for information on using 10-bit literal operands in Byte mode.

SUB.B
1 1
#0x23, W0 ; Sub. 0x23 from W0 (Byte mode) ; Store result to W0

SUB #0x108, W4
After Instruction W0 78E1 SR 0008 (N = 1)

; Sub. 0x108 from W4 (Word mode) ; Store result to W4
After Instruction W4 612C SR 0001 (C = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-231
SUB
Syntax: {label:}
Subtract Short Literal from Wb SUB{.B} Wb, #lit5, Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Operands:
Wb [W0 ... W15] lit5 [0 ... 31] Wd [W0 ... W15] (Wb) lit5 Wd DC, N, OV, Z, C 0101 0www wBqq qddd d11k kkkk Subtract the 5-bit unsigned literal operand from the contents of the base register Wb, and place the result in the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Register direct or indirect addressing must be used for Wd. The w bits select the address of the base register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The k bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.

SUB.B
1 1
W4, #0x10, W5 ; Sub. 0x10 from W4 (Byte mode) ; Store result to W5

SUB
After Instruction W4 1782 W5 7872 SR 0005 (OV, C = 1)

; Sub. 0x8 from W0 (Word mode) ; Store result to [W2] ; Post-increment W2
W0, #0x8, [W2++]
Before Instruction W0 F230 W2 2004 Data 2004 A557 SR 0000
After Instruction W0 F230 W2 2006 Data 2004 F228 SR 0009 (N, C = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-232
SUB
Syntax: {label:}
Subtract Ws from Wb SUB{.B} Wb, Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Operands:
Wb [W0 ... W15] Ws [W0 ... W15] Wd [W0 ... W15] (Wb) (Ws) Wd DC, N, OV, Z, C 0101 0www wBqq qddd dppp ssss Subtract the contents of the source register Ws from the contents of the base register Wb and place the result in the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd. The w bits select the address of the base register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.

SUB.B
1 1
W0, W1, W0 ; Sub. W1 from W0 (Byte mode) ; Store result to W0
After Instruction W0 17EE W1 7844 SR 0108 (DC, N = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-233

Example 2:
SUB W7, [W8++], [W9++] ; ; ; ; Sub. [W8] from W7 (Word mode) Store result to [W9] Post-increment W8 Post-increment W9
Before Instruction W7 2450 W8 1808 W9 2020 Data 1808 92E4 Data 2020 A557 SR 0000
After Instruction W7 2450 W8 180A W9 2022 Data 1808 92E4 Data 2020 916C SR 010C (DC, N, OV = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-234
SUB
Subtract Accumulators SUB Acc
If (Acc = A): ACCA ACCB ACCA Else: ACCB ACCA ACCB OA, OB, OAB, SA, SB, SAB 1100 1011 A011 0000 0000 0000 Subtract the contents of the unspecified accumulator from the contents of Acc, and store the result back into Acc. This instruction performs a 40-bit subtraction. The A bit specifies the destination accumulator. 1 1
SUB A ; Subtract ACCB from ACCA ; Store the result to ACCA ; CORCON = 0x0000 (no saturation)
ACCA ACCB CORCON SR Example 2:

SUB
Before Instruction 76 120F 098A 23 F312 BC17 0000 0000

B
ACCA ACCB CORCON SR
After Instruction 52 1EFC 4D73 23 F312 BC17 0000 1100 (OA, OB = 1)
; Subtract ACCA from ACCB ; Store the result to ACCB ; CORCON = 0x0040 (SATB = 1)
ACCA ACCB CORCON SR
Before Instruction FF 9022 2EE1 00 2456 8F4C 0040 0000
ACCA ACCB CORCON SR
After Instruction FF 9022 2EE1 00 7FFF FFFF 0040 1400 (SB, SAB = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-235
SUBB
Subtract WREG and Carry bit from f SUBB{.B} f {,WREG}
f [0 ... 8191] (f) (WREG) (C) destination designated by D DC, N, OV, Z, C 1011 0101 1BDf ffff ffff ffff Subtract the contents of the default working register WREG and the Borrow flag (Carry flag inverse, C) from the contents of the specified file register and place the result in the destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The WREG is set to working register W0. 3: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR. These instructions can only clear Z.
1 1
SUBB.B 0x1FFF ; Sub. WREG and C from (0x1FFF) (Byte mode) ; Store result to 0x1FFF
After Instruction WREG (W0) 7804 Data 1FFE 8F39 SR 0008 (N = 1)

; Sub. WREG and C from (0xA04) (Word mode) ; Store result to WREG
SUBB 0xA04, WREG
After Instruction WREG (W0) 0000 Data 0A04 6235 SR 0001 (C = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-236
SUBB
Subtract Wn from Literal with Borrow SUBB{.B} #lit10, Wn
lit10 [0 ... 255] for byte operation lit10 [0 ... 1023] for word operation Wn [W0 ... W15] (Wn) lit10 (C) Wn DC, N, OV, Z, C 1011 0001 1Bkk kkkk kkkk dddd Subtract the unsigned 10-bit literal operand and the Borrow flag (Carry flag inverse, C) from the contents of the working register Wn, and store the result back in the working register Wn. Register direct addressing must be used for Wn. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The k bits specify the literal operand. The d bits select the address of the working register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .w extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: For byte operations, the literal must be specified as an unsigned value [0:255]. See Section 4.6 Using 10-bit Literal Operands for information on using 10-bit literal operands in Byte mode. 3: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR. These instructions can only clear Z.

SUBB.B
1 1
#0x23, W0 ; Sub. 0x23 and C from W0 (Byte mode) ; Store result to W0

SUBB #0x108, W4
After Instruction W0 78E0 SR 0108 (DC, N = 1)

; Sub. 0x108 and C from W4 (Word mode) ; Store result to W4
Before Instruction W4 6234 SR 0001 (C = 1)
After Instruction W4 612C SR 0001 (C = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-237
SUBB
Syntax: {label:}
Subtract Short Literal from Wb with Borrow SUBB{.B} Wb, #lit5, Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Operands:
Wb [W0 ... W15] lit5 [0 ... 31] Wd [W0 ... W15] (Wb) lit5 (C) Wd DC, N, OV, Z, C 0101 1www wBqq qddd d11k kkkk Subtract the 5-bit unsigned literal operand and the Borrow flag (Carry flag inverse, C) from the contents of the base register Wb and place the result in the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Wd. The w bits select the address of the base register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The k bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR. These instructions can only clear Z.

SUBB.B
1 1
W4, #0x10, W5 ; Sub. 0x10 and C from W4 (Byte mode) ; Store result to W5

SUBB W0, #0x8, [W2++]
After Instruction W4 1782 W5 7871 SR 0005 (OV, C = 1)

; Sub. 0x8 and C from W0 (Word mode) ; Store result to [W2] ; Post-increment W2
Before After Instruction Instruction W0 0009 W0 0009 W2 2004 W2 2006 Data 2004 A557 Data 2004 0000 SR 0020 (Z = 1) SR 0103 (DC, Z, C = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-238
SUBB
Syntax: {label:}
Subtract Ws from Wb with Borrow SUBB{.B} Wb, Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Operands:
Wb [W0 ... W15] Ws [W0 ... W15] Wd [W0 ... W15] (Wb) (Ws) (C) Wd DC, N, OV, Z, C 0101 1www wBqq qddd dppp ssss Subtract the contents of the source register Ws and the Borrow flag (Carry flag inverse, C) from the contents of the base register Wb, and place the result in the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd. The w bits select the address of the base register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR. These instructions can only clear Z.

SUBB.B
1 1
W0, W1, W0 ; Sub. W1 and C from W0 (Byte mode) ; Store result to W0
After Instruction W0 17ED W1 7844 SR 0108 (DC, N = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-239

Example 2:
SUBB W7,[W8++],[W9++] ; ; ; ; Sub. [W8] and C from W7 (Word mode) Store result to [W9] Post-increment W8 Post-increment W9
After Instruction W7 2450 W8 180A W9 2024 Data 1808 92E4 Data 2022 916C SR 010C (DC, N, OV = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-240
SUBBR
Subtract f from WREG with Borrow SUBBR{.B} f {,WREG}
f [0 ... 8191] (WREG) (f) (C) destination designated by D DC, N, OV, Z, C 1011 1101 1BDf ffff ffff ffff Subtract the contents of the specified file register f and the Borrow flag (Carry flag inverse, C) from the contents of WREG, and place the result in the destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The WREG is set to working register W0. 3: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR. These instructions can only clear Z.
1 1
SUBBR.B 0x803 ; Sub. (0x803) and C from WREG (Byte mode) ; Store result to 0x803
Before After Instruction Instruction WREG (W0) 7804 WREG (W0) 7804 Data 0802 9439 Data 0802 6F39 SR 0002 (Z = 1) SR 0000 Example 2:
SUBBR 0xA04, WREG ; Sub. (0xA04) and C from WREG (Word mode) ; Store result to WREG
After Instruction WREG (W0) FFFE Data 0A04 6235 SR 0008 (N = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-241
SUBBR
Syntax: {label:}
Subtract Wb from Short Literal with Borrow SUBBR{.B} Wb, #lit5, Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Operands:
Wb [W0 ... W15] lit5 [0 ... 31] Wd [W0 ... W15] lit5 (Wb) (C) Wd DC, N, OV, Z, C 0001 1www wBqq qddd d11k kkkk Subtract the contents of the base register Wb and the Borrow flag (Carry flag inverse, C) from the 5-bit unsigned literal and place the result in the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Register direct or indirect addressing must be used for Wd. The w bits select the address of the base register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The k bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR. These instructions can only clear Z.
1 1
SUBBR.B W0, #0x10, W1 ; Sub. W0 and C from 0x10 (Byte mode) ; Store result to W1
Before Instruction W0 F310 W1 786A SR 0003 (Z, C = 1) Example 2:

SUBBR
After Instruction W0 F310 W1 7800 SR 0103 (DC, Z, C = 1)
W0, #0x8, [W2++] ; Sub. W0 and C from 0x8 (Word mode) ; Store result to [W2] ; Post-increment W2
Before After Instruction Instruction W0 0009 W0 0009 W2 2004 W2 2006 Data 2004 A557 Data 2004 FFFE SR 0020 (Z = 1) SR 0108 (DC, N = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-242
SUBBR
Syntax: {label:}
Subtract Wb from Ws with Borrow SUBBR{.B} Wb, Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Operands:
Wb [W0 ... W15] Ws [W0 ... W15] Wd [W0 ... W15] (Ws) (Wb) (C) Wd DC, N, OV, Z, C 0001 1www wBqq qddd dppp ssss Subtract the contents of the base register Wb and the Borrow flag (Carry flag inverse, C) from the contents of the source register Ws and place the result in the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd. The w bits select the address of the base register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The Z flag is sticky for ADDC, CPB, SUBB and SUBBR. These instructions can only clear Z.
1 1
SUBBR.B W0, W1, W0 ; Sub. W0 and C from W1 (Byte mode) ; Store result to W0
5
DS70157C-page 5-243

Example 2:
SUBBR W7,[W8++],[W9++] ; ; ; ; Sub. W7 and C from [W8] (Word mode) Store result to [W9] Post-increment W8 Post-increment W9
After Instruction W7 2450 W8 180A W9 2024 Data 1808 92E4 Data 2022 6E93 SR 0005 (OV, C = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-244
SUBR
Subtract f from WREG SUBR{.B} f {,WREG}
f [0 ... 8191] (WREG) (f) destination designated by D DC, N, OV, Z, C 1011 1101 0BDf ffff ffff ffff Subtract the contents of the specified file register from the contents of the default working register WREG, and place the result in the destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The WREG is set to working register W0.

SUBR.B
1 1
0x1FFF ; Sub. (0x1FFF) from WREG (Byte mode) ; Store result to 0x1FFF
SUBR
After Instruction WREG (W0) 7804 Data 1FFE 7039 SR 0000

; Sub. (0xA04) from WREG (Word mode) ; Store result to WREG
0xA04, WREG
After Instruction WREG (W0) FFFF Data 0A04 6235 SR 0008 (N = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-245
SUBR
Syntax: {label:}
Subtract Wb from Short Literal SUBR{.B} Wb, #lit5 Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Operands:
Wb [W0 ... W15] lit5 [0 ... 31] Wd [W0 ... W15] lit5 (Wb) Wd DC, N, OV, Z, C 0001 0www wBqq qddd d11k kkkk Subtract the contents of the base register Wb from the unsigned 5-bit literal operand, and place the result in the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Wd. The w bits select the address of the base register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The k bits provide the literal operand, a five-bit integer number. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.

SUBR.B
1 1
W0, #0x10, W1 ; Sub. W0 from 0x10 (Byte mode) ; Store result to W1
Before Instruction W0 F310 W1 786A SR 0000 Example 2:

SUBR
After Instruction W0 F310 W1 7800 SR 0103 (DC, Z, C = 1)

; Sub. W0 from 0x8 (Word mode) ; Store result to [W2] ; Post-increment W2
W0, #0x8, [W2++]
Before Instruction W0 0009 W2 2004 Data 2004 A557 SR 0000
After Instruction W0 0009 W2 2006 Data 2004 FFFF SR 0108 (DC, N = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-246
SUBR
Syntax: {label:}
Subtract Wb from Ws SUBR{.B} Wb, Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Operands:
Wb [W0 ... W15] Ws [W0 ... W15] Wd [W0 ... W15] (Ws) (Wb) Wd DC, N, OV, Z, C 0001 0www wBqq qddd dppp ssss Subtract the contents of the base register Wb from the contents of the source register Ws and place the result in the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd. The w bits select the address of the base register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.

SUBR.B
1 1
W0, W1, W0 ; Sub. W0 from W1 (Byte mode) ; Store result to W0
5
DS70157C-page 5-247

Example 2:
SUBR W7, [W8++], [W9++] ; ; ; ; Sub. W7 from [W8] (Word mode) Store result to [W9] Post-increment W8 Post-increment W9
After Instruction W7 2450 W8 180A W9 2024 Data 1808 92E4 Data 2022 6E94 SR 0005 (OV, C = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-248
SWAP
Byte or Nibble Swap Wn SWAP{.B} Wn
Wn [W0 ... W15] For byte operation: (Wn)<7:4> (Wn)<3:0> For word operation: (Wn)<15:8> (Wn)<7:0> None 1111 1101 1B00 0000 0000 ssss Swap the contents of the working register Wn. In Word mode, the two bytes of Wn are swapped. In Byte mode, the two nibbles of the Least Significant Byte of Wn are swapped, and the Most Significant Byte of Wn is unchanged. Register direct addressing must be used for Wn. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The s bits select the address of the working register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.

SWAP.B
1 1
W0 ; Nibble swap (W0)
Before Instruction W0 AB87 SR 0000 Example 2:

SWAP W0
After Instruction W0 AB78 SR 0000

; Byte swap (W0)
5
DS70157C-page 5-249
TBLRDH
Syntax: {label:}
Table Read High TBLRDH{.B} [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Ws [W0 ... W15] Wd [W0 ... W15] For byte operation: If (LSB(Ws) = 1) 0 Wd Else Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Ws)] <23:16> Wd For word operation: Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Ws)] <23:16> Wd <7:0> 0 Wd <15:8> None 1011 1010 1Bqq qddd dppp ssss Read the contents of the most significant word of program memory and store it to the destination register Wd. The target word address of program memory is formed by concatenating the 8-bit Table Pointer register, TBLPAG<7:0>, with the effective address specified by Ws. Indirect addressing must be used for Ws, and either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Wd. In Word mode, zero is stored to the Most Significant Byte of the destination register (due to non-existent program memory) and the third program memory byte (PM<23:16>) at the specified program memory address is stored to the Least Significant Byte of the destination register. In Byte mode, the source address depends on the contents of Ws. If Ws is not word-aligned, zero is stored to the destination register (due to non-existent program memory). If Ws is word-aligned, the third program memory byte (PM<23:16>) at the specified program memory address is stored to the destination register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte move rather than a word move. You may use a .W extension to denote a word move, but it is not required.
Words: Cycles:
1 2
DS70157C-page 5-250

Example 1:
TBLRDH.B [W0], [W1++] ; Read PM (TBLPAG:[W0]) (Byte mode) ; Store to [W1] ; Post-increment W1
W0 W1 Data 0F70 Program 01 0812 TBLPAG SR Example 2:
Before Instruction 0812 0F71 0944 EF 2042 0001 0000
W0 W1 Data 0F70 Program 01 0812 TBLPAG SR
After Instruction 0812 0F72 EF44 EF 2042 0001 0000
TBLRDH
[W6++], W8
; Read PM (TBLPAG:[W6]) (Word mode) ; Store to W8 ; Post-increment W6
W6 W8 Program 00 3406 TBLPAG SR
Before Instruction 3406 65B1 29 2E40 0000 0000
After Instruction 3408 0029 29 2E40 0000 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-251
TBLRDL
Syntax: {label:}
Table Read Low TBLRDL{.B} [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Ws [W0 ... W15] Wd [W0 ... W15] For byte operation: If (LSB(Ws) = 1) Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Ws)] <15:8> Wd Else Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Ws)] <7:0> Wd For word operation: Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Ws)] <15:0> Wd None 1011 1010 0Bqq qddd dppp ssss Read the contents of the least significant word of program memory and store it to the destination register Wd. The target word address of program memory is formed by concatenating the 8-bit Table Pointer register, TBLPAG<7:0>, with the effective address specified by Ws. Indirect addressing must be used for Ws, and either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Wd. In Word mode, the lower 2 bytes of program memory are stored to the destination register. In Byte mode, the source address depends on the contents of Ws. If Ws is not word-aligned, the second byte of the program memory word (PM<15:7>) is stored to the destination register. If Ws is word-aligned, the first byte of the program memory word (PM<7:0>) is stored to the destination register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word mode, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte move rather than a word move. You may use a .W extension to denote a word move, but it is not required.
Words: Cycles:
1 2
DS70157C-page 5-252

Example 1:
TBLRDL.B [W0++], W1 ; Read PM (TBLPAG:[W0]) (Byte mode) ; Store to W1 ; Post-increment W0
W0 W1 Data 0F70 Program 01 0812 TBLPAG SR Example 2:
W0 W1 Data 0F70 Program 01 0812 TBLPAG SR
After Instruction 0814 0F20 EF44 EF 2042 0001 0000
TBLRDL
[W6], [W8++]
; Read PM (TBLPAG:[W6]) (Word mode) ; Store to W8 ; Post-increment W8
W6 W8 Data 1202 Program 00 3406 TBLPAG SR
Before Instruction 3406 1202 658B 29 2E40 0000 0000
After Instruction 3408 1204 2E40 29 2E40 0000 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-253
TBLWTH
Syntax: {label:}
Table Write High TBLWTH{.B} Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Ws [W0 ... W15] Wd [W0 ... W15] For byte operation: If (LSB(Wd) = 1) NOP Else (Ws) Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Wd)]<23:16> For word operation: (Ws)<7:0> Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Wd)] <23:16> None 1011 1011 1Bqq qddd dppp ssss Store the contents of the working source register Ws to the most significant word of program memory. The destination word address of program memory is formed by concatenating the 8-bit Table Pointer register, TBLPAG<7:0>, with the effective address specified by Wd. Either direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws, and indirect addressing must be used for Wd. Since program memory is 24 bits wide, this instruction can only write to the upper byte of program memory (PM<23:16>). This may be performed using a Wd that is word-aligned in Byte mode or Word mode. If Byte mode is used with a Wd that is not word-aligned, no operation is performed. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte move rather than a word move. You may use a .W extension to denote a word move, but it is not required.
Words: Cycles:
1 2
DS70157C-page 5-254

Example 1:
TBLWTH.B [W0++], [W1] ; Write [W0]... (Byte mode) ; to PM Latch High (TBLPAG:[W1]) ; Post-increment W0
W0 W1 Data 0812 Program 01 0F70 TBLPAG SR Note:
W0 W1 Data 0812 Program 01 0F70 TBLPAG SR
After Instruction 0812 0F70 EF44 44 2042 0001 0000
Only the Program Latch is written to. The contents of program memory are not updated until the Flash memory is programmed using the procedure described in the dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046).
W6, [W8++] ; Write W6... (Word mode) ; to PM Latch High (TBLPAG:[W8]) ; Post-increment W8
Example 2:
TBLWTH
W6 W8 Program 00 0870 TBLPAG SR Note:
5
DS70157C-page 5-255
TBLWTL
Syntax: {label:}
Table Write Low TBLWTL{.B} Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Ws [W0 ... W15] Wd [W0 ... W15] For byte operation: If (LSB(Wd)=1) (Ws) Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Wd)] <15:8> Else (Ws) Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Wd)] <7:0> For word operation: (Ws) Program Mem [(TBLPAG),(Wd)] <15:0> None 1011 1011 0Bqq qddd dppp ssss Store the contents of the working source register Ws to the least significant word of program memory. The destination word address of program memory is formed by concatenating the 8-bit Table Pointer register, TBLPAG<7:0>, with the effective address specified by Wd. Either direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws, and indirect addressing must be used for Wd. In Word mode, Ws is stored to the lower 2 bytes of program memory. In Byte mode, the Least Significant bit of Wd determines the destination byte. If Wd is not word-aligned, Ws is stored to the second byte of program memory (PM<15:8>). If Wd is word-aligned, Ws is stored to the first byte of program memory (PM<7:0>). The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte move rather than a word move. You may use a .W extension to denote a word move, but it is not required.
Words: Cycles:
1 2
DS70157C-page 5-256

Example 1:
TBLWTL.B W0, [W1++] ; Write W0... (Byte mode) ; to PM Latch Low (TBLPAG:[W1]) ; Post-increment W1
W0 W1 Program 00 1224 TBLPAG SR Note:
[W6], [W8] ; Write [W6]... (Word mode) ; to PM Latch Low (TBLPAG:[W8]) ; Post-increment W8
Example 2:
TBLWTL
W6 W8 Data 1600 Program 01 7208 TBLPAG SR Note:
After Instruction 1600 7208 0130 09 0130 0001 0000
5
DS70157C-page 5-257
ULNK
De-allocate Stack Frame ULNK
W14 W15 (W15) 2 W15 (TOS) W14 None 1111 1010 1000 0000 0000 0000 This instruction de-allocates a Stack Frame for a subroutine calling sequence. The Stack Frame is de-allocated by setting the Stack Pointer (W15) equal to the Frame Pointer (W14), and then POPping the stack to reset the Frame Pointer (W14). 1 1
ULNK ; Unlink the stack frame
Before Instruction W14 2002 W15 20A2 Data 2000 2000 SR 0000 Example 2:
ULNK
; Unlink the stack frame
Before Instruction W14 0802 W15 0812 Data 0800 0800 SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-258
XOR
Exclusive OR f and WREG XOR{.B} f {,WREG}
f [0 ... 8191] (f).XOR.(WREG) destination designated by D N, Z 1011 0110 1BDf ffff ffff ffff Compute the logical exclusive OR operation of the contents of the default working register WREG and the contents of the specified file register and place the result in the destination register. The optional WREG operand determines the destination register. If WREG is specified, the result is stored in WREG. If WREG is not specified, the result is stored in the file register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The D bit selects the destination (0 for WREG, 1 for file register). The f bits select the address of the file register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: The WREG is set to working register W0.

XOR.B
1 1
0x1FFF ; XOR (0x1FFF) and WREG (Byte mode) ; Store result to 0x1FFF
XOR
After Instruction WREG (W0) 7804 Data 1FFE 9039 SR 0008 (N = 1)

; XOR (0xA04) and WREG (Word mode) ; Store result to WREG
0xA04, WREG
Before Instruction WREG (W0) 6234 Data 0A04 A053 SR 0000
After Instruction WREG (W0) C267 Data 0A04 A053 SR 0008 (N = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-259
XOR
Exclusive OR Literal and Wn XOR{.B} #lit10, Wn
lit10 [0 ... 255] for byte operation lit10 [0 ... 1023] for word operation Wn [W0 ... W15] lit10.XOR.(Wn) Wn N, Z 1011 0010 1Bkk kkkk kkkk dddd Compute the logical exclusive OR operation of the unsigned 10-bit literal operand and the contents of the working register Wn and store the result back in the working register Wn. Register direct addressing must be used for Wn. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The k bits specify the literal operand. The d bits select the address of the working register. Note 1: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required. 2: For byte operations, the literal must be specified as an unsigned value [0:255]. See Section 4.6 Using 10-bit Literal Operands for information on using 10-bit literal operands in Byte mode.

XOR.B
1 1
#0x23, W0 ; XOR 0x23 and W0 (Byte mode) ; Store result to W0

XOR #0x108, W4

; XOR 0x108 and W4 (Word mode) ; Store result to W4
After Instruction W4 603C SR 0000
DS70157C-page 5-260
XOR
Syntax: {label:}
Exclusive OR Wb and Short Literal XOR{.B} Wb, #lit5, Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Operands:
Wb [W0 ... W15] lit5 [0 ... 31] Wd [W0 ... W15] (Wb).XOR.lit5 Wd N, Z 0110 1www wBqq qddd d11k kkkk Compute the logical exclusive OR operation of the contents of the base register Wb and the unsigned 5-bit literal operand and place the result in the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Wd. The w bits select the address of the base register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The k bits provide the literal operand, a 5-bit integer number. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
1 1
XOR.B W4, #0x16, W5 ; XOR W4 and 0x14 (Byte mode) ; Store result to W5
Before Instruction W4 C822 W5 1200 SR 0000 Example 2:

XOR
After Instruction W4 C822 W5 1234 SR 0000

; XOR W2 by 0x1F (Word mode) ; Store result to [W8] ; Post-increment W8
W2, #0x1F, [W8++]
Before Instruction W2 8505 W8 1004 Data 1004 6628 SR 0000
After Instruction W2 8505 W8 1006 Data 1004 851A SR 0008 (N = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-261
XOR
Syntax: {label:}
Exclusive OR Wb and Ws XOR{.B} Wb, Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wd [Wd] [Wd++] [Wd--] [++Wd] [--Wd]
Operands:
Wb [W0 ... W15] Ws [W0 ... W15] Wd [W0 ... W15] (Wb).XOR.(Ws) Wd N, Z 0110 1www wBqq qddd dppp ssss Compute the logical exclusive OR operation of the contents of the source register Ws and the contents of the base register Wb, and place the result in the destination register Wd. Register direct addressing must be used for Wb. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws and Wd. The w bits select the address of the base register. The B bit selects byte or word operation (0 for word, 1 for byte). The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note: The extension .B in the instruction denotes a byte operation rather than a word operation. You may use a .W extension to denote a word operation, but it is not required.
1 1
XOR.B W1, [W5++], [W9++] ; XOR W1 and [W5] (Byte mode) ; Store result to [W9] ; Post-increment W5 and W9
Before Instruction W1 AAAA W5 2000 W9 2600 Data 2000 115A Data 2600 0000 SR 0000
After Instruction W1 AAAA W5 2001 W9 2601 Data 2000 115A Data 2600 00F0 SR 0008 (N = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-262

Example 2:
XOR W1, W5, W9 ; XOR W1 and W5 (Word mode) ; Store the result to W9
Before Instruction W1 FEDC W5 1234 W9 A34D SR 0000
After Instruction W1 FEDC W5 1234 W9 ECE8 SR 0008 (N = 1)
5
DS70157C-page 5-263
ZE
Syntax: {label:}
Zero-Extend Wn ZE Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws], Wnd
Ws [W0 ... W15] Wnd [W0 ... W15] Ws<7:0> Wnd<7:0> 0 Wnd<15:8> N, Z, C 1111 1011 10qq qddd dppp ssss Zero-extend the Least Significant Byte in source working register Ws to a 16-bit value and store the result in the destination working register Wnd. Either register direct or indirect addressing may be used for Ws, and register direct addressing must be used for Wnd. The N flag is cleared and the C flag is set, because the zero-extended word is always positive. The q bits select the destination Address mode. The d bits select the destination register. The p bits select the source Address mode. The s bits select the source register. Note 1: This operation converts a byte to a word, and it uses no .B or .W extension. 2: The source Ws is addressed as a byte operand, so any address modification is by 1.

ZE
1 1
W3, W4 ; zero-extend W3 ; Store result to W4

ZE [W2++], W12

; Zero-extend [W2] ; Store to W12 ; Post-increment W2
Before Instruction W2 0900 W12 1002 Data 0900 268F SR 0000
After Instruction W2 0901 W12 008F Data 0900 268F SR 0001 (C = 1)
DS70157C-page 5-264
6
Reference
Section 6. Reference
HIGHLIGHTS
This section of the manual contains reference information for the dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F architectures. It consists of the following sections: 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 Data Memory Map ......................................................................................................... 6-2 Core Special Function Register Map ............................................................................. 6-4 Program Memory Map ................................................................................................... 6-7 Instruction Bit Map ......................................................................................................... 6-9 Instruction Set Summary Table .................................................................................... 6-11 Revision History ........................................................................................................... 6-19
DS70157C-page 6-1

6.1 Data Memory Map
Sample dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F data memory maps are shown in Figure 6-1 and Figure 6-2, respectively. Figure 6-1: dsPIC30F Data Memory Map Example
MSB Address MSB 0x0001 0x07FF 0x0801 Near RAM 0x17FF 0x1801 0x1FFF 0x27FF 0x2801
16-bits LSB SFR Space
LSB Address 0x0000 0x07FE 0x0800
X Data RAM 0x17FE 0x1800 Y Data RAM 0x27FE 0x2800 0x8000
0x8001
X Data RAM Unimplemented Provides Program Space Visibility
0xFFFF
0xFFFE
Note 1: The partition between the X and Y data spaces is device specific. Refer to the appropriate device data sheet for further details. The data space boundaries indicated here are for example purposes only. 2: Refer to Section 4. Instruction Set Details for information on Data Addressing modes, performing byte accesses and word alignment requirements. 3: Refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for information on accessing program memory through data address space.
DS70157C-page 6-2
Figure 6-2: dsPIC33F Data Memory Map Example
6
Reference
MSB Add ress MSB 2 Kbyte SFR Space 0x0001 0x07FF 0x0801
16-bits LSB SFR Space
LSB Address 0x0000 0x07FE 0x0800 8 Kbyte Near Data Space
X Data RAM (X)
30 Kbyte SRAM space
0x47FF 0x4801 Y Data RAM (Y) 0x77FF 0x7800 0x7FFF 0x8001
0x47FE 0x4800
DMA RAM
0x77FE 0x7800 0x7FFE 0x8000
X Data Unimplemented (X) Optionally Mapped into Program Memory
0xFFFF
0xFFFE
Note 1: The partition between the X and Y data spaces is device-specific. Refer to the appropriate device data sheet for further details. The data space boundaries indicated here are for example purposes only. 2: Refer to Section 4. Instruction Set Details for information on Data Addressing modes, performing byte accesses and word alignment requirements. 3: Refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for information on accessing program memory through data address space.
DS70157C-page 6-3

6.2 Core Special Function Register Map
The Core Special Function Register Map is shown in Table 6-1. Please refer to the dsPIC30F/dsPIC33F Data Sheet for complete register descriptions and the memory map of the remaining Special Function Registers.
DS70157C-page 6-4
Table 6-1:
Name W0 W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 W10 W11 W12 W13 W14 W15 SPLIM ACCAL ACCAH ACCAU ACCBL ACCBH ACCBU PCL PCH TBLPAG PSVPAG RCOUNT DCOUNT DOSTARTL DOSTARTH DOENDL DOENDH SR
dsPIC30F/dsPIC33F Core Register Map

Addr 0000 0002 0004 0006 0008 000A 000C 000E 0010 0012 0014 0016 0018 001A 001C 001E 0020 0022 0024 0026 0028 002A 002C 002E 0030 0032 0034 0036 0038 003A 003C 003E 0040 0042 OA OB SA SB OAB SAB DA Sign-extension of ACCB<39> PCL RCOUNT DCOUNT DOSTARTL DOENDL DC IPL2 IPL1 IPL0 RA DOENDH N OV Z C DOSTARTH PCH TBLPAG PSVPAG Sign-extension of ACCA<39> ACCBL ACCBH ACCBU Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset State 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ACCAU 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 0000 0000 00xx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 0000 0000 00xx xxxx 0000 0000 0000 0000 W0 (WREG) W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 W10 W11 W12 W13 W14 W15 SPLIM ACCAL ACCAH
Reference
2008 Microchip Technology Inc. DS70157C-page 6-5
DS70157C-page 6-6 2008 Microchip Technology Inc.
Table 6-1:
Name CORCON MODCON XMODSRT XMODEND YMODSRT YMODEND XBREV DISICNT Reserved
dsPIC30F/dsPIC33F Core Register Map (Continued)

Addr 0044 0046 0048 004A 004C 004E 0050 0052 0054-007E BREN Bit 15 XMODEN Bit 14 YMODEN Bit 13 Bit 12 US Bit 11 EDT Bit 10 DL2 Bit 9 DL1 Bit 8 DL0 Bit 7 SATA Bit 6 SATB Bit 5 SATDW Bit 4 ACCSAT Bit 3 IPL3 Bit 2 PSV Bit 1 RND Bit 0 IF Reset State 0000 0000 0010 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
BWM<3:0> XMODSRT<15:0> XMODEND<15:0> YMODSRT<15:0> YMODEND<15:0> XBREV<14:0>
YWM<3:0>
XWM<3:0>
DISICNT<13:0>
6.3 Program Memory Map
Sample dsPIC30F and dsPIC33F program memory maps are shown in Figure 6-3 and Figure 6-4, respectively. Figure 6-3: dsPIC30F Program Space Memory Map Example
Reset GOTO Instruction Reset Target Address Osc. Fail Trap Vector Stack Error Trap Vector Address Error Trap Vector Math Error Trap Vector Software Trap Reserved Vector Reserved Vector Reserved Vector Interrupt 0 Vector Interrupt 1 Vector 000000 000002 000004
6
Reference
000014
Vector Tables
User Memory Space
Interrupt 52 Vector Interrupt 53 Vector Alternate Vector Table User Flash Program Memory (48K instructions) Reserved (Read 0s) Data Flash (4 Kbytes)
00007E 000080 0000FE 000100
017FFE 018000 7FEFFE 7FF000
7FFFFE 800000 Reserved 8005BE 8005C0 8005FE 800600
UNITID
Configuration Memory Space
Reserved
Fuse Configuration Registers
F7FFFE F80000 F8000E F80010
Reserved FEFFFE FF0000 FFFFFE
DEVID
DS70157C-page 6-7

Figure 6-4: dsPIC33F Program Space Memory Map Example
000014 Interrupt Vector Table 0000FE 000100 000104 0001FE 000200 User Flash Program Memory (87296 x 24-bit) 02ABFE 02AC00 Reserved
User Memory Space
Reserved Alternate Vector Table
7FFFFE 800000
Reserved Configuration Memory Space
Device Configuration Registers (12 x 8-bit)
F7FFFE F80000 F80016 F80018
Reserved FEFFFE FF0000 FF0002 FF0004 FFFFFE
Device ID (2 x 16-bit) Reserved
DS70157C-page 6-8
Vector Tables
Reset GOTO Instruction Reset Target Address Reserved Osc. Fail Trap Vector Address Error Trap Vector Stack Error Trap Vector Math Error Trap Vector DMA Error Vector Reserved Vector Reserved Vector
000000 000002 000004
6.4 Instruction Bit Map
Instruction encoding for the dsPIC30F/33F is summarized in Table 6-2. This table contains the encoding for the Most Significant Byte of each instruction. The first column in the table represents bits 23:20 of the opcode, and the first row of the table represents bits 19:16 of the opcode. The first byte of the opcode is formed by taking the first column bit value and appending the first row bit value. For instance, the Most Significant Byte of the PUSH instruction (last row, ninth column) is encoded with 11111000b (0xF8). Note: The complete opcode for each instruction may be determined by the instruction descriptions in Section 5. Instruction Descriptions, using Table 5.2 through Table 5-12.
6
Reference
DS70157C-page 6-9
Opcode<23:20>
Table 6-2:
dsPIC30F/dsPIC33F Instruction Encoding

Opcode<19:16> 0000 0001 BRA CALL GOTO RCALL 0010 CALL 0011 0100 GOTO 0101 RETLW 0110 RETFIE RETURN 0111 RCALL 1000 DO 1001 REPEAT 1010 1011 1100 BRA (OA) 1101 BRA (OB) 1110 BRA (SA) 1111 BRA (SB)
0000
NOP
0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 BSET ADD ADDC BCLR SUB SUBB MAC MPY MPY.N MSC SL CP0 ASR LSR CP CPB RLC RLNC CP0 ED EDAC MAC MPY BTG AND XOR BTST IOR MOV CLRAC BRA (OV) BRA (C) BRA (Z) BRA (N)
SUBR MOV BRA (LE) ADD SUB AND IOR MOV MOV BTSTS ADD ADDC BTST SUB SUBB MAC MPY MPY.N MSC SL ASR LSR RLC RLNC CPSGT CPSLT BTSS AND XOR BTSC IOR MOV MOVSAC BSET MUL.US MUL.UU SFTAC BCLR MUL.SS MUL.SU ADD BTG TBLRDH TBLRDL LAC BRA (LT) BRA (LEU) BRA BRA (NOV) BRA (NC) BRA (NZ)
SUBBR
BRA (NN) ADDC SUBB XOR MOV
BRA (GT)
BRA (GE)
BRA (GTU)
BTST TBLWTH TBLWTL ADD NEG SUB
BTSTS MUL SAC
BSW SUB SUBB SAC.R
BTSS MOV.D
BTSC MOV FF1L FF1R
1101 1110 1111
RRC RRNC CP CPB
RRC RRNC CPSEQ CPSNE
DIV.S DIV.U INC INC2 PUSH
DIVF DEC DEC2 POP
SL DEC DEC2 DAW EXCH SWAP
ASR LSR COM NEG CLRWDT PWRSAV POP.S PUSH.S RESET
FBCL CLR SETM NOPR
COM NEG LNK ULNK
CLR SETM SE ZE
INC INC2 DISI
6.5 Instruction Set Summary Table
The complete dsPIC30F/33F instruction set is summarized in Table 6-3. This table contains an alphabetized listing of the instruction set. It includes instruction assembly syntax, description, size (in 24-bit words), execution time (in instruction cycles), affected status bits and the page number in which the detailed description can be found. Table 1-2 identifies the symbols which are used in the Instruction Set Summary Table.
6
Reference
DS70157C-page 6-11
Table 6-3:
dsPIC30F/dsPIC33F Instruction Set Summary Table

Assembly Syntax Mnemonic, Operands Description Destination = f + WREG Wn = lit10 + Wn Wd = Wb + lit5 Wd = Wb + Ws Add accumulators 16-bit signed add to accumulator Destination = f + WREG + (C) Wn = lit10 + Wn + (C) Wd = Wb + lit5 + (C) Wd = Wb + Ws + (C) Destination = f .AND. WREG Wn = lit10 .AND. Wn Wd = Wb .AND. lit5 Wd = Wb .AND. Ws Destination = arithmetic right shift f Wd = arithmetic right shift Ws Wnd = arithmetic right shift Wb by lit4 Wnd = arithmetic right shift Wb by Wns Bit clear f Bit clear Ws Branch unconditionally Computed branch Branch if Carry Branch if greater than or equal Branch if Carry Branch if greater than Branch if unsigned greater than Branch if less than or equal Branch if unsigned less than or equal Branch if less than Branch if not Carry Branch if Negative Branch if not Carry Branch if not Negative Words 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cycles 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) OA OB SA SB OAB SAB DC N OV Z C Page # 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-19 5-20 5-21 5-22 5-24 5-25 5-27 5-28 5-29 5-30 5-31 5-32 5-33 5-35 5-36 5-37 5-38 5-39 5-40 5-41 5-42 5-43 5-44 5-45
ADD ADD ADD ADD ADD ADD ADDC ADDC ADDC ADDC AND AND AND AND ASR ASR ASR ASR BCLR BCLR BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA Legend: Note:
f {,WREG} #lit10,Wn Wb,#lit5,Wd Wb,Ws,Wd Acc Ws,#Slit4,Acc f {,WREG} #lit10,Wn Wb,#lit5,Wd Wb,Ws,Wd f {,WREG} #lit10,Wn Wb,#lit5,Wd Wb,Ws,Wd f {,WREG} Ws,Wd Wb,#lit4,Wnd Wb,Wns,Wnd f,#bit4 Ws,#bit4 Expr Wn C,Expr GE,Expr GEU,Expr GT,Expr GTU,Expr LE,Expr LEU,Expr LT,Expr LTU,Expr N,Expr NC,Expr NN,Expr
set or cleared; may be cleared, but never set; may be set, but never cleared; 1 always set; 0 always cleared; SA, SB and SAB are only modified if the corresponding saturation is enabled, otherwise unchanged.
unchanged
Table 6-3:
dsPIC30F/dsPIC33F Instruction Set Summary Table (Continued)

Assembly Syntax Mnemonic, Operands Description Branch if not Overflow Branch if not Zero Branch if Accumulator A overflow Branch if Accumulator B overflow Branch if Overflow Branch if Accumulator A saturated Branch if Accumulator B saturated Branch if Zero Bit set f Bit set Ws Write C bit to Ws<Wb> Write Z bit to Ws<Wb> Bit toggle f Bit toggle Ws Bit test f, skip if clear Bit test Ws, skip if clear Bit test f, skip if set Bit test Ws, skip if set Bit test f Bit test Ws to C Bit test Ws to Z Bit test Ws<Wb> to C Bit test Ws<Wb> to Z Bit test then set f Bit test Ws to C then set Bit test Ws to Z then set Call subroutine Call indirect subroutine f = 0x0000 WREG = 0x0000 Wd = 0 Clear accumulator Clear Watchdog Timer f {,WREG} Ws,Wd Destination = f Wd = Ws Words 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cycles 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 OA 0 OB 0 SA 0 SB 0 OAB 0 SAB 0 DC N OV Z C Page # 5-46 5-47 5-48 5-49 5-50 5-51 5-52 5-53 5-54 5-55 5-56 5-56 5-58 5-59 5-60 5-62 5-64 5-65 5-67 5-68 5-68 5-69 5-69 5-71 5-72 5-72 5-73 5-74 5-75 5-75 5-76 5-77 5-79 5-80 5-81
Reference
BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BRA BSET BSET BSW.C BSW.Z BTG BTG BTSC BTSC BTSS BTSS BTST BTST.C BTST.Z BTST.C BTST.Z BTSTS BTSTS.C BTSTS.Z CALL CALL CLR CLR CLR CLR CLRWDT COM COM Legend: Note:
NOV,Expr NZ,Expr OA,Expr OB,Expr OV,Expr SA,Expr SB,Expr Z,Expr f,#bit4 Ws,#bit4 Ws,Wb Ws,Wb f,#bit4 Ws,#bit4 f,#bit4 Ws,#bit4 f,#bit4 Ws,#bit4 f,#bit4 Ws,#bit4 Ws,#bit4 Ws,Wb Ws,Wb f,#bit4 Ws,#bit4 Ws,#bit4 Expr Wn f WREG Wd Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd,AWB
unchanged
Table 6-3:

Assembly Syntax Mnemonic, Operands Description Compare (f WREG) Compare (Wb lit5) Compare (Wb Ws) Compare (f 0x0000) Compare (Ws 0x0000) Compare with borrow (f WREG C) Compare with borrow (Wb lit5 C) Compare with borrow (Wb Ws C) Compare (Wb with Wn), skip if = Signed Compare (Wb with Wn), skip if > Signed Compare (Wb with Wn), skip if < Signed Compare (Wb with Wn), skip if Wn = decimal adjust Wn Destination = f 1 Wd = Ws 1 Destination = f 2 Wd = Ws 2 Disable interrupts for lit14 instruction cycles Signed 16/16-bit integer divide Signed 32/16-bit integer divide Unsigned 16/16-bit integer divide Unsigned 32/16-bit integer divide Signed 16/16-bit fractional divide Do code to PC + Expr, (lit14 + 1) times Do code to PC + Expr, (Wn + 1) times Euclidean distance (no accumulate) Euclidean distance Swap Wns and Wnd Find bit change from left (MSb) side Find first one from left (MSb) side Find first one from right (LSb) side Go to address Go to address indirectly Words 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 Cycles 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 1 1 1 1 1 18 18 18 18 18 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 OA OB SA SB OAB SAB 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 DC N OV Z C Page # 5-82 5-83 5-84 5-85 5-86 5-87 5-88 5-89 5-91 5-92 5-93 5-94 5-95 5-96 5-97 5-98 5-99 5-100 5-101 5-101 5-103 5-103 5-105 5-107 5-109 5-111 5-113 5-115 5-116 5-118 5-120 5-122 5-123
CP CP CP CP0 CP0 CPB CPB CPB CPSEQ CPSGT CPSLT CPSNE DAW.B DEC DEC DEC2 DEC2 DISI DIV.S DIV.SD DIV.U DIV.UD DIVF DO DO ED EDAC EXCH FBCL FF1L FF1R GOTO GOTO Legend: Note:
f Wb,#lit5 Wb,Ws f Ws f Wb,#lit5 Wb,Ws Wb, Wn Wb, Wn Wb, Wn Wb, Wn Wn f {,WREG} Ws,Wd f {,WREG} Ws,Wd #lit14 Wm, Wn Wm, Wn Wm, Wn Wm, Wn Wm, Wn #lit14, Expr Wn, Expr Wm*Wm,Acc,Wx,Wy,Wxd Wm*Wm,Acc,Wx,Wy,Wxd Wns,Wnd Ws,Wnd Ws,Wnd Ws,Wnd Expr Wn
unchanged
Table 6-3:

Assembly Syntax Mnemonic, Operands Description Destination = f + 1 Wd = Ws + 1 Destination = f + 2 Wd = Ws + 2 Destination = f .IOR. WREG Wn = lit10 .IOR. Wn Wd = Wb .IOR. lit5 Wd = Wb .IOR. Ws Load accumulator Link Frame Pointer Destination = logical right shift f Wd = logical right shift Ws Wnd = logical right shift Wb by lit4 Wnd = logical right shift Wb by Wns Multiply and accumulate Square and accumulate Move f to destination Move WREG to f Move f to Wnd Move Wns to f Move 8-bit unsigned literal to Wnd Move 16-bit literal to Wnd Move [Ws + Slit10] to Wnd Move Wns to [Wd + Slit10] Move Ws to Wd Move double Wns to Wnd:Wnd + 1 Move double Wns:Wns + 1 to Wnd Move [Wx] to Wxd, and [Wy] to Wyd Multiply Wn by Wm to accumulator Square to accumulator -(Multiply Wn by Wm) to accumulator Multiply and subtract from accumulator W3:W2 = f * WREG {Wnd + 1,Wnd} = sign(Wb) * sign(Ws) Words 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cycles 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 OA OB SA SB OAB SAB 0 0 DC N OV Z C Page # 5-124 5-125 5-126 5-127 5-128 5-129 5-130 5-131 5-133 5-135 5-136 5-137 5-139 5-140 5-141 5-143 5-145 5-146 5-147 5-148 5-149 5-150 5-151 5-152
Reference
INC INC INC2 INC2 IOR IOR IOR IOR LAC LNK LSR LSR LSR LSR MAC MAC MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV.B MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV.D MOV.D MOVSAC MPY MPY MPY.N MSC MUL MUL.SS Legend: Note:
f {,WREG} Ws,Wd f {,WREG} Ws,Wd f {,WREG} #lit10,Wn Wb,#lit5,Wd Wb,Ws,Wd Ws,#Slit4, Acc #lit14 f {,WREG} Ws,Wd Wb,#lit4,Wnd Wb,Wns,Wnd Wm*Wn,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd,AWB Wm*Wm,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd, f {,WREG} WREG,f f,Wnd Wns,f #lit8,Wnd #lit16,Wnd [Ws+Slit10],Wnd Wns,[Wd+Slit10] Ws,Wd Wns,Wnd Wns,Wnd Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd,AWB Wm*Wn,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd Wm*Wm,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd Wm*Wn,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd Wm*Wn,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd,AWB f Wb,Ws,Wnd
5-153 5-155 5-157 5-159 5-161 5-163 5-165 5-167 5-169 5-170
unchanged
Table 6-3:

Assembly Syntax Mnemonic, Operands Description {Wnd + 1,Wnd} = sign(Wb) * unsign(lit5) {Wnd + 1,Wnd} = sign(Wb) * unsign(Ws) {Wnd + 1,Wnd} = unsign(Wb) * sign(Ws) {Wnd + 1,Wnd} = unsign(Wb) * unsign(lit5) {Wnd + 1,Wnd} = unsign(Wb) * unsign(Ws) Destination = f + 1 Wd = Ws + 1 Negate accumulator No operation No operation f Wd Wnd f Ws Wns #lit1 Expr Wn #lit14 Wn POP TOS to f POP TOS to Wd POP double from TOS to Wnd:Wnd + 1 POP shadow registers PUSH f to TOS PUSH Ws to TOS PUSH double Wns:Wns + 1 to TOS PUSH shadow registers Enter Power-saving mode Relative call Computed call Repeat next instruction (lit14 + 1) times Repeat next instruction (Wn + 1) times Software device Reset Return from interrupt enable #lit10,Wn f {,WREG} Ws,Wd f {,WREG} Ws,Wd f {,WREG} Ws,Wd f {,WREG} Ws,Wd Return with lit10 in Wn Return from subroutine Destination = rotate left through Carry f Wd = rotate left through Carry Ws Destination = rotate left (no Carry) f Wd = rotate left (no Carry) Ws Destination = rotate right through Carry f Wd = rotate right through Carry Ws Destination = rotate right (no Carry) f Wd = rotate right (no Carry) Ws Words 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cycles 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 3 (2) 3 (2) 3 (2) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 OA OB SA SB OAB SAB DC N OV Z C Page # 5-172 5-174 5-176 5-178 5-179 5-181 5-182 5-183 5-184 5-185 5-186 5-187 5-188 5-189 5-190 5-191 5-192 5-193 5-194 5-195 5-196 5-197 5-198 5-200 5-201 5-202 5-203 5-204 5-205 5-207 5-208 5-210 5-211 5-213 5-214
MUL.SU MUL.SU MUL.US MUL.UU MUL.UU NEG NEG NEG NOP NOPR POP POP POP.D POP.S PUSH PUSH PUSH.D PUSH.S PWRSAV RCALL RCALL REPEAT REPEAT RESET RETFIE RETLW RETURN RLC RLC RLNC RLNC RRC RRC RRNC RRNC Legend: Note:
Wb,#lit5,Wnd Wb,Ws,Wnd Wb,Ws,Wnd Wb,#lit5,Wnd Wb,Ws,Wnd f {,WREG} Ws,Wd Acc
unchanged
Table 6-3:

Assembly Syntax Mnemonic, Operands Description Store accumulator Store rounded Accumulator Wd = sign-extended Ws f = 0xFFFF WREG = 0xFFFF Ws = 0xFFFF Arithmetic shift accumulator by Slit6 Arithmetic shift accumulator by (Wb) Destination = arithmetic left shift f Wd = arithmetic left shift Ws Wnd = left shift Wb by lit4 Wnd = left shift Wb by Wns Destination = f WREG Wn = Wn lit10 Wd = Wb lit5 Wd = Wb Ws Subtract accumulators destination = f WREG (C) Wn = Wn lit10 (C) Wd = Wb lit5 (C) Wd = Wb Ws (C) Destination = WREG f (C) Wd = lit5 Wb (C) Wd = Ws Wb (C) Destination = WREG f Wd = lit5 Wb Wd = Ws Wb Wn = byte or nibble swap Wn Read high program word to Wd Read low program word to Wd Write Ws to high program word Write Ws to low program word Unlink Frame Pointer Words 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cycles 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 OA OB SA SB OAB SAB DC N OV Z C Page # 5-216 5-218 5-220 5-221 5-221 5-222 5-223 5-224 5-225 5-226 5-228 5-229 5-230 5-231 5-232 5-233 5-235 5-236 5-237 5-238 5-239 5-241 5-242 5-243 5-245 5-246 5-247 5-249 5-250 5-252 5-254 5-256 5-258
Reference
SAC SAC.R SE SETM SETM SETM SFTAC SFTAC SL SL SL SL SUB SUB SUB SUB SUB SUBB SUBB SUBB SUBB SUBBR SUBBR SUBBR SUBR SUBR SUBR SWAP TBLRDH TBLRDL TBLWTH TBLWTL ULNK Legend: Note:
Acc,#Slit4,Wd Acc,#Slit4,Wd Ws,Wd f WREG Ws Acc,#Slit6 Acc,Wb f {,WREG} Ws,Wd Wb,#lit4,Wnd Wb,Wns,Wnd f {,WREG} #lit10,Wn Wb,#lit5,Wd Wb,Ws,Wd Acc f {,WREG} #lit10,Wn Wb,#lit5,Wd Wb,Ws,Wd f {,WREG} Wb,#lit5,Wd Wb,Ws,Wd f {,WREG} Wb,#lit5,Wd Wb,Ws,Wd Wn Ws,Wd Ws,Wd Ws,Wd Ws,Wd
unchanged
Table 6-3:

Assembly Syntax Mnemonic, Operands Description Destination = f .XOR. WREG Wn = lit10 .XOR. Wn Wd = Wb .XOR. lit5 Wd = Wb .XOR. Ws Wnd = zero-extended Ws Words 1 1 1 1 1 Cycles 1 1 1 1 1 OA OB SA SB OAB SAB DC 0 N OV Z C 1 Page # 5-259 5-260 5-261 5-262 5-264
XOR XOR XOR XOR ZE Legend: Note:
f {,WREG} #lit10,Wn Wb,#lit5,Wd Wb,Ws,Wd Ws,Wnd
unchanged
6.6 Revision History
Revision A This is the initial release of this section. Revision B This revision incorporates all known errata at the time of this document update. Revision C (February 2008) This revision includes the following corrections and updates: Instruction Updates: - Updated BRA Instruction (see BRA) - Updated DIVF Instruction (see DIVF) - Updated DO Instruction (see DO) - Updated SUB instruction (see SUB)
6
Reference
DS70157C-page 6-19

NOTES:
DS70157C-page 6-20
Index
INDEX
A
Accumulator A, Accumulator B................................................2-5 Accumulator Access................................................................4-33 Accumulator Usage .................................................................4-32 Addressing Modes for Wd Destination Register...................5-3 Addressing Modes for Ws Source Register ..........................5-3 Assigned Working Register Usage .......................................4-27
I
Immediate Addressing ..............................................................4-9 Operands in the Instruction Set......................................4-9 Implied DSP Operands ...........................................................4-27 Implied Frame and Stack Pointer..........................................4-27 Instruction Bit Map.....................................................................6-9 Instruction Description Example..............................................5-6 Instruction Descriptions ............................................................5-7 ADD (16-bit Signed Add to Accumulator) ...................5-12 ADD (Add Accumulators) ..............................................5-11 ADD (Add f to WREG) .....................................................5-7 ADD (Add Literal to Wn) ..................................................5-8 ADD (Add Wb to Short Literal) .......................................5-9 ADD (Add Wb to Ws) .....................................................5-10 ADDC (Add f to WREG with Carry) .............................5-14 ADDC (Add Literal to Wn with Carry) ..........................5-15 ADDC (Add Wb to Short Literal with Carry) ...............5-16 ADDC (Add Wb to Ws with Carry) ...............................5-17 AND (AND f and WREG)...............................................5-19 AND (AND Literal and Wd) ...........................................5-20 AND (AND Wb and Short Literal).................................5-21 AND (AND Wb and Ws) ................................................5-22 ASR (Arithmetic Shift Right by Short Literal)..............5-27 ASR (Arithmetic Shift Right by Wns) ...........................5-28 ASR (Arithmetic Shift Right f) .......................................5-24 ASR (Arithmetic Shift Right Ws)...................................5-25 BCLR (Bit Clear in Ws) ..................................................5-30 BCLR.B (Bit Clear f) .......................................................5-29 BRA (Branch Unconditionally) ......................................5-31 BRA (Computed Branch)...............................................5-32 BRA C (Branch if Carry) ................................................5-33 BRA GE (Branch if Signed Greater Than or Equal)..................................................................5-35 BRA GEU (Branch if Unsigned Greater Than or Equal)..................................................................5-36 BRA GT (Branch if Signed Greater Than) ..................5-37 BRA GTU (Branch if Unsigned Greater Than)...........5-38 BRA LE (Branch if Signed Less Than or Equal)........5-39 BRA LEU (Branch if Unsigned Less Than or Equal)..................................................................5-40 BRA LT (Branch if Signed Less Than) ........................5-41 BRA LTU (Branch if Not Carry) ....................................5-44 BRA LTU (Branch if Unsigned Less Than).................5-42 BRA N (Branch if Negative) ..........................................5-43 BRA NN (Branch if Not Negative) ................................5-45 BRA NOV (Branch if Not Overflow) .............................5-46 BRA NZ (Branch if Not Zero) ........................................5-47 BRA OA (Branch if Overflow Accumulator A) ............5-48 BRA OB (Branch if Overflow Accumulator B) ............5-49 BRA OV (Branch if Overflow) .......................................5-50 BRA SA (Branch if Saturation Accumulator A) ..........5-51 BRA SB (Branch if Saturation Accumulator B) ..........5-52 BRA Z (Branch if Zero) ..................................................5-53 BSET (Bit Set f)...............................................................5-54 BSET (Bit Set in Ws)......................................................5-55 BSW (Bit Write in Ws)....................................................5-56 BTG (Bit Toggle f)...........................................................5-58 BTG (Bit Toggle in Ws)..................................................5-59 BTSC (Bit Test f, Skip if Clear) .....................................5-60 BTSC (Bit Test Ws, Skip if Clear) ................................5-62 BTSS (Bit Test f, Skip if Set).........................................5-64 BTSS (Bit Test Ws, Skip if Set) ....................................5-65 BTST (Bit Test f) .............................................................5-67 BTST (Bit Test in Ws) .......................................... 5-68, 5-69
B
Byte Operations .......................................................................4-13
C
Code Examples Z Status bit Operation for 32-bit Addition..................4-26 Base MAC Syntax...........................................................4-35 File Register Addressing .................................................4-3 File Register Addressing and WREG ............................4-3 Frame Pointer Usage .....................................................4-23 Illegal Word Move Operations ......................................4-18 Immediate Addressing ...................................................4-10 Indirect Addressing with Effective Address Update ....4-6 Indirect Addressing with Register Offset.......................4-7 Legal Word Move Operations .......................................4-17 MAC Accumulator WB Syntax......................................4-36 MAC Prefetch Syntax.....................................................4-35 Move with Literal Offset Instructions..............................4-7 MSC Instruction with Two Prefetches and Accumulator Write Back .......................................4-36 Normalizing with FBCL ..................................................4-39 Register Direct Addressing .............................................4-4 Sample Byte Math Operations......................................4-15 Sample Byte Move Operations.....................................4-14 Scaling with FBCL ..........................................................4-38 Stack Pointer Usage.......................................................4-21 Unsigned f and WREG Multiply (Legacy MULWF Instruction) ..............................................................4-29 Using 10-bit Literals for Byte Operands ......................4-19 Using the Default Working Register WREG ...............4-28 Conditional Branch Instructions.............................................4-25 Core Control Register ...............................................................2-9 Core Special Function Register Map......................................6-4
Index
D
Data Addressing Mode Tree ..................................................4-10 Data Addressing Modes ...........................................................4-2 Data Memory Map .....................................................................6-2 DCOUNT Register.....................................................................2-6 Default Working Register (WREG) ............................... 2-3, 4-28 Development Support ...............................................................1-2 DOEND Register........................................................................2-6 DOSTART Register...................................................................2-6 DSP Accumulator Instructions...............................................4-37 DSP Data Formats ..................................................................4-30 DSP MAC Indirect Addressing Modes ...................................4-8 DSP MAC Instructions ............................................................4-33 dsPIC30F/33F Overview ..........................................................2-2
F
File Register Addressing ..........................................................4-2
DS70157C-page 7-1
Index
BTSTS (Bit Test/Set f) ...................................................5-71 BTSTS (Bit Test/Set in Ws)...........................................5-72 CALL (Call Indirect Subroutine)....................................5-74 CALL (Call Subroutine)..................................................5-73 CLR (Clear Accumulator, Prefetch Operands)...........5-77 CLR (Clear f or WREG) .................................................5-75 CLR (Clear Wd)...............................................................5-76 CLRWDT (Clear Watchdog Timer) ..............................5-79 COM (Complement f) .....................................................5-80 COM (Complement Ws) ................................................5-81 CP (Compare f with WREG, Set Status Flags)..........5-82 CP (Compare Wb with lit5, Set Status Flags) ............5-83 CP (Compare Wb with Ws, Set Status Flags) ...........5-84 CP0 (Compare f with 0x0, Set Status Flags) .............5-85 CP0 (Compare Ws with 0x0, Set Status Flags).........5-86 CPB (Compare f with WREG using Borrow, Set Status Flags) ...................................................5-87 CPB (Compare Wb with lit5 using Borrow, Set Status Flags) ...................................................5-88 CPB (Compare Ws with Wb using Borrow, Set Status Flags) ...................................................5-89 CPSEQ (Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Equal)..........5-91 CPSGT (Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Greater Than)......................................................5-92 CPSLT (Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Less Than)...........................................................5-93 CPSNE (Signed Compare Wb with Wn, Skip if Not Equal) ............................................................5-94 DAW.B (Decimal Adjust Wn) ........................................5-95 DEC (Decrement f) .........................................................5-96 DEC (Decrement Ws) ....................................................5-97 DEC2 (Decrement f by 2) ..............................................5-98 DEC2 (Decrement Ws by 2) .........................................5-99 DISI (Disable Interrupts Temporarily)........................5-100 DIV.S (Signed Integer Divide).....................................5-101 DIV.U (Unsigned Integer Divide)................................5-103 DIVF (Fractional Divide) ..............................................5-105 DO (Initialize Hardware Loop Literal) ........................5-107 DO (Initialize Hardware Loop Wn) .............................5-109 ED (Euclidean Distance, No Accumulate) ................5-111 EDAC (Euclidean Distance)........................................5-113 EXCH (Exchange Wns and Wnd) ..............................5-115 FBCL (Find First Bit Change from Left).....................5-116 FF1L (Find First One from Left)..................................5-118 FF1R (Find First One from Right) ..............................5-120 GOTO (Unconditional Indirect Jump) ........................5-123 GOTO (Unconditional Jump) ......................................5-122 INC (Increment f) ..........................................................5-124 INC (Increment Ws)......................................................5-125 INC2 (Increment f by 2) ...............................................5-126 INC2 (Increment Ws by 2)...........................................5-127 IOR (Inclusive OR f and WREG)................................5-128 IOR (Inclusive OR Literal and Wn).............................5-129 IOR (Inclusive OR Wb and Short Literal)..................5-130 IOR (Inclusive OR Wb and Ws)..................................5-131 LAC (Load Accumulator) .............................................5-133 LNK (Allocate Stack Frame) .......................................5-135 LSR (Logical Shift Right by Short Literal) .................5-139 LSR (Logical Shift Right by Wns)...............................5-140 LSR (Logical Shift Right f) ...........................................5-136 LSR (Logical Shift Right Ws) ......................................5-137 MAC (Multiply and Accumulate) .................................5-141 MAC (Square and Accumulate)..................................5-143 MOV (Move 16-bit Literal to Wn)................................5-150 MOV (Move f to Destination).......................................5-145 MOV (Move f to Wnd) ..................................................5-147 MOV (Move Wns to [Wd with offset]) ........................5-152 MOV (Move Wns to f) ..................................................5-148 MOV (Move WREG to f) ..............................................5-146 MOV (Move Ws to Wd)................................................5-153 MOV (Move Ws with offset to Wnd) ..........................5-151 MOV.B (Move 8-bit Literal to Wnd)............................5-149 MOV.D (Double-Word Move from Source to Wnd) ..................................................................5-155 MOV.D (Double-Word Move from Wns to Destination) ......................................................5-157 MOVSAC (Prefetch Operands and Store Accumulator) ........................................................5-159 MPY (Multiply Wm by Wn to Accumulator) ..............5-161 MPY (Square to Accumulator)....................................5-163 MPY.N (Multiply -Wm by Wn to Accumulator) .........5-165 MSC (Multiply and Subtract from Accumulator) ......5-167 MUL (Integer Unsigned Multiply f and WREG) ........5-169 MUL.SS (Integer 16x16-bit Signed Multiply) ............5-170 MUL.SU (Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned Multiply) .................................................................5-174 MUL.SU (Integer 16x16-bit Signed-Unsigned Short Literal Multiply) ..........................................5-172 MUL.US (Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned-Signed Multiply) .................................................................5-176 MUL.UU (Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Multiply) .......5-179 MUL.UU (Integer 16x16-bit Unsigned Short Literal Multiply) .....................................................5-178 NEG (Negate Accumulator) ........................................5-183 NEG (Negate f) .............................................................5-181 NEG (Negate Ws).........................................................5-182 NOP (No Operation).....................................................5-184 NOPR (No Operation)..................................................5-185 POP (Pop TOS to f)......................................................5-186 POP (Pop TOS to Wd).................................................5-187 POP.D (Double Pop TOS to Wnd/ Wnd+1)...................................................................5-188 POP.S (Pop Shadow Registers) ................................5-189 PUSH (Push f to TOS).................................................5-190 PUSH (Push Ws to TOS) ............................................5-191 PUSH.D (Double Push Wns/ Wns+1 to TOS) ......................................................5-192 PUSH.S (Push Shadow Registers)............................5-193 PWRSAV (Enter Power Saving Mode) .....................5-194 RCALL (Computed Relative Call) ..............................5-196 RCALL (Relative Call)..................................................5-195 REPEAT (Repeat Next Instruction lit14 Times) .....5-197 REPEAT (Repeat Next Instruction Wn Times) ........5-198 RESET (Reset) .............................................................5-200 RETFIE (Return from Interrupt)..................................5-201 RETLW (Return with Literal in Wn)............................5-202 RETURN (Return) ........................................................5-203 RLC (Rotate Left f through Carry)..............................5-204 RLC (Rotate Left Ws through Carry) .........................5-205 RLNC (Rotate Left f without Carry)............................5-207 RLNC (Rotate Left Ws without Carry) .......................5-208 RRC (Rotate Right f through Carry) ..........................5-210 RRC (Rotate Right Ws through Carry)......................5-211 RRNC (Rotate Right f without Carry) ........................5-213 RRNC (Rotate Right Ws without Carry)....................5-214 SAC (Store Accumulator) ............................................5-216 SAC.R (Store Rounded Accumulator).......................5-218 SE (Sign-Extend Ws) ...................................................5-220 SETM (Set f or WREG)................................................5-221 SETM (Set Ws) .............................................................5-222 SFTAC (Arithmetic Shift Accumulator by Slit5)........5-223 SFTAC (Arithmetic Shift Accumulator by Wb) .........5-224 SL (Shift Left by Short Literal) ....................................5-228 SL (Shift Left by Wns) ..................................................5-229
Index
DS70157C-page 7-2
Index
SL (Shift Left f) ..............................................................5-225 SL (Shift Left Ws)..........................................................5-226 SUB (Subtract Accumulators).....................................5-235 SUB (Subtract Literal from Wn)..................................5-231 SUB (Subtract Short Literal from Wb) .......................5-232 SUB (Subtract WREG from f) .....................................5-230 SUB (Subtract Ws from Wb) .......................................5-233 SUBB (Subtract Short Literal from Wb with Borrow)..........................................................5-238 SUBB (Subtract Wn from Literal with Borrow) .........5-237 SUBB (Subtract WREG and Carry bit from f)...........5-236 SUBB (Subtract Ws from Wb with Borrow) ..............5-239 SUBBR (Subtract f from WREG with Borrow)..........5-241 SUBBR (Subtract Wb from Short Literal with Borrow)..........................................................5-242 SUBBR (Subtract Wb from Ws with Borrow) ...........5-243 SUBR (Subtract f from WREG) ..................................5-245 SUBR (Subtract Wb from Short Literal) ....................5-246 SUBR (Subtract Wb from Ws) ....................................5-247 SWAP (Byte or Nibble Swap Wn) ..............................5-249 TBLRDH (Table Read High) .......................................5-250 TBLRDL (Table Read Low).........................................5-252 TBLWTH (Table Write High) .......................................5-254 TBLWTL (Table Write Low).........................................5-256 ULNK (De-allocate Stack Frame)...............................5-258 XOR (Exclusive OR f and WREG) .............................5-259 XOR (Exclusive OR Literal and Wn)..........................5-260 XOR (Exclusive OR Wb and Short Literal) ...............5-261 XOR (Exclusive OR Wb and Ws)...............................5-262 ZE (Zero-Extend Wn) ...................................................5-264 Instruction Encoding Field Descriptors Introduction.............5-2 Instruction Set Overview...........................................................3-2 Bit Instructions...................................................................3-7 Compare/Skip Instructions ..............................................3-8 Control Instructions.........................................................3-10 DSP Instructions .............................................................3-10 dsPIC30F/33F Instruction Groups .................................3-2 Logic Instructions..............................................................3-5 Math Instructions...............................................................3-4 Move Instructions..............................................................3-3 Program Flow Instructions...............................................3-9 Rotate/Shift Instructions...................................................3-6 Shadow/Stack Instructions............................................3-10 Instruction Set Summary Table .............................................6-11 Instruction Set Symbols ............................................................1-4 #text ....................................................................................1-4 (text)....................................................................................1-4 <n:m>..................................................................................1-4 [text] ....................................................................................1-4 { } .........................................................................................1-4 {label:}.................................................................................1-4 Acc ......................................................................................1-4 AWB....................................................................................1-4 bit4.......................................................................................1-4 Expr.....................................................................................1-4 f............................................................................................1-4 lit1........................................................................................1-4 lit10......................................................................................1-4 lit14......................................................................................1-4 lit16......................................................................................1-4 lit23......................................................................................1-4 lit4........................................................................................1-4 lit5........................................................................................1-4 lit8........................................................................................1-4 Slit10 ...................................................................................1-4 Slit16 ...................................................................................1-4 Slit4 .....................................................................................1-4 Slit5 .....................................................................................1-4 TOS.....................................................................................1-4 Wb.......................................................................................1-4 Wd.......................................................................................1-4 Wm*Wm .............................................................................1-4 Wm*Wn ..............................................................................1-4 Wm, Wn..............................................................................1-4 Wn.......................................................................................1-4 Wnd.....................................................................................1-4 Wns .....................................................................................1-4 WREG ................................................................................1-4 Ws .......................................................................................1-4 Wx .......................................................................................1-4 Wxd .....................................................................................1-4 Wy .......................................................................................1-4 Wyd .....................................................................................1-4 Instruction Stalls.......................................................................4-12 DO/REPEAT Loops........................................................4-13 Exceptions .......................................................................4-13 Instructions that Change Program Flow......................4-13 PSV...................................................................................4-13 RAW Dependency Detection ........................................4-12 Instruction Symbols ...................................................................5-2 Integer and Fractional Data ...................................................4-30 Representation................................................................4-31 Interrupt Priority Level...............................................................2-8 Introduction .................................................................................1-2
Index
M
MAC Operations .......................................................................4-34 Prefetch Register Updates ............................................4-34 Prefetches........................................................................4-33 Syntax...............................................................................4-34 Write Back........................................................................4-34 MAC Accumulator Write Back Selection................................5-5 MAC or MPY Source Operands (Different Working Register).............................................................................5-5 MAC or MPY Source Operands (Same Working Register).............................................................................5-5 Manual Objective .......................................................................1-2 Microchip Documentation.........................................................1-5 Modulo and Bit-Reversed Addressing Modes.......................4-8 Multi-Cycle Instructions.............................................................3-2 Multi-Word Instructions .............................................................3-3
N
Normalizing the Accumulator with the FBCL Instruction ...4-39
O
Offset Addressing Modes for Wd Destination Register (with Register Offset) .......................................5-3 Offset Addressing Modes for Ws Source Register (with Register Offset) .......................................................5-3
DS70157C-page 7-3
Index
P
PICmicro Microcontroller Compatibility..............................4-28 PRODH PRODL Register Pair .....................................................4-28 Program Addressing Modes ..................................................4-11 Methods of Modifying Flow ...........................................4-11 Program Counter .......................................................................2-5 Program Memory Map ..............................................................6-7 Programmers Model.................................................................2-3 Diagram..............................................................................2-4 Register Descriptions .......................................................2-3 PSVPAG Register......................................................................2-5
X
X Data Space Prefetch Destination ........................................5-4 X Data Space Prefetch Operation...........................................5-4
Y
Y Data Space Prefetch Destination ........................................5-5 Y Data Space Prefetch Operation...........................................5-4
Z
Z Status Bit ...............................................................................4-26
R
RCOUNT Register.....................................................................2-6 Register Direct Addressing ......................................................4-4 Register Indirect Addressing....................................................4-5 Modes .................................................................................4-5 Register Indirect Addressing and the Instruction Set...........4-8 Registers CORCON (Core Control) Register...............................2-12 SR (Status) Register ......................................................2-10 Related Documents...................................................................1-5
Index
S
Scaling Data with the FBCL Instruction................................4-37 Scaling Examples ...........................................................4-38 Shadow Registers......................................................................2-9 Automatic Usage...............................................................2-9 Software Stack Frame Pointer....................................... 2-3, 4-22 Example ...........................................................................4-23 Overflow ...........................................................................4-24 Underflow .........................................................................4-24 Software Stack Pointer ................................................... 2-5, 4-20 Example ...........................................................................4-21 Stack Pointer Limit Register (SPLIM).....................................2-5 Status Register...........................................................................2-7 DSP ALU Status Bits........................................................2-8 Loop Status Bits................................................................2-7 MCU ALU Status Bits.......................................................2-7 Style and Symbol Conventions................................................1-3 Document Conventions ...................................................1-3
T
TBLPAG Register ......................................................................2-5 Third Party Documentation ......................................................1-5
U
Using 10-bit Literal Operands ................................................4-19 10-bit Literal Coding .......................................................4-19
W
Word Move Operations...........................................................4-16 Data Alignment in Memory............................................4-16 Working Register Array.............................................................2-3
DS70157C-page 7-4
Index
NOTES:
Index
DS70157C-page 7-5
WORLDWIDE SALES AND SERVICE

AMERICAS
Corporate Office 2355 West Chandler Blvd. Chandler, AZ 85224-6199 Tel: 480-792-7200 Fax: 480-792-7277 Technical Support: http://support.microchip.com Web Address: www.microchip.com Atlanta Duluth, GA Tel: 678-957-9614 Fax: 678-957-1455 Boston Westborough, MA Tel: 774-760-0087 Fax: 774-760-0088 Chicago Itasca, IL Tel: 630-285-0071 Fax: 630-285-0075 Dallas Addison, TX Tel: 972-818-7423 Fax: 972-818-2924 Detroit Farmington Hills, MI Tel: 248-538-2250 Fax: 248-538-2260 Kokomo Kokomo, IN Tel: 765-864-8360 Fax: 765-864-8387 Los Angeles Mission Viejo, CA Tel: 949-462-9523 Fax: 949-462-9608 Santa Clara Santa Clara, CA Tel: 408-961-6444 Fax: 408-961-6445 Toronto Mississauga, Ontario, Canada Tel: 905-673-0699 Fax: 905-673-6509
ASIA/PACIFIC
Asia Pacific Office Suites 3707-14, 37th Floor Tower 6, The Gateway Harbour City, Kowloon Hong Kong Tel: 852-2401-1200 Fax: 852-2401-3431 Australia - Sydney Tel: 61-2-9868-6733 Fax: 61-2-9868-6755 China - Beijing Tel: 86-10-8528-2100 Fax: 86-10-8528-2104 China - Chengdu Tel: 86-28-8665-5511 Fax: 86-28-8665-7889 China - Hong Kong SAR Tel: 852-2401-1200 Fax: 852-2401-3431 China - Nanjing Tel: 86-25-8473-2460 Fax: 86-25-8473-2470 China - Qingdao Tel: 86-532-8502-7355 Fax: 86-532-8502-7205 China - Shanghai Tel: 86-21-5407-5533 Fax: 86-21-5407-5066 China - Shenyang Tel: 86-24-2334-2829 Fax: 86-24-2334-2393 China - Shenzhen Tel: 86-755-8203-2660 Fax: 86-755-8203-1760 China - Wuhan Tel: 86-27-5980-5300 Fax: 86-27-5980-5118 China - Xiamen Tel: 86-592-2388138 Fax: 86-592-2388130 China - Xian Tel: 86-29-8833-7252 Fax: 86-29-8833-7256 China - Zhuhai Tel: 86-756-3210040 Fax: 86-756-3210049
ASIA/PACIFIC
India - Bangalore Tel: 91-80-4182-8400 Fax: 91-80-4182-8422 India - New Delhi Tel: 91-11-4160-8631 Fax: 91-11-4160-8632 India - Pune Tel: 91-20-2566-1512 Fax: 91-20-2566-1513 Japan - Yokohama Tel: 81-45-471- 6166 Fax: 81-45-471-6122 Korea - Daegu Tel: 82-53-744-4301 Fax: 82-53-744-4302 Korea - Seoul Tel: 82-2-554-7200 Fax: 82-2-558-5932 or 82-2-558-5934 Malaysia - Kuala Lumpur Tel: 60-3-6201-9857 Fax: 60-3-6201-9859 Malaysia - Penang Tel: 60-4-227-8870 Fax: 60-4-227-4068 Philippines - Manila Tel: 63-2-634-9065 Fax: 63-2-634-9069 Singapore Tel: 65-6334-8870 Fax: 65-6334-8850 Taiwan - Hsin Chu Tel: 886-3-572-9526 Fax: 886-3-572-6459 Taiwan - Kaohsiung Tel: 886-7-536-4818 Fax: 886-7-536-4803 Taiwan - Taipei Tel: 886-2-2500-6610 Fax: 886-2-2508-0102 Thailand - Bangkok Tel: 66-2-694-1351 Fax: 66-2-694-1350
EUROPE
Austria - Wels Tel: 43-7242-2244-39 Fax: 43-7242-2244-393 Denmark - Copenhagen Tel: 45-4450-2828 Fax: 45-4485-2829 France - Paris Tel: 33-1-69-53-63-20 Fax: 33-1-69-30-90-79 Germany - Munich Tel: 49-89-627-144-0 Fax: 49-89-627-144-44 Italy - Milan Tel: 39-0331-742611 Fax: 39-0331-466781 Netherlands - Drunen Tel: 31-416-690399 Fax: 31-416-690340 Spain - Madrid Tel: 34-91-708-08-90 Fax: 34-91-708-08-91 UK - Wokingham Tel: 44-118-921-5869 Fax: 44-118-921-5820
01/02/08
DS70157C-page 8-1
Advance Information

DsPIC Programmers Reference 70157C

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DsPIC Programmers Reference 70157C

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DsPIC Programmers Reference 70157C

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

dsPIC30F/33F Programmers Reference Manual

High-performance Digital Signal Controllers

2008 Microchip Technology Inc.

2008 Microchip Technology Inc.

SECTION 2. PROGRAMMERS MODEL

SECTION 3. INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW

SECTION 4. INSTRUCTION SET DETAILS

SECTION 5. INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTIONS

2008 Microchip Technology Inc.

dsPIC30F/33F Programmers Reference Manual

2008 Microchip Technology Inc.

2008 Microchip Technology Inc.

dsPIC30F/33F Programmers Reference Manual

2008 Microchip Technology Inc.

2008 Microchip Technology Inc.

dsPIC30F/33F Programmers Reference Manual

2008 Microchip Technology Inc.

Third Party Documentation

2008 Microchip Technology Inc.

dsPIC30F/33F Programmers Reference Manual

2008 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 2. Programmers Model

2008 Microchip Technology Inc.

dsPIC30F/33F Programmers Reference Manual

2008 Microchip Technology Inc.

Working Register Array

Default Working Register (WREG)

Software Stack Frame Pointer

2008 Microchip Technology Inc.

dsPIC30F/33F Programmers Reference Manual

2008 Microchip Technology Inc.

Stack Pointer Limit Register (SPLIM)

2008 Microchip Technology Inc.

dsPIC30F/33F Programmers Reference Manual

2008 Microchip Technology Inc.

2008 Microchip Technology Inc.

dsPIC30F/33F Programmers Reference Manual

2008 Microchip Technology Inc.

2008 Microchip Technology Inc.

dsPIC30F/33F Programmers Reference Manual

High Byte (SRH): R-0 R-0 OA OB bit 15

Low Byte (SRL): R/W-0 R/W-0 IPL<2:0> bit 7 bit 15

2008 Microchip Technology Inc.

2008 Microchip Technology Inc.

dsPIC30F/33F Programmers Reference Manual

2008 Microchip Technology Inc.

2008 Microchip Technology Inc.

dsPIC30F/33F Programmers Reference Manual

2008 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 3. Instruction Set Overview

2008 Microchip Technology Inc.

dsPIC30F/33F Programmers Reference Manual

Instruction Set Overview

2008 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 3. Instruction Set Overview

Instruction Set Summary Tables

2008 Microchip Technology Inc.

dsPIC30F/33F Programmers Reference Manual

2008 Microchip Technology Inc.

Section 3. Instruction Set Overview

Ws,#Slit4,Acc Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd,AWB WmWm,Acc,Wx,Wy,Wxd WmWm,Acc,Wx,Wy,Wxd Ws,#Slit4,Acc Wm*Wn,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy, Wyd,AWB